NEC Univerge SV9100 Features And Specifications Download Page 1161 | Manualshive

Page: 1161 / 1402

background image

1161

NetLink Multi-SIP Carrier

Description

Multiple SIP Trunk carriers can be utilized when NetLink is configured.

A Secondary NetLink system is able to utilize its own SIP trunks independently to the Primary system.
Refer to Example

– NetLink Multiple Carrier to see the advantage of this feature.

Example

– NetLink Multiple Carrier

Conditions

If SIP Trunk are programmed in a Netlink secondary system, only SIP Profile One can be
utilized.

It is possible to set Register ID for trunks that belong to that specific system. For example, a
Register ID set in the Primary system cannot be assigned to a trunk in the Secondary
system. The allocation of the trunk and Register ID of Program14-12 must be in the same
system.

In order to use CPN in a secondary system, Program 51-19 must be turned on for those
extensions. Once enabled, CPN may be sent on a per station basis using Program 21-19.

Once NetLink is established, PCPro or WebPro must be used to change the system data
related to the SIP trunks.

Any SIP trunks that are built in a system before establishing NetLink will be deleted after
establishing NetLink.

SIP trunks are assigned in the order of system set up. System ID's are needed to assign
Program 10-68 data.

The following programs no longer replicate and can be set on a per system basis: 10-23,
10-37, 21-19, 84-13, and 84-14.

Each NetLink secondary system can use either SIP trunks to a provider or SIP trunk TIE
line mode but not both.

«
...
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
...
»

Summary of Contents for Univerge SV9100

Page 1: ... SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual Rev 1 2 March 2016 ...

Page 2: ...eSolutions has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers The information contained herein is the property of NEC Entreprise Solutions and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Entreprise Solutions Copyright 2015 NEC Nederland B V Olympia 4 1213 NT Hilversum The Netherlands www nec enterprise com ...

Page 3: ...nize Extension Location when Logging in with NetLink 65 Background Music 86 Barge In 88 Battery Backup System Memory 93 Battery Backup System Power 95 Callback 96 Caller ID Call Return 99 Caller ID 102 Caller ID Flexible Ringing 117 Caller ID Memo Display Function 124 Call Appearance CAP Keys 127 Call Arrival CAR Keys 131 Call Duration Timer 137 Call Forwarding 139 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 1...

Page 4: ...e Connection 306 Data Line Security 322 DelayedRinging 324 DepartmentCalling 328 Department StepCalling 339 Dialing Number Preview 341 Dial Pad Confirmation Tone 343 Dial Tone Detection 345 Digital Trunk Clocking 348 Directed CallPickup 352 DirectoryDialing 355 Direct Inward Dialing DID 358 Direct Inward Line DIL 374 Direct Inward System Access DISA 379 Direct Station Selection DSS Console 395 Dis...

Page 5: ...Page 614 InMail Upload Download Audio 621 InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID 629 InMail Cascade Message Notification 635 InMail Email Notification 656 InMail Find Me Follow Me 665 InMail Language Setting 673 Intercom 678 IP Multiline Station SIP 685 NAPTTraversal 691 IP Multiline Station SIP ML440 G566 G266 with AP400 AP300 701 IP Single Line Telephone SIP 718 STDSIPTransfer Unattended 729...

Page 6: ...49 Meet Me Paging Transfer 853 MemoDial 858 Message Waiting 860 Microphone Cutoff 866 Migration SV8100 868 MobileExtension 875 Mobile Extension Callback to Cell Phone 882 Multiple Trunk Types 895 Music on Hold 910 Name Storing 918 NightService 922 Off HookSignaling 929 Description 929 One Touch Calling 934 Operator 938 OPX Off PremiseExtension 940 Paging External 949 Paging External VRS 954 Paging...

Page 7: ...22 Room Monitor 1027 Save Number Dialed 1033 Secondary Incoming Extension 1036 Secretary CallPickup 1041 Secretary Call Buzzer 1043 Security 1045 Selectable Display Messaging 1061 Selectable Ring Tones 1066 SerialCall 1070 Simple MCU Video 1072 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 1084 Single Line Telephones 1093 Softkeys 1103 SpeedDial System Group Station 1105 Speed Dial Telephone Book 1120 S...

Page 8: ...st MulticastPagingMode 1264 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 1270 Uniform Numbering Network 1278 Universal Slots 1285 User Programming Ability 1296 Virtual Extensions 1297 Voice Mail Integration Analog 1305 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys 1324 Voice Over 1329 Voice Response System VRS 1333 Voice Response System VRS Upload Download Audio 1355 Voice Response System VRS Call Forwarding Park a...

Page 9: ...data and programming information Terminal line sizes include 2 6 12 24 and 32 IP Terminals are available in 2 6 12 24 and 32 Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard Only the DT330 series terminals are compatible with APR L adapters An Attendant Add On DCL 60 1 Console is available with 60 stations and or outside line assignments If the page switching key on the DCL ...

Page 10: ...10 SV9100 Key Assignment Example Line Key Kit Softkeys Numbered Keypad Key Kit Hold Transfer Speaker Cursor Pad Answer Recall Feature Mic Menu ...

Page 11: ...e factory default setting if any System Availability describes multiline terminals that can be used with this feature and lists any additional equipment such as adapters or blades that must be installed for this feature to operate Programming lists the memory blocks that support the feature Related Features lists features that are associated with the feature being described e g the Account Codes f...

Page 12: ... nnn This means that the key requires service code nnn and you can program this code in Program 15 07 or by dialing Service Code 851 or 852 Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information Using Handsfree The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree This lets a user just press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call For extensions without Automatic Hand...

Page 13: ...the connected trunk Hiding Account Codes Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone display This prevents for example an unauthorized co worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display When hidden the Account Code digits show on the telephone display Account Code Capacity Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call complet...

Page 14: ...de Entry store the Account Code e g 1234 in a One Touch Key and press the key instead of dialing the code Speed Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes Prevent them from being displayed using Program 35 05 04 When Account Codes are enabled the user must press the three times before the character is passed to the Telco The system recognizes the initial as the beginning of an Account Code entr...

Page 15: ...ls Dial Tone Detection Time Set the time the system waits for the Telco to return Dial Tone 0 64800 seconds 5 35 05 01 Account Code Setup Account Code Mode Select the Account Code Mode 0 Account Codes disabled None 1 Account Codes optional 2 Account Codes required but not verified No verify 3 Account Codes required and verified Verify 0 35 05 02 Account Code Setup Forced Account Code Toll Call Set...

Page 16: ...n a trunk call The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter Use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes enabled You may also use this procedure for incoming calls This procedure is not available for single line telephones 1 Dial OR Press your Account Code key Program 15 07 or SC 851 code 50 2 Dial your Account Code 1 16 digits using 0 9 and If Account Codes are...

Page 17: ...nt to call To enter an Account Code for an incoming call This procedure is not available for single line telephones 1 Answer incoming call If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled the following steps dial digits out to the connected trunk 2 Dial 3 Enter the Account Code You can enter any code of the proper length Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified 4 Dial To enter an Account...

Page 18: ... 911 Does not require Account Code N A Verified Account Codes With Verified Account Codes the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up to 2000 programmed codes If the Account Code is in the list the call goes through If the code dialed is not in the list the system prevents the call Verified Account Codes can have 3 16 digits using the characters 0 9 and During programming y...

Page 19: ...al System Group Station bins can contain stored Account Codes They can be prevented from being displayed using Program 35 05 04 To simplify Account Code Entry store the Account Code e g 1234 in a One Touch Key Just press the key instead of dialing the codes Account Codes appear on the SMDR report even if they are hidden on the telephone display Do not use an asterisk in a PBX CTX access code when ...

Page 20: ... is made after ARS has manipulated the number Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s VRS for Forced Account Codes for Single Line Telephones Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS PBX Compatibility Speed Dial System Group Station Station Message Detail Recording ...

Page 21: ...ass 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 20 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Account Code Toll Restriction Operator Alert Restricted Operation Transfer Turn Off or On the Operator Alert when a forced account code is incorrectly entered 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 21 01 14 System Options for Outgoing Calls Forced Account Code Inter digit Timer The system waits this time for a user to e...

Page 22: ...nt Codes displayed 0 35 06 01 Verified Account Code Table Verified Account Code Enter data in the Verified Account Code Table You can enter up to 2000 codes from 3 16 digits in length For a wild card press the LK 1 This Program will accept a 1 or 2 digit code but requires a valid input of 3 16 digits to function Maximum of 16 digits 1 9 0 Wild card No Setting 40 10 01 Voice Announcement Service Op...

Page 23: ...n incorrect entry your system may automatically alert the operator If Account Codes are hidden each digit you dial shows on the telephone display depending on programming 4 Dial OR Press your Account Code key Program 15 07 01 or SC 851 code 50 5 Dial the number you want to call To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when a Forced Account Code is required 1 Access a trunk and dial t...

Page 24: ... out onto the connected trunk 2 Dial 3 Enter the Account Code 1 16 digits You can enter any code of the proper length 4 Dial To enter a Forced Account Code at a single line telephone 1 Access trunk for outside call Dial a code to access a trunk With Forced Account Codes you hear Please enter an Account Code depending on programming 2 Dial 3 Enter Account Code 3 16 digits 4 Dial 5 Dial number you w...

Page 25: ...Alarms Alarm 1 sounds only once at the preset time Alarm 2 sounds every day at the preset time Conditions Single line telephones ring and Music on Hold is heard when the Alarm sounds Only a multiline terminal user can view what time the Alarm is currently set for Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None ...

Page 26: ... alarm type 1 or 2 Alarm 1 sounds only once Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time 4 Dial the alarm time 24 hour clock For example for 1 15 PM dial 1315 A confirmation tone is heard if the alarm has been set If the alarm was not set an error tone is heard instead 5 At the multiline terminal press Speaker to hang up OR At the single line telephone hang up To silence an alarm 1 At multiline term...

Page 27: ...t the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 827 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 4 Dial 9999 5 At a multiline terminal press Speaker to hang up OR At the single line telephone hang up ...

Page 28: ...xtension was disconnected from the system Date and time of any system data change Sample Alarm Report Alarm Report 05 16 2006 14 30 PAGE 001 LVL NO STAT DATE TIME ITEM UNIT SLT PRT PARAMETER MIN 0002 REC 05 16 06 14 21 PKG Installation PRT 02 00 MAJ 0010 ERR 05 16 06 14 21 ISDN Link PRT 02 12 MAJ 0010 REC 05 16 06 14 21 ISDN Link PRT 02 12 MIN 0002 ERR 05 16 06 14 33 PKG Installation PRT 02 00 MIN...

Page 29: ...002 ERR 05 16 06 14 40 PKG Installation PRT 07 00 MAJ 0006 ERR 05 16 06 14 41 Blocking ESIB 01 05 MAJ 0006 REC 05 16 06 15 01 Blocking ESIB 01 05 MAJ 0006 ERR 05 16 06 15 05 Blocking ESIB 01 07 MAJ 0006 REC 05 16 06 15 07 Blocking ESIB 01 07 MIN 0068 ERR 01 22 09 09 30 VoIP All DSP Busy VoIPDB 01 00 STA MIN 0068 ERR 01 22 09 09 31 VoIP All DSP Busy VoIPDB 01 00 TRK MIN 0068 ERR 01 22 09 09 35 VoIP...

Page 30: ...locking is detected Terminal is unplugged or wire is disconnected System Data Change System Upgrade performed or Programming change System Start Up System is reset SMDR Link Connection failure is detected between the GCD CP10 and SMDR printer device STA DSP for IP Station Call were all busy TRK DSP for Trunk Call were all busy includes SIP trunks LNK DSP for Net Link Call were all busy NET DSP for...

Page 31: ...t 6 1 6 LCF 17 24 Running 7 1 7 PRT 29 51 Not Install 8 1 8 VM00 25 32 Running 9 2 1 none Not Install 10 2 2 none Not Install 11 2 3 none Not Install 12 2 4 none Not Install 13 2 5 none Not Install 14 2 6 none Not Install 15 2 7 none Not Install 16 2 8 none Not Install 17 3 1 none Not Install 18 3 2 none Not Install 19 3 3 none Not Install 20 3 4 none Not Install 21 3 5 none Not Install 22 3 6 non...

Page 32: ...is set up to email the Alarm Reports and the Mail Server is down the report is not sent System Information Reports cannot be set for output via email Scheduled Alarm Reports via email prints all alarms When the system detects New alarms this information is output via email individually Email Alarm Reports can be sent when each New alarm occurs Per Event If you want to receive complete Alarm Report...

Page 33: ...auses a reset and DIMLast and DIMDump files to be created The system can also be configured to email the DIMLast and DIMDump text files by using the SMTP email settings in the 47 18 xx programs The Alarm Improvement where the DIMLast and DIMDump files are sent via email require the occurrence of a major system event DIMLast and DIMDump files are not sent for normal alarm events Default Settings No...

Page 34: ...e SIP Registration Error This program also assigns whether or not the alarm is displayed to a key telephone and whether or not the alarm information is reported to the predefined destination 0 Not Set 1 Major Alarm 2 Minor Alarm 0 90 10 02 System Alarm Setup Report Assign whether or not the alarm is displayed to a multiline terminal and whether or not the alarm information is reported to the prede...

Page 35: ...m Alarms The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10 21 02 0 No Setting 1 USB Memory 0 Printing System Information Reports Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 90 13 01 System Information Output Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection system information 0 No Setting 5 USB 0 Emailing Alarm Reports Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Defau...

Page 36: ... system will provide notification of events for each of the enabled reports This does not have to be set for DIMLast DIMDump files to be sent 0 No Report no autodial 1 Report autodial 0 90 11 02 System Alarm Report Report Method When Alarm Reports are to be emailed set this option to 1 Email address set in Program 90 11 08 0 No Report 1 Email Address 0 90 11 06 System Alarm Report SMTP Host Name W...

Page 37: ...e system alarm report CC Mail setup Maximum of 255 characters No Setting 90 50 01 System Alarm Display Setup System Alarm Display Telephone Define the extension number that Alarm Reports are displayed on Maximum of eight digits No Setting InMail SMTP Setup Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 47 18 01 InMail Setup SMTP Enabled Enables the SMTP forwarding feature for the syste...

Page 38: ...rogram Name Description Input Data Default 47 19 01 InMail POP3 Setup Server Name Set the POP3 server name If the DNS server setting is not assigned in Program 90 11 11 the IP Address must be used instead of the name Maximum of 48 characters No Setting 47 19 02 InMail POP3 Setup POP3 Port Set the POP3 server port 0 65535 110 47 19 03 InMail POP3 Setup SSL Encryption Enable SSL encryption 0 No 1 Ye...

Page 39: ...elp the display telephone user process calls identify callers and customize features Conditions The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled Default Settings Enabled for all display telephones System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with Display Required Component s None Related Features Clock Calendar Display Selectable Display Messaging ...

Page 40: ... multiline terminal display 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Dutch 7 Portuguese 8 Norwegian 9 Danish 10 Swedish 11 Turkish 12 Latin American Spanish 13 Romanian 14 Polish 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Cla...

Page 41: ...ds to the CTL control relay jack Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for additional details External Paging An ACI analog port also can be an External Page output When connected to customer provided External Paging equipment the ACI port provides External Paging To use the External Paging an extension user just dials the ACI analog port extension number and makes the announcement T...

Page 42: ...rect Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Tie Lines The system also can be programmed to record outgoing trunk calls however this is possible only using E M Tie Lines PRI or BRI trunks ACI Call Recording is not available for intercom calls transferred calls or calls placed on hold and answered by an extension with Call Recording enabled To manually record any call transferred ICM outgo...

Page 43: ... the GCD CP10 The PGD 2 U10 ADP can be connected to any DLC port The devices connected to the PGD 2 U10 ADP must be compatible with the specifications below Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for installation details PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI Interface Specifications Relay Contacts Maximum Contact Ratings 30 V DC 60 mA 90 V AC 10 mA Minimum Application Load 1 V DC 1 mA Audio Music Input I...

Page 44: ...9 PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI 12 APR B2 Mode 0 11 06 01 ACI Extension Numbering Assign extension numbers to ACI software ports Select a number outside of the normal extension number range Maximum of eight digits ACI Ports 1 96 No Setting 11 08 01 ACI Group Pilot Number Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups When a user dials the pilot number they reach an available ACI software port within the group Dial maximu...

Page 45: ...06 or an ACI Department Group pilot number assigned in Program 11 08 If destinations are assigned in Program 14 09 and Program 15 12 the destination in Program 15 12 is followed Extension Number Maximum eight digits No Setting 15 12 02 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls Determine whether or not an extension should be automatically recorded ...

Page 46: ...sion or Department Group After you call an ACI software port If the port is set for input Program 33 01 01 1 and a music source is connected you hear music OR If the port is set for output Program 33 01 01 2 and External Paging is connected you can page into the external zone OR If the port is set for output Program 33 01 01 2 and a loud ringer is connected you activate the loud ringer ...

Page 47: ... itself and two outside parties A single line telephone connected to an AP R R Unit or AP A R Unit does not support Message Waiting Indication or Caller ID Indication An AP R R Unit analog port adapter with ringer can be installed on a multiline terminal and function separately from the multiline terminal When Program 10 03 06 is assigned as APR you cannot manually assign a port number for an APR ...

Page 48: ... 1 4 and 6 are ON To Send and Receive to the Terminal Not supported Dip switches 1 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 1 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 4 and 6 are ON Lot Numbers I J Hardware Revision Lot Numbers L M S Software Revision To verify DT 330 terminal firmware hold down keypad buttons 1 2 and 3 while plugging the line cord into the terminal Firmware Compatibility ...

Page 49: ...iption Input Data Default 10 03 03 ETU Setup LCA PKG Setup Transmit Gain Level S Level Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for 500 2500 type single line telephones 1 57 15 5 15 5dB 32 0dB 10 03 04 ETU Setup LCA PKG Setup Receive Gain Level R Level Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for 500 2500 type single line telephones 1 57 15 5 15 5d...

Page 50: ... outside call is placed the system cannot dial any additional digit This program change is automatically performed when the UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless telephone is registered When upgrading software from prior versions the previous default of 1 is saved from the prior database so this option must be changed manually 0 DP 1 DTMF 1 15 03 04 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Flashing Enable Disabl...

Page 51: ... to be used Default Normal Common For calls placed in a Park Group the LED blinks fast green For calls placed in a Park Group by another user the LED blinks slow red The Answer Hold Feature is not available for Virtual Extensions The Answer Hold feature does not function for incoming internal calls CO PBX incoming calls not assigned to ring or assigned to another ring group do not activate the Ans...

Page 52: ...rvice Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On the extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has ...

Page 53: ...nswered Press the Answer Key during a call to hold the current call and allow the next call to be answered Conditions The Answer LED functions for incoming CO PBX calls CO PBX transfer camp on calls and transfer camp on Tie DID calls Incoming calls answered by Answer are handled first in first out An Internal call internal transfer camp on call CAR SIE VE calls do not activate the Answer LED Defau...

Page 54: ...ng Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Use this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks Program 22 02 to Incoming Ring Groups Program 22 04 Trunks 1 400 Incoming Group Number for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 1 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Assign the destination extension or Department Group Pilot...

Page 55: ...ed calls If the attendant does not have an appearance for the queued call it waits in line to be answered If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued an extension can transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent non programmable system feature Conditions Forwarding when unanswered or busy can occur only at the attendant if more t...

Page 56: ...s Mode Assign the priority of a call when calling an operator telephone 0 Step 1 Circular 0 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy Program 20 13 06 must be set to 0 Off for this feature to work 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extensi...

Page 57: ...e line is accessed using a dedicated line key the LED associated with the line key goes off when Automatic Release occurs This feature functions while a call is in progress on hold or in a conference This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress holding or parked When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree mode Speaker automatically turns off If using the handset the s...

Page 58: ...e Detection Level 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm Type 1 DT 0 25dBm Type 2 BT 0 25dBm Type 3 RBT 0 25dBm Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 02 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Min Detection Level Set the minimum detection level 0 15 detect level 0 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 1 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 2 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 Type 1 DT ...

Page 59: ...Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON Minimum Time Set the minimum On time 1 255 30 30 7680ms Type 1 DT 9 300ms Type 2 BT 12 300ms Type 3 RBT 25 780ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON Maximum Time Set the maximum On time 0 255 30 30 7680ms Type 1 DT 0 Type 2 BT 20 630ms ET Type 3 RBT 40 1230ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Minimum Time S...

Page 60: ... Special Dialing Instructions ARS can automatically execute stored dialing instructions called Dial Treatments when it chooses a route for a call The system allows up to 15 Dial Treatments The Dial Treatments can Insert or delete an area code NPA Add digits such as a dial up OCC number pauses and waits to the dialing sequence Require the user to enter an authorization code when placing a call refe...

Page 61: ...ine whether the system should allow a call based on the COS assigned to the Dial Analysis Table Program 26 02 This change can be used to create a tenant like application It then uses the trunk group defined in the Additional Entry in Program 26 02 03 to place the outgoing call When this feature is enabled the calls are routed in sequential order and are allowed if the Class of Service for the trun...

Page 62: ...k Group 3 If at 6 00 PM each extension dialed 9 214 262 2000 Extension 301 302 and 401 would use Trunk Group 1 Extension 402 would not be able to dial out as the COS is lower With Program 26 01 06 ARS COS Match Access enabled set to 1 If at 9 00 AM each extension dialed 9 203 926 5400 Extension 301 would use Trunk Group 1 Extension 302 would use Trunk Group 2 Extension 401 402 would use Trunk Grou...

Page 63: ...outed out separate trunk groups The UNIVERGE SV9100 supports only direct trunk selection for dial 0 Operator type calls If an entry of 911 is programmed in ARS but ARS is turned off 911 calls still attempt to route using ARS When using ARS Class of Service Matching CCIS calls will always follow Class of Service 1 If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS Program 26 01 03 determines if the sys...

Page 64: ...64 Required Component s None ...

Page 65: ... NetLink Conditions This feature requires Netlink to be enabled This feature is only supported on DT700 DT800 and Softphones Default Settings None System Availability Terminals DT700 DT800 Required Component s Refer to SV9100 NetLink for Required Component s Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Code Restriction Dial Tone Detection E 911 Compatibility Speed Dial System Group Station SV9100...

Page 66: ...cess Code Specify the digit or digits to be used to access ARS normally 9 Dial up to four digits 9 11 09 02 2nd Trunk Route Access Code Define additional trunk access codes When a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code the system routes their call to the Alternate Trunk Route Dial up to four digits No Setting 12 01 01 Night Mode Function Setup Manual Night Mode Switching Turn Off or On a...

Page 67: ...rvice Patterns Operation Mode Define the daily pattern of the Automatic Mode Switching Each Mode Group has 10 patterns These patterns are used in Programs 12 03 and 12 04 The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings This option defines the operation mode that the system should be in during each time number 1 8 1 or 2 depending on time pattern and time number 12 03 01 Weekly Night Service Switch...

Page 68: ...p Number 01 32 1 12 07 01 Text Data for Night Mode Make up an original text message which depending on programming can be displayed on an LCD of a multiline telephone in each Mode Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Day Night Mode 1 8 Text Message Maximum 12 Characters alphabetic or numeric Default Text Messages for Day Night Modes Mode 1 No Setting Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Midnight Mode 4 Rest Mode ...

Page 69: ...Telephones Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS When ARS or an analog extension user accesses a trunk and dials an outside call the system waits this time before outdialing the first digit 0 64800 seconds 3 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension ...

Page 70: ...trunk group 1 0 or Play error tone 1 0 Route to Trunk Group 1 1 Play Warning Tone to Dialer 0 26 01 06 Automatic Route Selection Service Class of Service Match Access With the ARS Class of Service Match Access feature you can determine whether or not the system should allow a call based on the COS assigned to the Dial Analysis Table Program 26 02 This change can be used to create a tenant like app...

Page 71: ...269 and 270 are local exchanges these would be the first three table entries which route according to the settings made in Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 for each of the table entries If the next entry is 2 the system checks no further in this program and routes all other 2xx numbers according to the entries made in Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 for this table entry Dial a maximum o...

Page 72: ...d 0 500 F Route Table Number F Route Time Schedule Used 0 500 F Route Selection Number 0 26 02 04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS ARS Class of Service For each Dial Analysis Table 1 2000 set the Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS Class of Service 0 16 0 16 0 26 02 05 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Dial Treatment for ARS For each Dial Analysis Table 1 2000 set the Automatic Route Selection ARS Dial Treatme...

Page 73: ...ds and P pause Each digits code counts as a digit So for example if a P was added for a pause the entry would look like D05P1234 This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming Wnn Wait nn seconds P Pause in analog trunk R Redial the initially dialed number including any modifications E End of Dial Treatment All Dial Treatments must end with the E code X When ARS is enabled X must...

Page 74: ...cting ARS F Route 0 No Setting None 1 Extension Call Own 2 ARS F Route Table F Route 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Option 0 44 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Additional Data If a Service Type is set to F Route in Program 44 02 02 set which F Route table to use 1 Delete Digit 0 255 255 Delete All Digits 2 0 500 0 No Setting 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Number 0 4 0 No Setting 0...

Page 75: ...n for Time Schedule Assign each ARS F Route Selection number 1 500 to an ARS F Route table number for each ARS F Route time mode There are eight time modes for ARS F Route Access ARS F Route Time Mode 1 8 ARS F Route Table Number 0 500 0 44 05 01 ARS F Route Table Trunk Group Number Select the trunk group number to be used for the outgoing ARS call 0 100 255 0 No Setting 255 Extension Call 0 44 05...

Page 76: ...al Treatments are defined in Program 26 03 01 0 15 0 44 05 09 ARS F Route Table Maximum Digit Set the maximum number of digits to send when using the F Route 0 24 0 44 05 10 ARS F Route CCIS over IP Destination Point Code For each ARS F Route table 1 500 Set the CCIS over IP Destination Point Code 0 16367 0 16367 0 44 05 11 ARS F Route Network Specified Parameter Table For each ARS F Route table 1...

Page 77: ... Route Access Outgoing Transmit 1 63 15 5 15 5dB Default 32 0dB 44 07 04 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access Outgoing Receive 1 63 15 5 15 5dB Default 32 0dB 44 08 01 Time Schedule for ARS F Route Define the daily pattern of the ARS F Route feature ARS F Route has 10 time patterns These patterns are used in Program 44 09 and Program 44 10 The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings Time Number 01...

Page 78: ... Define the minimum detection level for DTMF Tone Receiver 0 15 detect level 0 10dBm 0 to 25dBm 15 detect level 1 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 2 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 3 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm ...

Page 79: ...to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 Type 1 5 2 2dBm 80 03 05 DTMF To...

Page 80: ...DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect Time Define the Off detection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms Type 1 1 30ms Type 2 1 30ms Type 3 1 30ms Type 4 1 30ms Type 5 1 30ms Recognize Extension Location when Logging In with Netlink Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 26 01 01 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS Service Enable Disable ARS 0 Disable Off 1 Enable O...

Page 81: ...its maximum 1 9 0 2000 separate entries for the Dial Analysis Table which is analyzed by ARS LCR This table is checked after any programmed F Route operations have completed The system then refers to Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 to determine the routing for the call To enter a wild card don t care digit press Line Key 1 to enter an symbol It is important to remember that the system checks...

Page 82: ...ch Dial Analysis Table 1 2000 if Service Type 1 was selected in Program 26 02 02 enter the trunk group number 0 100 0 No Route If Service Type 1 in 26 02 Select Trunk Group Number 0 100 Trunk Group Number 0 No Route 101 150 Networking ID If Service Type 2 in 26 02 F Route Time Schedule Not Used 0 500 F Route Table Number F Route Time Schedule Used 0 500 F Route Selection Number 0 26 02 04 Dial Ana...

Page 83: ...was added for a pause the entry would look like D05P1234 This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming Wnn Wait nn seconds P Pause in analog trunk R Redial the initially dialed number including any modifications E End of Dial Treatment All Dial Treatments must end with the E code X When ARS is enabled X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the extension...

Page 84: ...lect the gain table number to be used for internal calls 0 500 0 500 0 No Setting 0 44 05 06 ARS F Route Table Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the gain table number to be used for the tandem call defined in Program 44 07 0 500 0 No Setting 0 44 05 07 ARS F Route Table ARS Class of Service For each ARS F Route table 1 500...

Page 85: ...ary system yet or Fail Over occurs Node List is referred to establish new link This setting is necessary when Program 51 01 03 is 0 or Program 51 05 02 is other than 0 Once the system connects to the Primary System this setting is updated by the Primary system when Program 51 13 01 is On So enter IP address of the systems which may become Primary at least 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 ...

Page 86: ...e terminal is in use Originating a call answering a voice announcement a ringing call or internal paging interrupts Background Music Background Music is not available on single line telephones Default Settings Background Music BGM is not allowed a service code to enable disable Background Music must be assigned in Program 11 11 18 System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Comp...

Page 87: ...is set to 1 Program the ACI Port to be used for BGM 0 96 0 96 0 11 11 18 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation BGM On Off Assign the Service Code to Enable Disable BGM MLT No Setting 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 ...

Page 88: ...e laws incorporate strict penalties Conditions An extension user can barge in on a conference An extension user cannot barge in on an Intercom call if one of the intercom callers is using Handsfree Answerback Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker With Program 20 13 10 set to 0 a barged into call can be placed on hold by the originator of the outside call Both the outside cal...

Page 89: ...Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Monitoring Conference Hold Intercom Off Hook Signaling Park Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 90: ... Optional additional data can be assigned as extension number or Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 10 Class of...

Page 91: ...one Repeat Time After a user barges in the system repeats the Barge In tone after this time 0 64800 seconds 0 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External Program the time an extension must wait before using the Barge In feature can be used on a call this timer waits until it expires before putting a call in a talk state This time also affects Voice Over 0 64800 second...

Page 92: ... a callback to the extension 2 Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a conference call When a new call is added to the conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference depending on system programming and all display multiline terminals show the joined party If a Conference is not possible The extension user hears a warning tone The DISA user is rerout...

Page 93: ...e installed protection against loss of power just before blade installation to provide battery backup for System Memory When fully charged the battery retains System Memory for approximately three years You should replace the GCD CP10 battery every three years During normal operation the battery is continually recharged using a built in charging circuit from the GCD CP10 To prevent loss of the Cal...

Page 94: ...ta Default 90 03 01 Save Data Save the programmed data on the SRAM and Flash ROM to the 16MB 32MB ATA removable Compact Flash memory card This program should be used after changing the programmed data This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming Dial 1 Press Hold No Setting Operation None ...

Page 95: ...s and the capacity of the batteries Conditions During normal operation the batteries are continually recharged by a built in charging circuit The GCD CP10 is equipped with batteries for system battery backup An External Battery Pack can be connected to the system to provide extended time during a commercial power outage Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for additional details Def...

Page 96: ...llback 4 As soon as caller B answers the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer the Callback ring Condi...

Page 97: ...of eight digits 899 11 16 05 Single Digit Service Code Setup Camp On If required redefine the service code used to set Camp On 0 9 Maximum of one digit 15 02 11 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Callback Automatic Answer Enable 1 Disable 0 Callback Automatic Answer 0 Off 1 On 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Functio...

Page 98: ...c Answer you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you lift the handset If you do not have Callback Automatic Answer you must press the ringing line appearance to place the call To cancel a Callback 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker and Dial 870 OR At the multiline terminal press Camp On key Program 15 07 or SC 851 35 OR At the single line telephone lift the handse...

Page 99: ...em voice mail displays the message count On the UM8000 Mail from the subscriber options Softkey menu a subscriber can access a Softkey menu that allows selection of name or number to be displayed on the LCD during message playback The default is name Voice mail uses this setting to determine the initial display on the LCD during playback Voice mail continues to display Caller ID on the LCD while t...

Page 100: ... access code must be entered on the Return call outdial access code line of System Switch Dialing Codes screen so the Return Call feature can access a trunk to return the call When this is not entered the mailbox user is not prompted to return the call even when Caller ID information is available Use Program 14 01 22 Caller ID to Voice Mail to enable or disable per trunk the ability to send the Ca...

Page 101: ... function of the extension Redial key when used with Speed Dialing The Redial key can access either the Common or Group Speed Dialing numbers 0 Common Abbreviated Dial 1 Group Speed Dialing 0 Operation To return call from the UM8000 Mail 1 While listening to a message with CID information press More More then Call softkeys OR Dial 0 2 To exit from the call hang up To return call from InMail 1 Whil...

Page 102: ...essage Format the Telco sends only the caller s telephone number DN The DN has seven or 10 digits In Multiple Message Format the Telco sends the DN and the caller s name The DN for this format also has seven or 10 digits and the name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII characters The telephone display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits for non Contact Centre calls Once installed and programmed Cal...

Page 103: ...provide Caller ID information because Telco information is not detected the display shows NO CALLER INFO Calling Party Number Information When using the Wireless DECT SIP telephone the system can provide the Caller ID information for an external call if it is provided by the Telco Option to Enable Caller ID Name for SLT System programming provides an option for single line telephones to display Ca...

Page 104: ...ne telephone user goes back on hook the system immediately sends the queued call to the single line telephone without Caller ID Conditions To have pre answer Caller ID from the voice mail the call must be an unscreened transfer Caller ID is provided by the GCD CP10 The GPZ BS10 blade which plugs into the chassis can provide additional resources for Caller ID if needed Caller ID Name can display up...

Page 105: ...block an incoming call based on the incoming Caller ID information on a station by station basis The GCD CP10 has 32 resources for DTMF receiving and Dial Tone detection When a is GPZ BS10 installed there are 64 resources available When Program 10 09 01 is set to 0 Common and Program 14 02 10 Caller ID is set to 1 Yes all DTMF Dial Tone Detection resources are always allocated to analog trunks not...

Page 106: ...ughter Board GCD 2BRIA with GPZ 2BRIA Daughter Board GCD PRTA Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Call Arrival CAR Keys Caller ID Call Return Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Park Speed Dial System Group Station Station Message Detail Recording T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility InMail ...

Page 107: ...ources available When Program 10 09 01 is set to 0 Common and Program 14 02 10 Caller ID is set to 1 Yes all DTMF Dial ToneDetection resources are always allocated to analog trunks not analog extensions However if Program 14 02 10 Caller ID is set to 0 No all DTMF Dial Tone Detection resources can be used for both analog trunks and analog extensions 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Circu...

Page 108: ...the code up to eight digits that should be used as the Caller ID Block Code This code is automatically inserted before dialed digits if Program 14 01 20 is set to 1 Trunks 1 400 Dial maximum of eight digits 67 14 01 22 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID to Voice Mail Enable Disable the system ability to send the Caller ID digits to voice mail Trunks 1 400 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 14 01 24 Basic Trunk Da...

Page 109: ...for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd Party vendor telephone with Caller ID display If voice mail is used this setting must be disabled or the system integration codes for disconnect are incorrect For Caller ID Sender Queuing set this option to 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 15 03 10 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Name Determine whether or not a single line telephone should display t...

Page 110: ...ons Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension user to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals This setting is to receive incoming call signaling information during call queuing 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 19 01 System Options for Caller ID Caller ID Displaying Format If displaying digits are more than 12 digits Determine whether the fi...

Page 111: ...be displayed for Caller ID when a user receives a call which is classified as a call with a CID error 24 Alphanumeric Characters NO CALLER INFO 90 03 01 Save Data Save the programmed data on the SRAM and Flash ROM to the 16MB 32MB ATA removable Compact Flash memory card Also used to save stored Caller ID if permanently saved with service code 9 11 15 03 This program is available only via telephone...

Page 112: ... Next List Store Store in List DEL Delete from List 4 Press the STORE Softkey The display shows List Number xx Caller ID number mm dd hh mm incoming date and time STA Store in Station Speed Dial bin ABB Store in Abbreviated Dial bin TELBK Store in Telephone Book 5 Press the STA or ABB or TELBK Softkey The display shows 6 Dial the Speed Dial bin in which the number is to be stored If you press Hold...

Page 113: ...7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters π Σ Ω Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space Feature Clear the character entry one character at a time HOLD T...

Page 114: ...elete from List 4 Press the STORE Softkey The display shows List Number xx Caller ID number mm dd hh mm incoming date and time STA Store in Station Speed Dial bin ABB Store in Abbreviated Dial bin TELBK Store in Telephone Book 5 Press the STA or ABB or TELBK Softkey The display shows 6 Press the One Touch key in which the number is to be stored or dial 1 9 0 If you press Hold the next available On...

Page 115: ...Key twice The last addition to the list is displayed 2 Press the ARROW DOWN Softkey to scroll through the list of numbers in memory 3 Press the DEL Softkey to delete the entry and scroll to the next entry 4 The Call History key remains on as long as entries remain in memory 5 To place a call back to a number in the temporary memory list with the number to be dialed displayed press a line key or Sp...

Page 116: ...xt to the call record number in the left hand corner this indicates that it is a call you missed unanswered The second row shows the date and time of the call Press the up and down softkeys to see the list of calls available in the buffer 3 If the Caller ID includes a name you can press the HELP key to view the number of the caller 4 To call the displayed number press a line Call Appearance CAP Ke...

Page 117: ... ring group if the Caller ID number matches the common or group Speed Dial table Program 13 04 This option can block calls on all trunks or it can be set on a per trunk basis Programming Examples for Flexible Ringing by Caller ID To refuse the Private Caller ID incoming call Program 14 01 27 1 reject Program 20 07 24 1 Enable for COS Program 22 18 01 0 no transfer Program 40 10 06 2 VRS message 2 ...

Page 118: ...coming call to incoming ring group 2 as ring pattern 2 Program 13 04 01 2142622000 Program 13 04 03 2 incoming ring group Program 13 04 04 2 group 2 Program 13 04 05 2 tone pattern 2 Conditions Caller ID Matching The UNIVERGE SV9100 compares the Caller ID and programmed Speed Dial and allows denies as indicated below The Speed Dial table is searched from the starting number and the first match res...

Page 119: ...000 21426220009 Matched 2142622000 214 Matched 2622000 2142622000 Unmatched 2142622000 2622000 Unmatched The Speed Dial table is searched from the starting number and the first match result is used Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Direct Inward Dialing DID UM8000 Mail Voice Response System VR...

Page 120: ...number trunks which are set in Program 14 01 27 MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 13 02 01 Group Speed Dialing Bins Designate the starting and ending bin numbers the system uses for Group Speed Dialing 01 64 0 9999 Starting bin number range 0 9990 Ending bin number range 0 9999 No Setting 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Dialing Data Enter the System and Group Speed Dialin...

Page 121: ... Dial 2 Enable Yes 0 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function key 86 Set Private Call Refuse to Enable Disable trunks which are set in Program 14 01 27 to 1 Assign function key 87 Set Caller ID Refuse to Enable Disable the Caller ID Refusal trunks which is set in Program 14 01 27 to 1 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 ...

Page 122: ...ists No Yes Go to Chart 2 Search refusing Speed Dial area PRG 22 16 data exists Yes No Off PRG 14 01 27 1 And refuse mode is On Search PRG 13 04 01 Play VRS Message PRG 40 10 07 Data unmatched Data matched PRG 13 04 03 Disconnect the call 2 1 Follow PRG 22 02 01 Ring the extension number Ring the incoming ring group ...

Page 123: ...G 14 01 27 1 And refuse mode is Off On Reason of No Caller ID Anything Else Private PRG 22 18 01 2 0 Play VRS Message PRG 40 10 07 Ring the extension number Disconnect the call Ring the incoming ring group Follow PRG 22 02 01 ...

Page 124: ...is only supported on Multiline terminals The Memo Display function is only supported for incoming trunk calls with Caller ID information The destination station must be idle for the Memo Display function to work The Memo Display function will only search the Common Speed Dial bins it will not search Group or Station speed dial bins Find the abbreviation area the side of incoming system when trunk ...

Page 125: ... GPZ 2BRIA Daughter Board GCD PRTA Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Call Arrival CAR Keys Caller ID Call Return Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Park Speed Dial System Group Station Station Message Detail Recording T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility InMail ...

Page 126: ...ll be displayed on line 1 of the multiline telephone when Program 15 02 58 is set to memo Maximum of 28 characters No Setting 13 04 09 Speed Dialing Number and Name Memo Display 2 This can only be set using Web Pro or PC Pro and determines what will be displayed on line 2 of the multiline telephone when Program 15 02 58 is set to memo Maximum of 28 characters No Setting 13 04 10 Speed Dialing Numb...

Page 127: ...t a time Multiline terminals can be assigned to the same CAP Key Trunk calls that appear on the same CAP Key at multiple stations have the same visual appearance of the call Busy or Hold Any held call left on a CAP key for more than the programmed time recalls to the multiline terminal where the call was originally put on hold When a multiline terminal other than the one that originally initiated ...

Page 128: ...have only CAP keys or Loops keys When SV telephones are installed CAP key mode must be used When UX telephones are installed Loop key mode must be used Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals SV9100 Terminals only Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Call Arrival CAR Keys Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Off Hook Signal...

Page 129: ...ions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 11 19 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Hold Extended Park Determine whether an extension Class of Service should allow normal or extended Park 0 Normal for Program 24 01 06 1 Extended for Program 24 01 07 0 Off 1 On C...

Page 130: ...ting Flexible Timeouts for Class of Service 0 64800 seconds 90 24 01 07 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time Extended Recall Set the Extended Park Hold Time A call that is parked longer than the programmed time recalls the extension where it was initially parked 0 64800 seconds 300 Operation To place an outgoing call on hold and retrieve it using a multiline terminal 1 Go off hook using the hand...

Page 131: ... More than one extension can share a CAR key An extension can have more than one CAR key assigned Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy CAR key If multiple CAR SIE VE keys are ringing on a station at the same time the CAR SIE VE key on the lowest Line Key is answered first The system can be programmed to blink the page number of a DT300 DT700 DESI Less terminal when it receives an incoming...

Page 132: ...ons and features such as service codes and trunk codes If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site 11 04 01 Virtual Extension Numbering Assign virtual extension numbers Dial maximum of eight digits Virtual Extension Port No 1 99 Virtual Extension Number 201 299 VirtualExtension Port No 100 512 No Setting 15 01 01 Bas...

Page 133: ...and can receive incoming calls only Virtual Extension Key Mode 0 DSS 1 Outgoing 2 Ignore 2 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 03 ICM VE or CAR where ICM is the extension number of the VE or CAR 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring T...

Page 134: ...a Virtual Extension Key land on the Virtual or on the extension CAP CO appearance This is assigned for the Virtual Extension Key not the extension it resides on 0 Release 1 Land on the key 0 15 18 02 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Display Mode When Placing a Call on Virtual Extension Key Define if calls to or from a Virtual Extension Key display the Virtual Extension Key name or the name o...

Page 135: ...or Outgoing Calls Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Toll Restriction Enable Disable the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 0 23 04 01 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions When an extension has a virtual extension assigned to a Programmable Function Key program this option to determine the priority for automatically answering the ringing calls when the han...

Page 136: ...s Hold once for Immediate Ring To set for Delayed Ring skip to Step 8 7 Dial the Mode number in which the key rings 1 Day 1 5 Day 2 2 Night 1 6 Night 2 3 Midnight 1 7 Midnight 2 4 Rest 1 8 Rest 2 8 Press Hold to set up Delayed Ring OR Skip to Step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings 1 Day 1 5 Day 2 2 Night 1 6 Night 2 3 Midnight 1 7 Midnight 2 10 4 Rest 1 Press Speaker 8 Rest 2 ...

Page 137: ...r incoming trunk calls the Call Time begins as soon as the user answers the call Conditions The Call Timer starts over each time the call is retrieved from Hold or Park The Call Duration Timer Program 20 13 36 is not displayed for inbound Contact Centre calls Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with Display Required Component s None Related Features Alpha...

Page 138: ... the Incoming Call Time is displayed on the multiline terminals LCD while the telephone is ringing Caller ID should be enabled for this feature in Program 20 09 06 to function 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 36 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Call Duration Timer Display Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing calls Trunk I...

Page 139: ...nsferred from another extension Call Forwarding can also be split allowing internal and external calls to forward to different destinations The extension user can enable Call Forwarding from their telephone An extension user can also set the forwarding for another extension by using Call Forward for any Extension to Destination To redirect calls while a user is at another telephone use Call Forwar...

Page 140: ...er A DSS key indicates a Call Forwarding indication for extensions When DND All and Call Forward are set on the same telephone call forwarding works If Busy and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations it follows the Busy forwarding Function keys simplify Call Forwarding operation If an extension Class of Service denies Call Forwarding Program 20 11 01 Program 20 11 05 off the extension...

Page 141: ... are only supported on a one touch DSS key and in speed dial bins If the terminal is configured for Call Forward Both Ring and DND is activated the calling station will receive a busy tone Call Forward Both Ring is not followed If Program 20 11 30 is set to 0 Off the Call FWD setting is displayed on the terminal LCD screen when idle Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Termin...

Page 142: ...ard All Set the service code for setting call forwarding all calls MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 841 11 11 02 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward Busy Set the service code for setting call forwarding for busy calls MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 842 11 11 03 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward No Answer Set the service code for setting call fo...

Page 143: ...lit Set or Cancel the call forward all destination with no split MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 890 11 11 53 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination No Split Set or Cancel the call forward busy destination with no split MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 891 11 11 54 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward No Answer D...

Page 144: ...ension but has not yet been answered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy Program 20 13 06 must be set to 0 Off for this feature to work 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 01 Class of Se...

Page 145: ...ic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension user to manually 0 or automatically 1 receive off hook signals An example of an off hook signal is the tone heard when receiving a second call This setting is to receive incoming call signaling information during call queuing 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 24 02 03 System Options for Transfer Delayed Call Forwarding Time Set the Delayed Call F...

Page 146: ...Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination Assign Intercom Call Forwarding for busy destinations Maximum of 24 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 06 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Destination for CTX PBX for All Call No Answer Assign Call Forwarding for CTX PBX...

Page 147: ...ne terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys Program 15 07 01 10 or SC 851 Key Code 10 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press Speaker or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off To set Call Forward Busy No Answer at a forwarding station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer Service Code default 844 OR At the multiline termina...

Page 148: ...nly press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys Program 15 07 01 14 or SC 851 Key Code 14 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the destination extension number 5 Press Speaker or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns on To cancel Call Forward Both Ring at a forwarding station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial the Call Forward Both Ring Service Code default 845 OR At the m...

Page 149: ...ation 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial the Call Forward Follow Me Service Code default 846 OR At the multiline terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys Program 15 07 01 10 or SC 851 Key Code 15 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Dial the station number which is forwarded or 0 to cancel all extensions 5 Press Speaker or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key tur...

Page 150: ...e extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number 5 Press Speaker or hang up To cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension to Destination 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code default 893 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Dial the station number which is forwarded 5 Press Speaker or hang up To set Call...

Page 151: ...ess the idle Virtual Extension key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer Service Code Default 844 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the destination extension or off premise number 5 Press Speaker or hang up Refer to Voice Response System VRS Call Forwarding Park and Page To cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer using a Virtual Extension 1 Press the idle Virtual Extension key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer...

Page 152: ...destination extension To reroute calls from the initiating forwarding extension use Call Forwarding Conditions Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls Multiple Stations can set Call Forward Follow Me to one station Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming DIL calls ring an idle Department ...

Page 153: ...f Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 11 05 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding with Follow Me Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward with Follow Me 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 Operation To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a multiline terminal 1 At a multiline terminal other than your own press Sp...

Page 154: ...mber with Follow Me set To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a single line telephone 1 At a single line telephone other than your own lift the handset and dial the Service Code 846 Program 11 11 07 2 Dial 1 to set 3 Dial the extension to forward To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own single line telephone 1 At your single line telephone lift the handset and dial Service Code 846 Program...

Page 155: ... Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect supervision enabled refer to the Programming section Conditions If a call that forwards Off Premise goes out on a trunk assigned as TIE or DID and the called party does not answer before the time in Program 34 07 05 the call recalls to the station that performed the transfer CallForwardingOff Premiser...

Page 156: ...emise is not supported when using Alternate Trunk Group Routing Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival CAR Keys Call Forwarding Code Restriction Direct Inward Dialing DID Door Box Do Not Disturb Virtual Extensions Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 157: ...roup set up Dial maximum of eight digits No Setting 11 11 01 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward All Assign the Call Forward All Service Code MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 841 11 11 02 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward Busy Assign the Call Forward Busy Service Code MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 842 11 11 03 Service Code Setup for Setup Entr...

Page 158: ... Forward Both Ring Split Assign the Call Forward Both Ring Split Service Code MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 11 11 52 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward All Destination No Split Assign the Call Forward All for any Extension Service Code MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 890 11 11 53 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call For...

Page 159: ...ut has not yet been answered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy Program 20 13 06 must be set to 0 Off for this feature to work 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 12 Class of Servi...

Page 160: ...ll Forwarding destination numbers for both ring all call and no answer Maximum of 24 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 03 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for both ring All Call No Answer Assign Intercom Call Forwarding destination numbers for both ring all call and n...

Page 161: ... tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 3600 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Disconnect Time Determine how long the system waits before disconnecting a DISA or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking call after the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 10 Trunk to Trunk Forwarding Normal 0 Trunks Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 11 10 06 Service ...

Page 162: ...r 0 Normal Transfer Normal 1 Step Transfer Step 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 07 05 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use t...

Page 163: ...etup Entry Operation Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group Customize the service code to be used to set the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature for a Department Group MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 702 11 11 26 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group Customize the service code to be used to cancel the Automatic Trunk For...

Page 164: ...ltiline Conference or transferred calls 1 57 15 5dB 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 16 8 dB 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing Priority Order Number Set the priority order number 1 4 0 Not Set 1 100 Trunk group No 1001 1100 1000 Route Table No 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign an Automatic Forwarding at Department Group key 58 or a Delayed Forwarding at Department Group key 59 for an extension user L...

Page 165: ...d Transfer Destinations if the callers receives a busy or no answer action defined in Program 22 11 04 If the Transfer Destinations are busy or receive no answer those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination Program 22 10 0 No Setting 1 1 00 Incoming Group 101 Not Used 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 201 264 Extension Group 400 Valid Extension Number 401 DISA 501 599 DISA...

Page 166: ...e 5 Your DND or Call Forwarding Device Programmable Function key flashes To cancel Call Forwarding Off Premise non split 1 At a multiline terminal press Speaker OR At a single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial the Call Forward Access Code default not assigned 3 Dial 0 Cancel To activate Call Forwarding Off Premise Split 1 At a multiline terminal press Speaker OR At a single line telephone lif...

Page 167: ...r Door Boxes These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extension only To activate Call Forwarding Off Premise for a Door Box This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker dial SC 822 OR At the multiline terminal only press Call Forward Device key Program 15 07 01 or SC 851 code 54 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset dial 822 2...

Page 168: ...runk port number 001 400 to be defined 4 Select the mode 1 8 to be defined 5 Enter the telephone number which is the destination of the forwarded trunk The number is stored in the Speed Dial bin number assigned in Program 24 04 01 This entry overwrites any existing number defined in the bin 6 Press Hold to accept the entry 7 Repeat from Step 3 to define another mode entry or press Speaker to hang ...

Page 169: ...t the Destination and Forward the Line 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 704 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 64 to be defined 4 Select the time mode 1 8 to be defined 5 Enter the telephone number which is the destination of the forwarded trunk The number is stored in the Speed Dial bin number assigned in Program 24 04 01 This entry overwrites any existing number defined in the bin 6 Press Hold to ac...

Page 170: ...n must be defined in Program 13 04 01 for the line to forward 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 702 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 64 to be defined 4 Press Speaker to hang up Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 703 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 64 to be defined 4 Press Speaker to hang up ...

Page 171: ...warding or Do Not Disturb at another extension This is helpful for example to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through Conditions None Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 172: ...functions to multiline terminal line keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 04 Class of Service Options Suppleme...

Page 173: ...Conditions An extension set as an operator in Program 20 17 01 cannot be monitored using the Contact Centre Call Monitor 15 Feature key Enhancement While using the Contact Centre Call Monitor 15 Feature key Enhancement if the monitored extension places the call on hold or transfers the call monitoring is stopped The Contact Centre Call Monitoring 15 Feature key Enhancement is supported on trunk ca...

Page 174: ...placed in park The extension which is monitoring the call is dropped When Program 20 13 10 is set to 0 OFF coaching is not permitted When Program 20 13 10 is set to 1 On Program 20 13 45 takes effect When Silent Monitor Mode is used MIC or Feature 1 can be used to activate speech path to the internal and external parties Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Require...

Page 175: ...ct Centre Mode works in normal business mode 0 Off Contact Centre Mode 1 On Business Mode 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension ability t...

Page 176: ...ermines if the monitored parties receives the barge in alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled 0 Enable 1 Disable COS 1 15 1 20 14 11 Class of Service Options for DISA E M DISA Tie Trunk Barge In Enable 1 Disable 0 a DISA or tie trunk user from using the Barge In feature 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extension Number Define the extension numbers which are to be used...

Page 177: ...defined ring group the Tie Line user hears a busy tone To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability 1 Call a busy extension 2 Press the Barge In key Program 15 07 or SC 851 34 3 Press MIC or Feature 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station OR 1 Dial the extension number of the busy party 2 Dial the single digit service code or the service code 810 3 Press MIC or Feature 1 to togg...

Page 178: ...lowing calls Normal trunk call DID DISA DIL E M ICM The following calls cannot be redirected with the feature Contact Centre Transferred Department Group all ring mode Door Box Virtual Extension Conditions After pressing the Call Redirect key the call does not recall to the extension The predefined destination must be an extension number or voice mail pilot number When a call is Redirected to anot...

Page 179: ...5 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 11 16 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Redirect Turn Off or On an extension user ability to transfer a call to a predefined destination such as an operator voice mail or another extension without answering the call 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 Operation...

Page 180: ...not support Call Waiting Camp On Programmable Function keys code 35 If an extension user Camps On and then hangs up the system converts the Camp On to a callback Off Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 750 to Camp On and or DID callers from automatically camping on Function keys simplify Call Waiting Camp On operation An extension user may Transfer a call t...

Page 181: ...ervice Code which is to be used for setting Camp On MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 850 11 12 05 Service Code Setup for Service Access Cancel Camp On Customize the Service Code which is to be used for cancelling Camp On MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 870 11 12 47 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Waiting Answer Split Answer If required use this program to change the code users di...

Page 182: ...em Options Trunk Queuing Callback Time Set the Trunk Queuing callback time A Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for this time 0 64800 seconds 15 20 01 09 System Options Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk Queuing request after this time 0 64800 seconds 64800 20 03 01 System Options for Single Line Telephones SLT Call Waiting for Answer Mode F...

Page 183: ...pplementary Service Intercom Off Hook signaling Turn Off or On an extension ability to send off hook signals This setting functions with Programs 20 09 07 and 20 13 06 disabled 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension user to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals This settin...

Page 184: ...d dial 870 OR At a multiline terminal press the Camp On key Program 15 07 or SC 851 35 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset and dial 870 To Split answer a waiting call at a single line telephone Listen for Call Waiting Tones 1 Hookflash and dial 894 to repeatedly split between the two calls The operation depends on the setting in Program 20 03 01 This operation is valid only before the...

Page 185: ...can answer the call from the first available telephone You might also want to use Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing is not adequate After hearing the ringing over the Paging an employee can then easily pick up the call from a shop telephone The Automatic Off Hook Answer of Universal Answer Call options Program 20 10 07 determines whe...

Page 186: ...ion extension displays the assigned text message instead of the Reason for Transfer message If an extension is assigned to a Trunk Access Map that has no access for a trunk the extension can still retrieve parked calls on that trunk The extension can also Group Call Pickup and Direct Call Pickup calls ringing another extension on that trunk The system can be programmed to blink the page number of ...

Page 187: ...tup and confirm the basic configuration data for each blade This program represents different data depending on the blade installed in the slot The assigned data varies depending on the blade installed in the slot 11 11 13 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal Select the service code which can be used at an extension to change the displayed ...

Page 188: ...400 0 Normal delayed 1 Immediate Ringing 1 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Assign trunks to trunk groups then go to Program 14 06 01 below to set up Trunk Group Routing Trunk Port 1 400 Priority 1 400 Default Trunks 1 400 assigned to trunk group 1 with priorities equal to the trunk number Trunk 1 Priority 1 Trunk 400 Priority 400 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing Priority Order Number Set the p...

Page 189: ...ng Tone 5 2 15 02 22 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk When this option is disabled incoming calls to an extension indicate on any Hotline key for that extension as solid busy When this option is enabled lighting is determined by the setting of Program 22 01 01 Incoming Call Priority If set to trunk priority 1 the Hotline key lights solid when a trunk c...

Page 190: ...sable 1 Display page 1 2 Display page 2 3 Display page 3 4 Display page 4 0 15 25 04 DESI less Page Setup Answer Automatic Screen Switching Define or Disable the page to be automatically displayed when a DESI Less terminal answers a call 0 Disable 1 Display page 1 2 Display page 2 3 Display page 3 4 Display page 4 0 20 02 09 System Options for Multiline Telephones Disconnect Supervision Enable Dis...

Page 191: ...e is not detected after the extension answers an incoming line the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver 0 64800 seconds 20 21 01 17 System Options for Outgoing Calls Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature determine the number of digits to be dialed before the call should be disconnected Di...

Page 192: ...gram 15 02 02 0 Ring Tone Pattern 1 1 Ring Tone Pattern 2 2 Ring Tone Pattern 3 3 Ring Tone Pattern 4 4 Melody 1 5 Melody 2 6 Melody 3 7 Melody 4 8 Melody 5 9 Ring Tone Pattern 5 10 Ring Tone Pattern 6 11 Ring Tone Pattern 7 12 Ring Tone Pattern 8 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions up to 48 to Ring Groups Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming ...

Page 193: ...e a Ring Group In Skin External Voice Mail or Central Voice Mail 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Ring Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 1 23 03 01 Universal Answer Auto Answer Use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions When the user lifts the handset they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk ...

Page 194: ...2 2 Dial 0 If you hear error tone your extension Class of Service prevents Universal Answer To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 811 2 3 Select the ringing 1 8 and tone range 1 4 you want to check 4 Go back to step 3 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up To change the ringing of your incoming trunk 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 820 2 3 Select the ringi...

Page 195: ...which busied out the trunk still has access to it All other users are blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call The trunk however can still be answered by any user programmed with the trunk access Sidetone Volume Setup Allows the system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume There are two levels based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk Side T...

Page 196: ...ing tone prior to the call disconnecting An extension Toll Class of Service may prevent dialing certain numbers Dialing 9 or any other trunk access code after dialing an extension terminates the intercom call and seizes a trunk Phones that have an APR APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk until the interdigit time expires Program 21 01 03 Setting Program 14 02 11 to On may cause a slight dela...

Page 197: ...igned data varies depending on the blade installed in the slot 11 01 01 System Numbering Set system numbering plan 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code If required change the single digit Trunk Access Code normally 9 If you change this code you must also review the settings in Program 11 01 01 for the new code selected Dial maximum of four digits 9 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code 2nd Trunk Route Access Code Assi...

Page 198: ... receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for each trunk Trunks 1 400 1 57 15 5 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 32 0dB 14 01 03 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Level Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for each trunk Trunks 1 400 1 57 15 5 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 32 0dB 14 01 07 Basic Trunk Data Setup Outgoing Calls Allow or Deny outgoing calls on the trunk you are programmi...

Page 199: ...outes 2 100 and Order Numbers 1 4 0 Not Specified 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Set up the Trunk Access Maps This sets the access options for trunks Ring Group programming overrides Access Map programming 0 No access 1 Outgoing access only 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 Inco...

Page 200: ...line key the system remembers the preselection for this time 0 64800 seconds 5 seconds 20 02 09 System Options for Multiline Telephones Disconnect Supervision Enable Disable disconnect supervision for the system trunks 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 ...

Page 201: ...unk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code Refer to Trunk Group Routing to set up outbound routing 0 100 0 No Setting Calls will not route 0 24 02 07 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone Timer starts when a trunk begins talking with another trunk for example Trunk to Trunk Transfer outgoing from trunk Tandem Trunking When this tim...

Page 202: ...key Program 15 07 01 or SC 852 02 plus trunk group 2 Dial the number To place a call over a specific trunk 1 Dial 805 2 Dial the line number e g 005 for line 5 3 Dial the number OR 1 At the multiline terminal press line key Program 15 07 01 or SC 852 01 001 to 400 2 Dial the number To busy out a trunk from outbound usage 1 Press Speaker 745 Trunk Number 001 400 1 The user which busied out the trun...

Page 203: ...Class of Service for each Service mode At default the Mode names are assigned as follows Mode 1 No setting Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Midnight Mode 4 Rest Mode 5 Day2 Mode 6 Night2 Mode 7 Midnight2 Mode 8 Rest2 If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS Program 26 01 03 determines if the system should route over the trunk group settings defined in Program 21 02 or play an error tone When using ARS Cl...

Page 204: ... Code An extension can use Service Code 777 to change another extension Class of Service Program 20 13 28 1 An extension can automatically block another extension attempt to change their Class of Service via Service Code 777 Program 20 13 28 0 The default Service Code for this option is 677 Program 11 11 24 777 System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features ...

Page 205: ...tor Level Changing the Music on Hold Tone Turn Off or On an extension user ability to change the Music on Hold tone 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 07 03 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Time Setting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set the Time via Service Code 728 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 07 04 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Storing Speed Dialing Entries Tu...

Page 206: ...On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 07 15 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS General Message Record Delete Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial Service Code 612 and record listen to or erase the General Message 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 07 18 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data Determine if the Accumulated Extension Data is ...

Page 207: ... ability to set or cancel do not call administrator 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 07 30 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Date Setting Enable Disable an extension user ability to set the Date using the service code defined in Program 11 10 41 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Intercom Calls Turn Off or On Intercom calling for the extension 0 Off 1 ...

Page 208: ...Signal Voice Call Turn Off or On an extension allowing it to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 08 11 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Protect for the Call Mode Switching from Caller When an extension is set to ring mode for ICM calls enabling this option prevents callers from changing the call to voice announce ...

Page 209: ...map programming for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 08 19 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline for SPK Turn Off or On an extension user ability to activate hotline or ringdown when pressing the Speaker key 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 08 20 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hot Key Pad Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make a call by just dialing the nu...

Page 210: ... 1 15 1 20 09 02 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Caller ID Display Turn Off or On the Caller ID display at an extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 09 03 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Sub Address Identification Define whether or not an extension displays the Caller Sub Address 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 09 04 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Notification fo...

Page 211: ...roup calls Service Code 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 10 02 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Another Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group Service Code 769 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 10 03 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup for Specific Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for a specific group using service code 768 0 Of...

Page 212: ...o set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Both Ringing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward with Follo...

Page 213: ...On an extension ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Turns Off or On the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is not possible 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 15 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service VRS Personal ...

Page 214: ...ansfer Service Restricted Unsupervised Conference Allow Deny an extension user to initiate a Trunk to Trunk Transfer Tandem Trunking 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 23 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service CAR VE Call Forward Set Cancel Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set and cancel Call Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual Extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 24 Class of Service Opti...

Page 215: ...rmation 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 01 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Alarm Turn Off or On the Warning Tone for Long Conversation not for single line telephones 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 02 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls 0...

Page 216: ...onference 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 10 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Monitor Enables the extension Barge In Mode to be Speech mode or Monitor mode i e Barge In initiator 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 11 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Monitor Initiating Extension Turn Off or On an extension user ability to Room Monitor other extensions 0 Off 1 On COS 1...

Page 217: ...e 852 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 19 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Selectable Display Messaging Text Messaging Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Selectable Display Messaging 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 20 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Account Code Toll Restriction Operator Alert Restricted Operation Transfer Turn Off or On operator alert when an exte...

Page 218: ...lass of Service Options Supplementary Service Paging Display Turn Off or On an extension user ability to display paging information 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 30 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Background Music Allow Deny an extension user to turn Background Music on and off 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 31 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Connected Line Identification ...

Page 219: ...ervice Options Supplementary Service Do Not Disturb Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set or cancel Do Not Disturb 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 41 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS Turn Off or On the Voice Mail Message Indication for an extension on a DSS console 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 42 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service...

Page 220: ...lementary Service Number and Name appear in the directory Determine if an extension name and number are listed On or unlisted Off in the directory 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 52 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service VoIP All DSP Busy Display Enable Disable the All DSP Busy alarm displayed on the LCD when the caller makes an IP call and there is no VoIP DSP resource 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 2...

Page 221: ...g 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 14 07 Class of Service Options for DISA E M External Paging Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system External Paging 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 14 08 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Direct Trunk Access Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Direct Trunk Access Service Code 715 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 14 09 Class...

Page 222: ...ess Hold You see MODE4 nn Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged 7 Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold You see MODE5 nn Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged 8 Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold You see MODE6 nn Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged 9 E...

Page 223: ...adjust the system time for daylight savings time standard time changes Clock Adjustment The system can be programmed to automatically adjust the system clock on a nightly basis This feature allows you to make adjustments should the system cabinet regularly lose or gain time Conditions The system retains the Clock Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset Changing the time may change t...

Page 224: ...e Programming Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 10 01 01 Time and Date Year Enter two digits 00 99 for the year 00 99 No Setting 10 01 02 Time and Date Month Enter two digits 01 12 for the month 01 12 No Setting 10 01 03 Time and Date Day Enter two digits 01 31 for the day 01 31 No Setting 10 01 04 Time and Date Week Enter the digit 1 Sunday 7 Saturday to indicate the day ...

Page 225: ... 12 01 12 1 Jan 2 Feb etc 3 10 24 04 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Week Enter the week of the month the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time 0 5 0 Last Week of Month 2 10 24 05 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Week Day Enter the day of the week the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time 1 7 1 Sun 2 Mon etc 1 10 24 06 Daylight Savings Setup End of Month Enter th...

Page 226: ...15 15 Type 8 24 hour 15 15 TUE 10 MAR 3 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 07 03 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Time Setting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set the Time via Service Code 728 0 Off 1 On CO...

Page 227: ...ction Classes to dial To let all users dial 911 for example put 911 in the Common Permit Code Table The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and Common Restrict Code Tables The system provides 10 tables with up to four digits in each table entry Each code is four digits maximum using 0 9 Q and Recall as a wild card Common Restrict Code Table The Common Restrict Code Table lets you ...

Page 228: ... administrators can program Speed Dialing Code Restriction may not be necessary You can separately restrict Group and Common Speed Dialing Toll Digit Counting Use Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial You can use this option to prevent users from accessing local dial up services For example set the Maximum Number of Digits in Local Calls to seven to limit local c...

Page 229: ...k this restores both way voice paths immediately When using DISA or Tie Lines additional programming is required for Code Restriction DISA refer to Program 25 10 Tie Lines refer to Program 34 04 A user can temporarily block their extension Code Restriction access preventing unwanted calls from being placed on their telephone while they are away from their desk Each phone and trunk have a Restricti...

Page 230: ...On COS 01 15 0 21 01 10 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path If this option is programmed with an entry other than 0 a call does not have a talk path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an outgoing call This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem when dialing 911 Since it is only a 3...

Page 231: ...iction Class Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment Select the table defined in Program 21 06 03 to be used to determine the maximum number of digits allowed for outgoing calls 1 4 Table 0 Disable None 1 2 6 15 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 21 05 05 Toll Restriction Class Common Permit Code Table Choose whether the table set up by Program 21 06 04 is referred to or not referred to 0 Unassigned 1 Assigned 1 8 1...

Page 232: ...1 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup International Call Restriction Table Enter the international dialing codes you want to restrict A maximum of four digits to be assigned Tables 1 10 No Setting 21 06 02 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup International Call Permit Code Table Enter the international dialing codes you want to permit Dial maximum of six digits Tables 1 20 No Setting 21 06 03 Toll Rest...

Page 233: ...s Table 1 4 No Setting 21 21 01 Toll Restriction for Trunks Seized Trunk Basis Setting Restriction Class Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the selected trunk 1 15 1 34 01 05 E M Tie Line Basic Setup System Toll Restriction Determine if an incoming Tie Line call should be subject to Toll Restriction 0 No Off 1 Yes On 0 34 08 01 Toll Restriction Data for E M Tie Lines Define the Toll Restriction ...

Page 234: ... Override bypasses all Code Restriction programming Walking Code Restriction allows you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user When a call is placed using Walking Code Restriction the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in Programs 21 05 xx and Programs 21 06 xx Conditions Off Premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines...

Page 235: ...de Service Code 775 0 Off 1 On COS 01 15 0 21 01 07 System Options for Outgoing Calls Toll Restriction Override Time Set the Toll Restriction Override Time After dialing the Toll Restriction Override codes the system removes Toll Restriction for this Time 0 64800 seconds 10 21 07 01 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extensions Each code must have fo...

Page 236: ...summary every Saturday at midnight 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 06 SMDR Output Options Summary Monthly Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a monthly summary at midnight on the last day of the month 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 07 SMDR Output Options Toll Charge Cost Set this option to 1 have the SMDR report include toll charges 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 08 ...

Page 237: ... CLI DID Number Switching should be displayed 0 CLI CLIP 1 DID Calling Number 2 Caller ID Name 0 35 02 16 SMDR Output Options Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number Determine how the SMDR should print incoming calls on ANI DNIS or DID trunks If set to 1 ANI DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits If set to 0 trunk names are printed instead 0 Trunk Port Name 1 Received Dialed Number 0 35 02 17 SMDR Output ...

Page 238: ...238 Walking Code Restriction 663 ...

Page 239: ...239 Temporary Code Restriction Override service code be changed 775 ...

Page 240: ...ial your code incorrectly 4 Press idle line key or dial trunk access code 5 Dial the number without any restriction To use your Walking Code Restriction level at an extension You can override restriction for only one call at a time 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 763 and dial the 6 digit user ID for Walking Toll Restriction After di...

Page 241: ...lass of Service control the supervisor is not an assigned extension If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password Conditions If the system is reset by a first initialize the Dial Block feature is cleared This feature is not available for ISDN S Bus extensions Both Program 21 09 01 Code Restrict Class and Program 21 10 Di...

Page 242: ... code must have four digits using any combination of 0 9 and Each extension can have a separate code or many extensions can share the same override code Maximum of four digits fixed No Setting 21 09 01 Dial Block Setup Toll Restriction Class with Dial Block Assign a Code Restriction COS 1 15 when the Dial Block feature is used 1 15 15 21 09 02 Dial Block Setup Supervisor Password Assign a 4 digit ...

Page 243: ...tension 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 701 default 3 Dial the 4 digit Dial Block code as set in programming 4 Dial the extension number to blocked 5 Dial 1 Confirmation tone is heard 6 Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up To release Dial Block from another extension 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the sin...

Page 244: ... 101 followed by extension 102 Split cycles from the trunk to 101 and finally to 102 The Split cycle then repeats If a user s extension has Barge In enabled they can also Barge In on an established Conference This permits for example an attendant or supervisor to join a Conference in an emergency It also allows a co worker to leave a conference and then rejoin the telephone meeting when it is conv...

Page 245: ...fer In this case the multiline terminal must have a Conference function key The system also allows a call to be transferred into a Conference call When the Conference Originator hangs up with a conference on Hold or when trying to add another caller all internal calls are dropped Conferencing when talking on a Virtual Extension While talking on a Virtual Extension if the station has an internal ca...

Page 246: ...onference 1 57 15 5 dB 12 5 dB in 0 5 dB intervals 32 0 dB 15 02 24 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Conference Key Mode Allow an extension Conf key to be programmed for Conference or for Transfer When set for Transfer the user places a call on hold dials the extension to which it should be transferred then presses the Conf key The call is then transferred When set for Conference with an activ...

Page 247: ... Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive Turn Off or On Barge In at the receiving extension i e Barge In receive 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 14 11 Class of Service Options for DISA E M DISA Tie Trunk Barge In Enable 1 Disable 0 a DISA or tie trunk user from using the Barge In feature 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 Operation To establish Conference Multiline...

Page 248: ...rk orbit 4 Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties OR Hookflash twice to set up the Conference To Split alternate between the parties in Conference Multiline Terminal 1 Press Conf Transfer or Conference key Program 15 07 or SC 851 07 2 Dial Split service code 894 Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference Press the Conf softkey or press Conf twice to...

Page 249: ...vice code default 810 If the telephone does not have the proper COS a warning tone is sent After the user hangs up the system automatically places a Callback to the extension 2 Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call When a new call is added to the conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference depending on system programming and...

Page 250: ...S key of a telephone in a Conference call If an error tone is heard Barge In is not enabled for the extension and the call cannot go through Retrieve the call by pressing the flashing line or Call Appearance CAP Key or hang up and the call recalls the extension When the call is transferred into the Conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the conference depending on the entries in P...

Page 251: ...f participants per Remote Conference is 32 if conference resources are available A maximum of 20 simultaneous Remote Conferences are possible if conference resources are available Up to 96 callers can participate in a Remote Conference if conference resources are available and the built in modem is disabled A conference call cannot be split over the CPU s conference blocks When joining a conferenc...

Page 252: ...plan No Setting 14 01 03 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Level Use this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk The option sets the gain signal amplification for the trunk you are programming Trunks 1 400 1 57 15 5 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 32 0dB 14 01 04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls Use this option to select the CODEC gain type used by the tru...

Page 253: ...mote Conference Maximum Conference Duration Set the time limit in seconds for each conference When this time passes the conference is disconnected by the SV9100 0 64800 seconds 7200 seconds 20 34 05 Remote Conference Group Setting Remote Conference Ending Conference Alert Tone Time Determine how long prior to disconnecting a Remote Conference call based on the maximum conference duration above the...

Page 254: ...password 4 If the correct password is entered the caller is added to the Remote Conference If the wrong password is entered a warning tone is heard and you must hang up and dial back into the conference pilot As the conference time limit nears the system will provide a warning tone to all participants based on Program 20 34 05 Once this timer expires if the conference is still ongoing the particip...

Page 255: ...xtension user to quickly change an outside call from the non private mode to the private mode If the outside call is on a line key the user just presses the line key to switch from non private mode to private mode For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option trunks initially have the privacy released The remainder of the call is private If the call is on a Call Appearance CAP Key the user pres...

Page 256: ... for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 09 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Privacy Release Turn Off or On an extension user ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv...

Page 257: ...ease or Voice Call Conference blinks To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties 1 Press Speaker to hang up To toggle between Private and Non Private mode 1 Press the Meet Me Conference key Program 15 07 01 SC 851 32 OR Press the Trunk Line Key This toggles from Non Private to Private To go back to Non Private the Meet Me Conference Key above must be pressed ...

Page 258: ...ueue Status Displays shows The number of calls queued for an available agent in the group The trunk that has been waiting the longest and how long it has been waiting For each Contact Centre Group you can set the following conditions The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs If the supervisor shoul...

Page 259: ...ing mailboxes Program 47 07 01 can be set to Announcement mailboxes and can be used as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Announcement Messages This option is applicable only to Contact Centre Overflow modes that are assigned Contact Centre delayed messages and Program 41 08 03 must be set to 2 Agent Log In and Log Out Services A Contact Centre Agent can log in and log out of their Contact Cen...

Page 260: ...time During Mode Pattern 2 Contact Centre agents belong to Contact Centre groups 1 and 10 During Mode Pattern 3 8 Contact Centre agents belong to only Contact Centre group 10 Example 2 Log In with AIC 789 567 and 678 During Mode Pattern 1 Contact Centre agents belong to Contact Centre groups 1 2 3 5 10 and 16 at the same time During Mode Pattern 2 Contact Centre agents belong to Contact Centre gro...

Page 261: ...t up four distinct Work Schedules with up to eight Work Periods in each Work Schedule Each day of the week has one Work Schedule but different days can share the same schedule For example your Monday through Friday Work Schedule could consist of only two Work Periods Work Period 1 could be from 8 00 AM to 5 00 PM when your business is open Work Period 2 could be from 5 00 PM to 8 00 AM which cover...

Page 262: ...Contact Centre Group to be the group supervisor Once assigned as a Contact Centre Group Supervisor the user can During programming you can choose one of three modes of operation for each Contact Centre Group supervisor A Contact Centre Group can have only one supervisor An extension can be a supervisor for only one Contact Centre Group Supervisor Contact Centre System You can designate an extensio...

Page 263: ...ey Enhanced for Contact Centre applications Hotline provides a unique Busy Lamp Field for Contact Centre agents as well as a BLF for co workers that are not Contact Centre agents The charts below show both sets of BLF indications BLF For Contact Centre Agents When the key is The Contact Centre Agent is Off Idle and is not a Contact Centre Agent On Busy Double Wink Off Making an Emergency Call Wink...

Page 264: ... how long it has been waiting The number of calls in queue How long the longest queued call has been waiting 2 LINE 001 01 30 Name of trunk that has been qu eued the longest For each Contact Centre Group you can set the following conditions The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs see the Queue St...

Page 265: ...uty mode To scroll through the Contact Centre groups queue status the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key must be used You cannot scroll when the Queue Status Display is displayed due to an alarm If the Queue Status display and alarm are active and the queued called is answered disconnected the display and alarm continue until the times in Program 41 20 02 and Program 41 20 05 expire Wh...

Page 266: ...Contact Centre Agent presses the Contact Centre Caller ID Marking Setup Function Key and marks information of the caller when he thinks this caller would call again By the Contact Centre Agent pressing the Function Key that marks the Caller ID to the system the next time the same Caller ID calls back into Contact Centre the Caller ID based routing tries to route the call to the agent that marked t...

Page 267: ...ports Refer to the MOH Music on Hold Contact Centre can only support one Music on Hold source When an agent is in a Ring Group and logged in it will not ring when a call comes to the Ring Group It will ring when logged out If a phone has never been brought up and is assigned as an agent the system will have to be reset before the phone is able to login The End of Work Key 14 from a System Supervis...

Page 268: ...ueues in the UNIVERGE SV9100 system are not transferred to the PC running the Contact Centre Server applications The NEC Contact Centre Server applications are programmed separately A supervisor assigned to not receive calls or take calls after the overflow time is reached shows as idle in Contact Centre when they are logged in and idle even when calls are queued up and not reaching the overflow t...

Page 269: ...digits 0 9 657 11 13 05 Service Code Setup for Contact Centre Set Contact Centre Off Duty for SLT Assign for single line telephones SLT Maximum of eight digits 0 9 658 11 13 06 Service Code Setup for Contact Centre Cancel Contact Centre Off Duty for SLT Assign for single line telephones SLT Maximum of eight digits 0 9 659 11 13 08 Service Code Setup for Contact Centre Agent ID Code Login Assign to...

Page 270: ...ension or a virtual extension is assigned to the function key on the key telephone select the ring tone when receiving a call on that key For Contact Centre CAR keys only tone pattern 1 entry 0 can be used The remaining patterns are not checked with this feature 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming Ring Tone Extension 5 Tone Pattern 5 6 Tone Pattern 6 7 To...

Page 271: ...y extension which has this option enabled also hears the queue alarm 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 22 01 11 System Options for Incoming Calls VRS Waiting Message Interval Time Setup the sending duration time of the Auto Attendant Queuing The message is repeatedly sent out during the specified time 0 64800 seconds 20 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode Set the mode of the system DSS consoles The entry for ...

Page 272: ...cation when a BT message is returned 0 Notifies 1 No notification 0 41 02 01 Contact Centre Group and Agent Assignments For each Contact Centre extension number assign a Contact Centre Group 1 64 A Contact Centre Group number is assigned to each Work Period number 1 8 Contact Centre Work Period Mode Number 1 8 Contact Centre Group Number 0 2 0 No Setting 0 41 03 01 Incoming Ring Group Assignment f...

Page 273: ...he eight Work Periods After the schedules are set up assign them to days of the week in Program 41 07 Work Period Mode Number 1 8 Start Time 0000 2359 End Time 0000 2359 Start 0000 End 0000 41 07 01 Contact Centre Weekly Schedule Setup Assign the four Work Schedules 1 4 to days of the week The assignments made in this program apply to both the Contact Centre Agent Work Schedules Program 41 05 and ...

Page 274: ...se calls 0 9999 Used when Program 41 08 02 is set to 5 9999 41 08 06 Overflow Options Incoming Ring Group when Overflow Assign the Ring Group for overflow calls to go to 1 100 Used when Program 41 08 02 is set to 68 1 41 09 01 Overflow Table Setting Define the group to which a call is transferred when overflow occurs 0 65 0 No Setting 65 In Skin Voice Mail Integration 0 41 10 01 ACI Delay Announce...

Page 275: ... to 0 the message is not played 0 255 0 41 11 04 VRS Delay Announcement 2nd Delay Message Number Input the VRS Message to be played as the 2nd Delay Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 41 11 05 VRS Delay Announcement 2nd Waiting Message Sending Count Input the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is sent If set to 0 the message is not played 0 255 0 41 11 06 VRS Delay Announcement Tone...

Page 276: ...all or twice to barge in on the call The supervisor must be logged in for this feature to work 0 Call to system supervisory extension when group supervisory extension is busy 1 No calls to system supervisory extension when group supervisory extension is busy 0 41 14 02 Options Setup Automatic Wrap Up Mode Define if agents manually enter wrap mode by pressing a key or are put automatically into wra...

Page 277: ...oups When an option is set for a Group the setting is in force if applicable for all agents in the group For each Queue 1 64 assign the Destination Number Type 2nd Data 0 None 1 Extension or Voice Mail 2 Incoming Ring Group 3 Speed Dial Bin 4 Group 0 41 14 13 3 Options Setup Destination Number Set various options for Groups When an option is set for a Group the setting is in force if applicable fo...

Page 278: ...1 The longest waiting call is transferred 2 Send Busy Tone 0 41 17 01 Login Mode Setup Define the login mode for each extension If the AIC Login Mode is enabled set the AIC Login and AIC Logout service codes for the AIC members in Program 11 13 08 and 11 13 09 0 Normal Login Mode 1 AIC Login Mode 0 41 18 01 Agent Identity Code Setup Agent Identity Code Define the Agent Identity Codes Maximum of fo...

Page 279: ...l maximum of eight digits No Setting 41 19 03 Voice Mail Delay Announcement 1st Delay Message Sending Count Assign the 1st Delay Message Sending Count This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play 1 255 0 No message is played 0 41 19 04 Voice Mail Delay Announcement Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message Assign the Voice Mail Announcement Mailboxes as the message source for th...

Page 280: ...active on a call logged out or in wrap up 0 64800 seconds 60 seconds 41 20 04 Queue Display Settings Call Waiting Alarm Program 41 15 can also provide a queue alarm to the agents The options in Program 41 20 should not be used if 41 15 is set Enable Disable the queue alarm 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On 0 41 20 05 Queue Display Settings Call Waiting Alarm Hold Time Program 41 15 can also provide a queu...

Page 281: ...ight digits using 0 9 No Setting entered by pressing Hold No Setting 47 03 03 SV9100 InMail Group Mailbox Options Mailbox Type Set the Group Mailbox type 0 None 1 Subscriber 2 Routing 1 47 07 02 SV9100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options Routing Mailbox Type Set the Routing Mailbox type 0 None 1 Call Routing 2 Announcement 3 Directory 4 Distribution Mailboxes 01 08 1 Call Routing Mailboxes 09 32 2 Anno...

Page 282: ...OR key again AIC Agent Log In To Log In Multiline Terminal 1 Press the LOG IN LOG OUT key Program 15 07 01 or SC 852 10 OR Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code Program 11 13 08 2 Dial the log in code up to 20 digits This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41 01 02 3 Dial the Agent Identity Code AIC up to four digits The LOG IN LOG OUT key lights To Log Out for...

Page 283: ...g In service code Program 11 13 08 4 Dial the Agent Identity Code AIC up to four digits The Log In Log Out key lights Single Line Telephone Follow Steps 1 3 to log in with additional AICs up to three anytime 1 Lift the handset and dial the AIC Log In service code Program 11 13 08 2 Dial the log in code up to 20 digits This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41 01 02 3 Dial ...

Page 284: ...of the logged out agents displays the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system programming Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the telephone to idle until the time in Program 41 20 03 expires again Rest Mode To Set The Manual Rest Mode Multiline Terminal 1 With the multiline terminal idle press the Rest Mode key Program 15 07 ...

Page 285: ...285 Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset A fast busy is heard 2 Dial 759 3 Hang up ...

Page 286: ...ttendant bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers OCCs After the outside service answers the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow Without Continued Dialing the system Toll Restriction cuts off the call after a specific number of dialed digits Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud Conditions The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls ...

Page 287: ...MF Signal on ICM Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Continued Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Assign a Toll Restriction Class 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 9 9 Power Failure Mode Restriction Class 1 15 2 21 05 04 Toll Restriction Class Maximum Number of Digits Table As...

Page 288: ...ome interference may take place when operating in the same environment as other wireless devices which operate within the same frequency spectrum Conditions If using the Base Switching option Cordless DECT Terminal programmable keys 1 4 can be set as a Programmable Function key such as Trunk Line Keys 5 and 6 can be set as One Touch keys 7 and 8 are reserved for Base Switching and cannot be progra...

Page 289: ... ring when receiving a doorbox call Notification is shown in the display Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a Recall key assigned in the phone configuration or by a Flash Key assigned to one of the line keys in Program 15 07 851 62 Under certain conditions HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior To prevent an unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and callin...

Page 290: ...g 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10 DSS Console 11 Not Used 0 10 03 02 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Logical Port Number B1 Use to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for logical port number B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 1 960 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging 1 8 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Tone Ringer 1 8 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Door Box 1 8 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP for ACI 1 96 10 DSS 1 32 11 Not Used 0 1...

Page 291: ... Side Option Information Read only command that shows the type of side module connected to the terminal 0 No Option 1 8LK Unit 2 16LK Unit 3 24ADM 0 10 03 10 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Bottom Option Information Only applies to DTL style telephones Shows optional adapter information 0 No option 1 APR 2 ADA 3 BHA 0 10 03 11 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Handset Option Information Shows optional adapter inf...

Page 292: ... 20 07 13 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS Record VRS Msg Operation Turn Off or On an extension user ability to record erase and listen to VRS messages 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 07 14 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS General Message Play Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial 4 or Service Code 611 to listen to the General Message 0 Off 1 On COS 1 1...

Page 293: ...COS 1 15 0 20 07 26 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Dial In Mode Switch Enable Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel dial in mode switch 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 07 27 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Do Not Call Administrator Enable Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel do not call administrator 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 08 01 Class of Service Opt...

Page 294: ...Voice Call Turn Off or On an extension allowing it to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 08 11 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Protect for the Call Mode Switching from Caller When an extension is set to ring mode for ICM calls enabling this option prevents callers from changing the call to voice announce mode 0 ...

Page 295: ... access map programming for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 08 22 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Voice Over to busy Virtual Extension Enable Disable an extension ability to voice over to a busy virtual extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turns Off or On the extension ability to rec...

Page 296: ...an extension ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy Program 20 13 06 must be set to 0 Off for this feature to work 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 09 08 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Calling Party Information Turn Off or On and extension ability to display calling party information on CCIS calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 10 01 Class of Service Options A...

Page 297: ...15 1 20 10 09 Class of Service Options Answer Service Call Pickup Callback Turn off or on an extension ability to use Call Pickup to Pick up Callback calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 01 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forward All Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward Immediate 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 02 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service ...

Page 298: ...roup Hold 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Automatic On Hook Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 12 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Off Premise External Call Forwarding Turn Off or On setting up Call Forwarding Off Premise at the extension 0 Off 1 ...

Page 299: ...ss of Service should allow normal 0 or extended Park 1 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 20 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service No Callback Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive Callbacks 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 21 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up Allow Deny an extension user ability to set up a tandem conference call autom...

Page 300: ...vice Options Supplementary Service Call Forward DND Override Bypass Call Turn On or Off the ability to use Call Forwarding DND Override 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Message Waiting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to leave Message Waiting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 08 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Conference Turn Off or On ...

Page 301: ...ary Service Barge In Receive Turn Off or On Barge In at the receiving extension i e Barge In receive 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Intrusion Tone Turn Off or On the Barge In Intrusion Tone If disabled this also turns off the Barge In display at the called extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 18 Class of Service Options Suppleme...

Page 302: ...call The Barge In feature must be enabled if this option is to be used 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 26 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Group Listen Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Group Listen 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 27 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension If set to 1 a busy extension can be called while someone is talki...

Page 303: ...35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Camp On Turn Off or On an extension user ability to block callers from dialing to camp on 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 36 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Call Duration Timer Display Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 38 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Headset Ringing for SLT ...

Page 304: ...mber Display Determine if a station Number is displayed On or not displayed Off in the LCD when the phone is idle 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 48 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Station Name Display Determine if a station Name is displayed On or not displayed Off in the LCD when the phone is idle 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 49 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service BLF Indica...

Page 305: ...ng Vol to turn Global Off Hook Ringing On or Off LCD indicates ON or OFF as appropriate 8 Press TALK to exit Function keys F1 F8 can be programmed as Line Keys 1 16 Redial LNR SPD Answer ANS Feature FNC or Recall When assigned these keys operate the same as on an NEC multiline terminal When initially installed function keys F1 F8 default to Line keys 1 8 respectively and Off Hook Ringing defaults ...

Page 306: ... the maximum number of cordless devices used without interference varies This feature works with 2500 type cordless single line telephones The multiline terminal user and the associated cordless telephone user cannot talk to each other An APR L Unit with hookflash enabled follows the same operating procedures as a single line terminal connected to a GCD 4LCF with GPZ 4LCF Daughter Board or GCD 8LC...

Page 307: ...s None System Availability Terminals Any DTL terminal with an APR L Unit except the DTL 2DT 1 TEL Required Component s 2500 type cordless Single Line Telephone Related Features Ancillary Device Connection Class of Service ...

Page 308: ... Ringer 1 8 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Door Box 1 8 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP for ACI 1 96 10 DSS 1 32 11 Not Used 0 10 03 05 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Optional Installed Unit 2 Use to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for optional installed Unit 2 0 None 1 APR Module 2 APA Module 3 ADA Module 4 CTA CTU Module 0 10 03 06 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B2 Setup and confirm the Basic Configuratio...

Page 309: ...by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 07 02 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Changing the Music on Hold Tone Turn Off or On an extension user ability to change the Music on Hold tone 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 07 03 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Time Setting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set the Time via Service Cod...

Page 310: ...1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 07 15 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS General Message Record Delete Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial Service Code 612 and record listen to or erase the General Message 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 07 18 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data Define if Accumulated Extension Data is included in th...

Page 311: ...g Calls Turn Off or On outgoing trunk calling for the extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 08 03 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service System Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 08 04 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Group Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to...

Page 312: ...ptions Outgoing Call Service Block Outgoing Caller ID Turn Off or On a user Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a call is placed If block is enabled the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code 67 defined in Program 14 01 21 before the user dialed digits this requires Program 14 02 10 to be enabled If block is disabled the system outdials t...

Page 313: ...y to display calling party information on CCIS calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 10 01 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Within Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group as well as ring group calls Service Code 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 10 02 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Another Group Turn Off or On Group Cal...

Page 314: ...tension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Both Ringing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set C...

Page 315: ...r erase the Personal Greeting Message 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 16 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Redirect Turn Off or On an extension user ability to transfer a call to a predefined destination such as an operator voice mail or another extension without answering the call 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 17 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Department Group Trunk to...

Page 316: ... Charging Cost Service Cost Display TTU ISDN billing information 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 01 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Alarm Turn Off or On the Warning Tone for Long Conversation not for single line telephones 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 02 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming Turn Off or On an extension user abi...

Page 317: ... user ability to Room Monitor other extensions 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 12 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Monitor Extension Being Monitored Turn Off or On an extension ability to be monitored by other extensions 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to ...

Page 318: ...y to display the detail state of called party 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 23 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Display the Reason for Transfer Select whether or not an extension user should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension Call Forward Busy Call Forward No Answer DND 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 24 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Privacy ...

Page 319: ...ion user ability to have multiple users Barge In to their conversation 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 33 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Supervisor s Position Enhancement This option must be On for the operator to use service codes in Program 11 13 10 through Program 11 13 13 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 34 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Manual Off Hook Signaling T...

Page 320: ...n Name is displayed On or not displayed Off in the LCD when the phone is idle 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 49 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service BLF Indication on CO Incoming State Determine if a BLF of the station lights when a Normal CO call is ringing the phone 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 50 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service AIC Agent Display which Call is From Determine...

Page 321: ...reference is assigned for the multiline terminal To transfer a call from a cordless single line telephone to its associated multiline terminal 1 The multiline terminal user goes off hook 2 The single line telephone user goes on hook at this time the call is automatically connected to the multiline terminal To transfer a call from a multiline terminal to its associated cordless single line telephon...

Page 322: ... and a single line telephone are assigned for Data Line Security Tone Override Voice Override and Call Alert notification tone are not heard over the handset speaker Data Line Security protects a station from Barge In even when Barge In is allowed in Class of Service When any multiline terminal or single line telephone calls a station with Data Line Security a constant busy tone is heard Default S...

Page 323: ...or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy Program 20 13 06 must be set to 0 Off for this feature to work 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 05 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Intercom Off Hook Signaling Turn Off or On an extension ability to send off hook signals This setting functions with Programs 20 09 07 and 20 13 06 disabled 0 O...

Page 324: ...d Call Arrival Keys Conditions An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset depending on programming Terminals must have a CAP or CO line appearance for a trunk call to be answered on the telephone Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival CAR Keys Central Office Calls Answering Secondary In...

Page 325: ...Trunk Access Maps to extensions Trunk Access Maps 1 400 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign CAR SIE VE function keys code 03 extension number or CO function keys Code 01 trunk port on multiline terminals Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 15 09 01 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Individually program an extens...

Page 326: ...ne if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination If an incoming trunk call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time Program 22 01 04 it routes to the destination you specify in this option Determine if the destination should be a Ring Group In Skin External Voice Mail or Central Voice Mail 0 No Setti...

Page 327: ...nce for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 8 Press Hold for a second time for Delayed Ring or Skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speaker ...

Page 328: ...n be enabled or disabled by using a 58 key programmed in Program 15 07 It can also be done by using the service codes in Program 11 11 25 set and Program 11 11 26 cancel When this feature is activated any DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number go immediately to the transfer destination and do not ring anyone in the group To set up the destination you use Program 24 05 and Program 13 04 Onc...

Page 329: ...artment Calling group The call continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up If all members of the Department Group are busy an incoming or transferred call to the group pilot number queues for an available member Each group has a queue that can hold any number of waiting calls If a display telephone is waiting in queue the user sees WAITING group name If a transferred call...

Page 330: ...ram 16 01 05 is set to 1 Automatic all telephones in the Department group Ring for ICM calls DID calls Directed to the Department Group Pilot Number only The Overflow feature is supported only for DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number POTS lines and transferred DIDs ignore the Overflow settings When a Department Group is assigned as the VM Department Group in Program 45 01 01 it only work...

Page 331: ...ting Department Calling Priority Call Routing IF IF IF Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Priority 1 Priority 1 Priority 1 CALL Telephone on a call Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 3 ...

Page 332: ...332 Circular Routing Department Calling Circular Routing CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 ...

Page 333: ... Group set up Dial maximum of eight digits No Setting 11 11 25 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group Set the service code to activate immediate automatic transfer for ICM and transferred calls to Department Groups MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 702 11 11 26 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Automatic Transfer Cancellation for...

Page 334: ...g 11 16 10 Single Digit Service Code Setup Department STG All Ring Mode Assign the Single Digit post dialing Service Code for All Member Ring 0 9 Maximum of one digit No Setting 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a Department Calling key 46 so extension users can install or remove themselves from the Department Calling Group Additional keys can also be assigned for Department Group feature...

Page 335: ...gs of Programs 16 01 03 and 16 01 04 0 Manual 1 Automatic 0 16 01 06 Department Group Basic Data Setup STG Withdraw Mode Set the STG withdraw mode for each department group 0 Disable Camp On 1 Enable Overflow Mode 0 16 01 07 Department Group Basic Data Setup Call Recall Restriction for STG Determine whether or not an unanswered call transferred to a Department Group should recall the extension fro...

Page 336: ...rn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy Program 20 13 06 must be set to 0 Off for this feature to work 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 17 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Department Group Trunk to Trunk Transfer Each Telephone Group Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user in a Department Group ability to use the Trunk to...

Page 337: ...ine Telephones SLTs without message waiting lamps this is the time between intermittent ringing If this value is set to 0 the system rings once 0 64800 seconds 30 24 02 08 System Options for Transfer Delayed Transfer Timer for All Department Groups Determine the time a call should ring a Department Group before transferring the call 0 64800 seconds 10 24 05 01 Department Group Transfer Target Setu...

Page 338: ... back in Department Calling routes calls to your extension 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 750 0 OR Press Department Calling Log In key Program 15 07 01 or SC 851 46 The key goes out when you log back in To change the Department Group Overflow Destination 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 704 Department Group 01 64 3 Dial 01 08 Refer to Program 24 05 4 Dial the destination the calls route to 5 Press Hold ...

Page 339: ... also allows an extension user to cycle through the members of a Department Group Conditions If required use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code default code 2 A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned code 36 In Program 20 08 12 enable 1 or disable 0 an extension user ability to use Department Step Calling Default Settings Enabled System Av...

Page 340: ...9 AppearanceFunction Code Service Code 852 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 08 12 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Department Group Step Calling Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Department...

Page 341: ...extension user cannot edit the displayed number To place an outgoing call an extension user must have outgoing access to a line CAP or trunk group key If the system has VRS or InMail installed pressing to preview a number is not required Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with Display Required Component s None Related Features Central Office Calls Placin...

Page 342: ...ff 1 On COS 1 15 1 Operation To use Dial Number Preview to place a call multiline terminal only 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial Skip to step 3 if a VRS or InMail is not installed 3 To preview any number dial the number you want to call To preview a Speed Dial System Group number press Redial and dial the Speed Dial System Group bin number you want to call The number is displayed ...

Page 343: ...ones Conditions Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones or Wireless DECT SIP Terminals Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is not canceled when dialing in handset mode Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode but only for internal calls The tone is still heard for external dialing Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline ...

Page 344: ... 11 11 19 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Key Touch Tone On Off If required change the service code to enable or disable the Key Touch Tone MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 824 Operation To enable disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 824 ...

Page 345: ...utomatically using a feature like Last Number Redial the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group Refer to the chart under Programming for more information Conditions None Default Settings Disabled for manually dialed calls enabled for automatically dialed calls System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Route...

Page 346: ...available 14 02 05 Analog Trunk Data Setup Dial Tone Detection for Manually Accessed Trunks Enable Disable dial tone detection for directly accessed trunks If disabled the system outdials on the trunks without monitoring for dial tone 0 Dial Tone Detection Not Used 1 Dial Tone Detection Used 0 14 02 11 Analog Trunk Data Setup Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone If Enabled the system skips over a ...

Page 347: ...0 seconds 3 21 01 06 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial Pause at First Digit If Dial Tone Detection is Disabled the system waits this time before sending dialed digits If using Dial Tone Detection this time should be set longer than the time set in Program 21 01 05 otherwise if this time is set shorter than Program 21 01 05 Dial Tone Detection is satisfied and Program 21 01 05 is disregarded n...

Page 348: ...des and are supplied to the PLO The PLO synchronization source priorities are as follows 1 GCD PRTA 2 GCD CCTA External 3 GCD 2BRIA 4 GCD CP10 Conditions If multiple PRIs exist the system chooses the first one that synchronized with the carrier If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down the system begins to count forward in slot numbers looking for the next availabl...

Page 349: ... for the source goes down the system begins to count forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI In this example the PRI in 02 went down so the system now begins looking forward in slot numbers for the next PRI to use as the clock source Digital Trunk Clocking Example 2 In this example the PRI in 05 was the first to synchronize with the carrier and became the PLO synchronization sou...

Page 350: ...rcuits and a BRI circuit Since the T1 assigned as EXTERNAL has higher priority than a BRI the T1 EXTERNAL is the PLO synchronization source Digital Trunk Clocking Example 5 In this example there is a PRI multiple T1s and a BRI The PRI was the PLO synchronization source until it went down The BRI then becomes the PLO synchronization source because when a PRI is in the system T1s cannot be assigned ...

Page 351: ...urce Digital Trunk Clocking Example 7 In this scenario the PRI was the clocking source until it went down There are no other PRIs T1 Externals or BRIs in the system The GCD CP10 now becomes the PLO synchronization source Digital Trunk Clocking Example 8 Guide to Feature Programming Refer to the related features section for links to associated features Operation Refer to the related features sectio...

Page 352: ...ansferred Intercom calls Ringing and voice announced Intercom calls Conditions Calls which were on hold or transferred which recall the extension can be answered using Directed Call Pickup Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Directed Call Pickup cannot be used to pick up a call ringing at a agent Default Settings En...

Page 353: ... Call Pickup Own Group Customize the Service Codes for direct call pickup own group MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 856 11 12 26 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Specified Group Customize the Service Codes for call pickup for specified group MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 868 11 12 27 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup Customize the Service Codes for ca...

Page 354: ...answer MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 872 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service to extensions 1 15 Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 10 05 Class of Service Options Answer Service Directed Call Pickup for Own Group Turn Off or On Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension ...

Page 355: ...n You change Program 15 01 01 Extension Numbers and Names Any user dials 700 and changes their extension name Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Speed Dial System Group Station Intercom Calling and One Touch Calling Extension Directory only shows a telephones VEs that are connected and have a name assigned in Program 15 01 01 Pressing the Right Cursor Key twice...

Page 356: ...ass of Service Options Supplementary Service Number and Name Appear in the Directory Determine if an extension name and number should be listed 1 or unlisted 0 in the directory 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 21 01 02 System Options for Outgoing Calls Intercom Interdigit Time If a user waits longer than this time between Directory Dialing steps Directory Dialing automatically cancels 0 64800 seconds 10 ...

Page 357: ... can not access it either 3 Dial letter number range for the party you want to call e g dial 2 for A B C or 2 You can enter several letters to help narrow the search Press to enter additional letters on the same key ex TOM 8666 6 4 Press the Down Arrow softkey to jump to that section 5 Press the Volume or key to scroll through the list If you wait too long between your selections Directory Dialing...

Page 358: ...6 The UNIVERGE SV9100 system has 4000 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the 20 DID Translation Tables One translation is made in each entry For a simple installation you can put all 4000 entries in the same table For more flexibility you can optionally distribute the 4000 entries among the 20 tables In addition to number conversion each DID Translation Table entry can have ...

Page 359: ...fined as a 1 digit access code to department group 300 outside callers cannot access extensions 200 299 directly SMDR Includes Dialed Number The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk name entered in system programming or the number the incoming caller dialed i e the dialed DID digits This allows you to analyze the SMDR report based on the number your callers dial This option also applies to a...

Page 360: ...rogram 22 02 Other types of trunks may use the DID table but the DID intercept feature is not yet supported With the DID Intercept for each DID number feature when the primary destination Program 22 11 05 is set to Voice Mail the Voice Mail protocol is 1 Busy Intercept Forward Busy 2 Ring No Answer Intercept Forward RNA When the secondary destination Program 22 11 06 is set to Voice Mail the Voice...

Page 361: ...am 22 11 01 Example 1 Automatic Change 00 00 09 00 12 00 13 00 18 00 00 00 Time Pattern PRG 22 17 1 2 3 4 5 PRG 22 11 01 1 2 3 2 1 PRG 22 11 02 100 incoming 101 incoming 102 incoming 101 incoming 100 incoming Program 22 11 01 and Program 22 11 02 Table No Receive Dial Transfer Dial 1 No setting 100 2 No setting 101 3 No setting 102 Program 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Ti...

Page 362: ...00 0 DID Call by Day of Week Schedule DID Call by weekly schedule allows for 500 programmed DID Conversion table entries Program 22 17 01 and Program 22 17 05 that can be routed based on Day of Week Patterns Each DID Conversion table has a maximum of eight programmable Time Patterns and Day of Week Pattern can reference one of the 4000 different Dial In Conversion table entries in Program 22 11 01...

Page 363: ... 08 00 4 Ext 300 Mon Fri 1 On 734 2 08 00 17 00 1 Ext 101 734 3 17 00 00 00 4 Ext 300 Example 2 Saturday Program 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern 02 Start Time 03 End Time 04 PRG 22 11 05 Day 2 734 1 00 00 09 00 4 Ext 300 Sat 1 On 734 2 09 00 13 00 2 Ext 102 734 3 13 00 15 00 3 Ext 103 734 4 15 00 00 00 4 Ext 300 Example 3 Sunday Program 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern 02 Start Ti...

Page 364: ...cuit for analog trunk DTMF reception type 0 or 2 There must be an available receiver for each DTMF DID trunk Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers In light traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Circuit Resource...

Page 365: ...he destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 23 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Display the Reason for Transfer Select whether or not an extension should display the reason a ...

Page 366: ...Group 1 calls 22 09 01 DID Basic Data Setup Expected Number of Digits For each DID Translation Table 1 20 enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the CO eight maximum For example for a table used with 3 digit DID service enter 3 1 8 4 22 09 02 DID Basic Data Setup Received Vacant Number Operation Enable Disable Vacant Number Intercept 0 Disconnect 1 Transfer 0 22 10 01 DID Tra...

Page 367: ...ernal Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 201 264 Extension Group 400 Valid Extension Number 401 DISA 501 599 DISA VRS Message 1000 1999 Speed Dial Number 000 999 0 22 11 06 DID Translation Table Number Conversion Transfer Destination Number 2 400 Allows the outside party to dial a different extension number in the translation table for example ring no answer to a dialed number the caller then...

Page 368: ...11 06 DID Translation Number Conversion Transfer Destination Number 2 are set the priority of transferring is in this order Program 22 11 05 then Program 22 11 06 then if Program 22 11 11 is enabled Program 22 12 01 0 Disable Caller hears Ringback 1 Enable Go to normal ring 1 22 12 01 DID Intercept Ring Group For each DID Translation Table program the DID Intercept destination The destination can ...

Page 369: ...he DISA and DID Operating Mode you make an entry for each Night Service mode Ring Groups 1 100 Trunk Ports 001 400 Day Night Mode 1 8 0 Disconnect 1 100 Incoming Ring Group 101 DSPDB VM 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 104 Speed Dial Bin table Program 25 15 01 0 25 04 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy For each trunk port 001 400 set the operating mode ...

Page 370: ...A No Answer Time A VRS DISA caller can ring an extension for this time before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer After this time expires the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing set in Program 25 03 and Program 25 04 0 64800 seconds 0 25 07 04 System Timers for VRS DISA Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set Set the answering waiting time of the automatic answeri...

Page 371: ...et the trunks signaling type 0 DP 1 DTMF 2 MF 1 Direct Call by Time Schedule Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 11 10 35 Service Code Setup for Administrator Dial In Mode Switching Assign the service code Dial In Mode Switching MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 12 04 01 Holiday Night Service Switching Define a yearly schedule of holiday night switch settings Th...

Page 372: ... Setup for Time Pattern Received Dial Define the received numbers for each Dial In Conversion Table Program 22 17 02 22 17 03 and 22 17 04 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 22 17 02 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Start of Time Define the Starting Time for each DID Translation table in Program 22 17 01 0000 2359 Time 0000 22 17 03 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time ...

Page 373: ...al the Dial In Mode Switching Service Code Default Not assigned OR Press the Dial In Mode Switching Programmable Function key Program 15 07 01 88 or SC 851 Key Code 88 3 Dial 1 100 500 table number 4 Dial the Time Pattern 1 8 LED Flash Patterns Time Pattern LED Appearance Pattern 1 Off Pattern 2 On Pattern 3 Slow Flash Pattern 4 Fast Flash Patterns 5 8 Off ...

Page 374: ...the call as follows 1 The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in Program 22 08 2 If there is no 22 08 assignment the call rings according to the Ring Group assignments in Program 22 04 and Program 22 05 3 If none of the destinations in steps 1 2 above are available the call continues to ring until a destination becomes free The DIL follows call forwarding programming even to voice mail W...

Page 375: ...DID DIL ISDN trunks or from the VRS can display the reason a call is being transferred Call Forward Busy No Answer or DND Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Forwarding Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Department Calling Do Not Disturb Group Call Pickup Name Storing Off Hook Signaling Pagin...

Page 376: ...e Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not y...

Page 377: ...estination extension number for each DIL for each Night Service mode The destination can be an extension port virtual extension number or Department Group pilot number as assigned in Program 11 07 01 For this selection to work set Program 22 02 01 to 4 DIL Day Night Modes 1 8 Extension Number maximum of eight digits Pilot Number No Setting 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination For each DIL with d...

Page 378: ...Direct Inward Line 1 Lift the handset 2 At the multiline terminal press the line key for DIL OR Dial 9 and the DIL trunk number e g 005 OR Dial 804 and the DIL trunk group number e g 05 OR Dial 9 for Trunk Group Access 3 Dial the number ...

Page 379: ...lows you to control the ability of the DISA callers dialing into your system When a DISA caller first accesses the system they can be prompted to enter a DISA password before proceeding The system associates the password entered with a specific user number which in turn has a Class of Service If the Class of Service allows the action such as making outgoing trunk calls the call goes through If the...

Page 380: ...s the call DISA Operating Modes The DISA Operating Modes determine what happens when a DISA caller forgets to dial calls a busy or unanswered extension or dials incorrectly The system can either drop the call or send it to a preset Ring Group called the DISA Transfer Destination Department Calling with Overflow Message If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group the system can periodica...

Page 381: ... RS 464 DISA trunks must be ground start or supervised loop start The Continue Disconnect code must be DTMF With an analog trunk the Continue Disconnect code may work using DTMF sounds from the opposite side trunk With an ISDN trunk Program 14 01 25 must be enabled to detect the Continue Disconnect code The Continue Disconnect code is not accepted while dialing a trunk Continue Disconnect codes do...

Page 382: ... trunk access code must be put into the speed dial bin Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals Remote Analog DTMF 2500 type telephones Required Component s InMail for Announcements Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Central Office Calls Answering Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Long Conversation Cutoff Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference Transfer Vo...

Page 383: ...se them 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 144 0 Common When GPZ BS10 is installed 81 144 are available 11 01 01 System Numbering Define the system numbering plan 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code 2nd Trunk Route Access Code Assign the Service Code set up in Program 11 01 for 2nd Alternate Trunk Route Access D...

Page 384: ... Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringin...

Page 385: ...le Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system Internal Paging 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 14 07 Class of Service Options for DISA E M External Paging Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system External Paging 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 14 08 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Direct Trunk Access Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ...

Page 386: ...e 1 8 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow Set the ringing in Program 22 06 Maximum of eight digits Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ...

Page 387: ... Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 104 Speed Dial Bin table Program 25 15 01 0 25 04 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy Set the operating mode of each DISA trunk This sets what happens to the call when the DISA caller calls a busy or unanswered extension The call can either Disconnect 0 or transfer to an alternate ring group destination In Skin External Voice Mail or Centralized V...

Page 388: ...05 Dial the other extension 106 Record VRS 0 25 06 02 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Destination Number Set up single digit dialing for Automated Attendant callers For each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls specify The digit the Automated Attendant caller dials 1 12 where 10 0 11 and 12 Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits three and four outside callers cann...

Page 389: ...e by the ACI after which an incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected 0 64800 seconds 10 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the time a DISA caller or any automatically transferred trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 3600 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Convers...

Page 390: ...Day Night Mode 1 8 Function Class 1 15 1 25 10 01 Trunk Group Routing for DISA Assign the Trunk Group Route chosen when a user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9 Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14 06 Enable or disable DISA caller ability to dial 9 in Program 20 14 02 Assign a route to each DISA Class of Service 1 15 The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the pas...

Page 391: ...to use the continue disconnect code 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 0 20 28 01 Trunkto TrunkConversation Conversation Continue Code When Program 14 01 25 is enabled determine the 1 digit code the user should dial 0 9 to extend the conversation for the time defined in Program 20 28 03 If the Continue and Disconnect codes are programmed the same e g the system follows the Continue operation Using the Cont...

Page 392: ...me expires One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk or leased line This applies to manually transferred Tandem Trunk and DISA calls 0 64800 seconds 1800 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect Trunk to Trunk Determine the time a conversation continues after the time in Program 24 02 07 expires If this option is set to 0 the conversation is disconnected immediately This program has no...

Page 393: ...from any 2500 type telephone 1 Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk 2 Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone 3 Dial the 6 digit DISA password access code 4 Wait for a second unique dial tone 5 Dial an extension OR Dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS OR Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code if enabled OR Dial 804 a trunk group number 1 100 for an o...

Page 394: ... be forwarded 7 Dial 1 to set Call Forwarding or 0 to cancel Call Forwarding 8 Dial the extension number to which the calls will be forwarded To use the Continue code to extend a DISA call 1 An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After the programmed time Program 25 07 07 a warning tone is heard and the user dials the Continu...

Page 395: ...additional associated digits after the Service Code For example storing 70401 under a DSS Console key accesses Trunk Group 1 when the console user presses the key The maximum number of consoles allowed per system is 32 If a Digital Port Connection is used one telephone can support a maximum of 32 DSS Consoles If connected to an IP phone as a side option a maximum of one DSS Console is supported pe...

Page 396: ... the functions of many of the Programmable Function keys The stored service code can have up to three digits but it can have additional option codes added e g to set Immediate Call Forward for all calls Trunk Group 02 Virtual Extension 03 and Call Appearance CAP Key 08 codes can not be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the additional data required The capacity of a ...

Page 397: ...DSS Console for an extension is a Red LED Default Settings No DSS Consoles assigned in Program 30 02 01 All DSS Console key ranges are ports 1 200 Once a DSS Console is enabled the console keys are DSS keys Program 30 03 01 System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None ...

Page 398: ...confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10 DSS Console 11 Not Used 0 15 02 08 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Handsfree Set to 1 for a DSS Console to have one touch operation If set to 0 the user must lift the handset before pressing a DSS key for the ...

Page 399: ...ignment Extension Number Enter the extension number for the multiline terminal connected with the DSS console up to eight digits Maximum of eight digits No Setting 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment Customize DSS Console keys to function as DSS keys Service Code keys Programmable Function Keys and One Touch Calling keys The key when defined as a DSS One Touch key code 01 can have any function up ...

Page 400: ...hotel status code 1 on the DSS consoles 0 7 7 On 30 05 10 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 2 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 2 on the DSS consoles 0 7 1 FL 30 05 11 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 3 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 3 on the DSS consoles 0 7 2 WK 30 05 12 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 4 Hotel DSS Define the ...

Page 401: ...erns for hotel status code on the DSS consoles 0 7 5 IL 30 05 21 DSS Console Lamp Table VM Message Indication Define the LED patterns for VM message indications on the DSS consoles 0 7 3 RW 30 10 01 DSS Console IP Terminal Setup MAC Address Read Only program that displays the MAC address of the IP terminal associated with a DSS console 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 Operatio...

Page 402: ...set to make your announcement External Page Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is On Off The External Page zone is Busy Idle Making an Internal Page using your DSS Console 1 Press the DSS Console Internal Page zone key Group key 1 64 If the zone you want is busy try again later If you do not have Handsfree lift the handset to make your announcement Internal Page Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is O...

Page 403: ... be used for Direct Station Selection Trunk Calling Personal Speed Dial Speed Dialing and Service Code access The stored service code cannot be longer than three digits 1 Press the DSS Console key for function For example you can forward your calls by pressing DSS key 1 destination Your DSS key must have been previously programmed for Call Forward ...

Page 404: ...et the DSS and Hotline key flash rates for busy idle DND Agent status and hotel options Conditions Single line telephone users cannot listen to or hear the pitch of the telephone incoming ring If Program 22 03 01 is set to 0 3 or 9 12 and Program 15 02 02 is set to 1 3 trunk calls follow the ring pattern in Program 22 03 01 and the pitch in Program 15 02 02 If Program 22 03 01 is set to 4 8 and Pr...

Page 405: ... Tone Patterns Program 15 08 is only effective for Virtual Extensions appearing on a station when the station is set for patterns 1 3 in Program 15 02 02 When Program 15 02 02 for the station is set to patterns 4 8 Program 15 08 for Virtual Extensions is not used ...

Page 406: ...406 Trunk Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart ...

Page 407: ...407 ICM Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart ...

Page 408: ...t 15 02 02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Trunk Ring Tone From the range specified in Program 22 03 01 select the multiline terminal extension trunk ring tone 1 High 2 Medium 3 Low 4 Ring Tone 1 5 Ring Tone 2 6 Ring Tone 3 7 Ring Tone 4 8 Ring Tone 5 2 15 02 03 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Extension Ring Tone Select the extension intercom ring tone 1 High 2 Medium 3 Low 4 Ring Tone 1...

Page 409: ...cle Select the cycle method that the Large LED flashes when the extension has a VM Message Waiting set to the extension 1 Cycle 1 2 Cycle 2 3 Cycle 3 4 Cycle 4 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 3 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Assign a ring tone range 0 8 to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key Program 15 07 ICM Tone Pattern 0 Pattern 1 1 Pattern 2 2 Pat...

Page 410: ...e for DID DISA VRS Calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 8 20 15 05 Ring Cycle Setup DID DDI Define the ringing cycle for DID DDI calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 8 20 15 06 Ring Cycle Setup Dial In in the E M Tie Line Define the ringing cycle for Dial In and E M Tie Line calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 12 20 15 07 Ring Cycle Setup Door Box Ringing for SLT Define the ringing cycle for Door Box ringing for single line telepho...

Page 411: ...g these settings the chassis must be reset for the changes to take effect Call Screening Call Holding Busy Greeting Await Answer Transfer 1 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 33 Default Time Slot Refer to Table 2 17 Basic Tone Table Tone 06 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number Refer to Table 2 14 The following features require that the system 18 Basic Tone tones listed below be changed to ...

Page 412: ... Unit Basic Tone Duration Gain Level 1 10 440 480Hz 13 13dB 1000ms 32 2 0 No Tone 2100ms 32 3 0 No Tone 0ms 4 0 No Tone 0ms 5 0 No Tone 0ms 6 0 No Tone 0ms 7 0 No Tone 0ms 8 0 No Tone 0ms Basic Tone Table Tone 39 Tone 39 Unit Basic Tone Duration Gain Level 1 12 440 620Hz 16dB 500ms 32 2 0 No Tone 500ms 32 3 0 No Tone 0ms 4 0 No Tone 0ms 5 0 No Tone 0ms Basic Tone Table Tone 39 Continued Tone 39 Co...

Page 413: ...ou want to check 1 8 OR For trunk calls select the pitch 1 8 and the tone 1 4 you want to check 5 Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up To change the pitch of your incoming ring multiline terminal only 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 820 3 Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls OR Dial 2 to change ringing for trunk calls 4 Select the pitch 1 8 5 Press Speaker to...

Page 414: ... Specifications Contact Configuration Normally Open Maximum Load 60mA 30 VDC 10mA 90 VDC Maximum Initial Contact Resistance 50m Ohms The system can have up to eight Door Boxes Six chime tones are available Conditions The Door Box Feature Requires a PGD 2 U10 ADP A maximum of 56 PGD 2 U10 ADP units can be installed in an UNIVERGE SV9100 system Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for...

Page 415: ...rogram 15 07 851 62 The door strike relay can be activated from the recall key on a multiline phone The door strike cannot be activated when a door box is forwarded off premise Internal calls to or from a door phone are not included in the SMDR output Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s PGD 2 U10 ADP Related Features ISDN Compatibility Paging ...

Page 416: ...no device plugged into that port then plug the device in and the system should recognize it as a door box and then set Program 10 03 06 0 Not set 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP Tone Ringer 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP Door Box 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI 12 APR B2 Mode 0 11 12 36 Service Code Access for Service Access Door Box Access If the service code for Doorphone Access is not acceptable change it here MLT...

Page 417: ...ntering the extension number Each Door Box can be programmed to ring up to 32 extensions and an extension can be programmed to ring for multiple Door Boxes Maximum of eight digits No Setting 32 03 01 Door Box Basic Setup Chime Pattern 0 None Door Box 1 1 Set the chime pattern 0 6 for each Door 1 Door Box Ring 1 Door Box 2 2 Box 2 Door Box Ring 2 Door Box 3 3 3 Door Box Ring 3 4 Door Box Ring 4 Doo...

Page 418: ...hile talking to the Door Box hookflash To answer a Door Box chime 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker To Answer a Door Box call while busy on another call Multiline Terminal If you are busy on a call the display shows the incoming Door Box call and the large LED flashes 1 Press Hold to place your active call on hold 2 When you hear dial tone dial the door box access code 802 by default plus the do...

Page 419: ... 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker dial SC 822 OR At the multiline terminal only press the External Forward by Doorphone key Program 15 07 01 or SC 851 code 54 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset dial 822 2 Dial the Door Box number 1 4 3 Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded 4 Press Speaker or hang up at the single line telephone to hang up To cance...

Page 420: ...FER Conditions Do Not Disturb access code is programmable via Program 11 11 08 If there is no Call Forwarding key Program 15 07 10 17 the DND key blinks when the extension is forwarded Call Arrival CAR Key Virtual Extension VE do not support DND Programmable Function keys Multiline terminal users can activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while on a call This option is not available for single line...

Page 421: ...D and any Call Forwarding is set the call forwards immediately DND settings are not saved in a PC Pro database If the terminal is configured for Call Forward Both Ring and DND is activated the calling station will receive a DND tone Call Forward Both Ring is not followed When a call is ringing on an extension and Do Not Disturb DND is set the DND can be enforced immediately or on the next call bas...

Page 422: ...06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 13 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service DND Active While Ringing Assign when the DND will be enforced set at same time a call is ringing or for next call 0 Immediate 1 Next COS 1 15 0...

Page 423: ... Terminal Using Feature Key or Access Code 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the DND feature key programmed in Program15 07 01 or SC 851 03 OR Press Speaker and dial 847 3 Dial the DND option code 0 Cancel DND 1 Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked 2 Paging incoming Intercom Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked 3 All Calls Blocked 4 Call Forwards Blocked Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the hands...

Page 424: ...used to provide a hookflash to the PBX or Central Office A single line telephone user can use the Drop Key function with an access code Conditions The Drop Key provides a timed disconnect signal on CO PBX lines The Drop Key cannot be used for internal DID or Tie line calls Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Flash PBX Compati...

Page 425: ...n Loop Flash 0 0 14 02 04 Analog Trunk Data Setup Hooking Type Use Flash for Timed Flash Program 81 01 14 or Disconnect Program 81 01 15 A user can press the FLASH key while on a trunk call to implement Flash 0 Timed Flash Hooking 1 Disconnect Cut 0 15 02 05 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Transfer Key Operation Mode If the Conf key should access Flash enter 2 Otherwise enter 0 or 1 0 Transfe...

Page 426: ...2 1 5 seconds 13 2 0 seconds 14 3 0 seconds 15 5 0 seconds 9 600ms 81 10 08 COI Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time Selection 2 Set the open loop disconnect duration 20ms 5 0 sec for analog trunk COI U ETU circuits 0 20ms 1 40ms 2 60ms 3 80ms 4 100ms 5 140ms 6 160ms 7 200ms 8 400ms 9 600ms 10 800ms 11 1 0 seconds 12 1 5 seconds 13 2 0 seconds 14 3 0 seconds 15 5 0 seconds 14 3 0 seconds Operation To...

Page 427: ...number To use the Drop Key feature from a single line telephone with a CO PBX call in progress 1 Hookflash 2 Receive internal dial tone 3 Dial the Service Code Program 11 12 59 default not assigned 4 Receive the new CO PBX dial tone 5 Dial the desired number ...

Page 428: ... time This feature is programmed on a per station basis and is NOT enabled by default When a terminal is in the Power Cut off Power Failure mode a user cannot dial any number including an emergency number i e 911 from the station The terminal is unusable until it returns from the power cutoff state Conditions Power Cut Off Mode While in power cut off mode power does not automatically recover If th...

Page 429: ...is on a call the call is not lost If the user places the caller on hold or park the user s phone then switches to Power Cut Off mode and the call is lost If the Power Cut Off mode is manually set to On during a scheduled power Off time power cut remains in the On state until the next power cut off time or until the Power Cut Off mode is manually set to Off Power Saving Mode If the Multiline Termin...

Page 430: ...patterns are used in Programs 12 03 and 12 04 The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings This option defines the start time 0000 2359 12 02 02 Automatic Night Service Patterns End Time Defines the daily pattern of the automatic mode switching Each mode group has 10 patterns These patterns are used in Programs 12 03 and 12 04 The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings This option defines ...

Page 431: ... 0 Normal Mode 1 Power Saving Mode Eco Mode 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key as a Power Saving key code 6 01 16 Power Saving Group Number 00 All Groups Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 15 27 02 Power Save Setup Power Off When Power Failure Assign power cut or no power cut for each extension ...

Page 432: ...ht time 19 00 6 00 Program Program 20 53 01 Power Save Group 2 Set 1 for Night mode Service Group Number Program 20 53 01 Power Save Group 3 Set 1 for Night mode Service Group Number Program 20 54 01 Power Save Group 2 Night Mode 1 Power Saving Mode 1 Power Supply Night Mode 2 Power Saving Mode 0 Power cut Program 20 54 01 Power Save Group 3 Night Mode 1 Power Save Mode 1 Power Supply Night Mode 2...

Page 433: ...vice Code 731 2 Dial 02 Group 2 3 Dial 1 Power Off 4 Enter the Password Default 0000 Power supply to the system is cut when all terminals of Power Save group 2 are in an Idle state Password is set in Program 90 02 02 User ID3 5 Press Speaker to set Power Off for Power Save Group 2 Power On for Power Save Group 2 1 Press Speaker and dial Service Code 731 2 Dial 02 Group 2 3 Dial 0 Power On 4 Press ...

Page 434: ...Entire Group 3 Dial 0 Power On 4 Press Speaker to set Power On for Entire Power Save Group Settings Using Function Keys Power Off for Power Save Group 2 1 Assign Power Save key SC851 code 06 with additional data 02 2 Press the Power Save key 3 Enter the Password set in Program 90 02 02 User ID3 4 The key turns red Power On for Power Save Group 2 1 Assign Power Save key SC851 code 06 with additiona...

Page 435: ...te 1 Idle state at TEL200 2 One minute later LED areas highlighted in red darken at TEL200 Multiline Terminal Darkens Power Failure Saving Mode Set Program 15 27 02 to 1 for extensions to have the power cut when the system losses power and runs on battery backup Example Program Program 15 27 02 TEL 101 set to a 1 TEL 102 set to a 1 TEL 103 set to a 0 TEL 104 set to a 0 TEL 101 TEL 102 will be powe...

Page 436: ...ame and number display optionally accompanied by an audible alarm Notification occurs regardless of whether the attendant is idle or busy on a call You can optionally extend this ability to other supervisory extensions as well Emergency Routing When an extension user dials 911 the system can automatically find a trunk for the call The system can choose a route to which the user normally does not h...

Page 437: ...r a line key is pressed to place the call Conditions If Program 21 01 10 is programmed with an entry other than 0 a call does not have a talk path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an outgoing call This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem when dialing 911 Since it is only a 3 digit number the call does not have a...

Page 438: ...ssigned None Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned None Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 The CPN provided is from the servic...

Page 439: ...ssigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned None Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned As...

Page 440: ...gned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 The CPN provided is from the service provider ...

Page 441: ...1 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned None Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 13 01 Terminal Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 Terminal Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 13 01 Terminal Assigned Assigned ...

Page 442: ...442 CCIS Standard Calls ...

Page 443: ... SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not ...

Page 444: ...3 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01...

Page 445: ...e On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 ...

Page 446: ... 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA...

Page 447: ...447 CCIS VE Standard Calls ...

Page 448: ...ff None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB...

Page 449: ...ned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned ...

Page 450: ...VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA...

Page 451: ... On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned ...

Page 452: ...VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA...

Page 453: ... On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned ...

Page 454: ...1 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Not Assigned On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 0...

Page 455: ...igned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 ...

Page 456: ...456 CPN sent when making a 911 call across CCIS trunks from a terminal ...

Page 457: ...13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Of Not Assigned Off 21 13 01...

Page 458: ...3 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01...

Page 459: ...3 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01...

Page 460: ...21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA ...

Page 461: ...461 CCIS VE 911 Calls ...

Page 462: ...gned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Ass...

Page 463: ... On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned ...

Page 464: ...VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None On None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA...

Page 465: ... On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA Assigned ...

Page 466: ...Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Not Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal As...

Page 467: ...01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA termin...

Page 468: ... Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off N...

Page 469: ...ed Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal On Not Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off Not Assi...

Page 470: ...signed Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned None Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 The CPN provided is from the service provider Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals None Required Component s None Related Features A...

Page 471: ...tbound trunks you want to use for E911 service to the same Trunk Group Trunk Port 1 400 Priority 1 400 Default Trunks 1 400 assigned to trunk group 1 with priorities equal to the trunk number Trunk 1 Priority 1 Trunk 400 Priority 400 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing Priority Order Number Set the priority order number 1 4 0 Not Set 001 100 Trunk group No 101 150 100 Networking System No 1001 1100 1000 ...

Page 472: ...cess Code Not Required 1 21 01 13 System Options for Outgoing Calls Alarm Ring Timer E911 Set the duration of the E911 Alarm Ring Time If set to 0 the E911 Alarm does not ring 0 64800 seconds 0 21 02 01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Assign the routes set in Program 14 06 to extensions This program and Program 14 06 are the minimum required if E911 must seize a line to dial 1 100 Trunk Groups ...

Page 473: ...oth Program 21 12 and Program 21 13 the system sends the data in Program 21 13 0 9 Maximum of 16 digits All Trunks No Setting 21 13 01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Assign each extension a Calling Party Number maximum 16 digits per entry The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial in number When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Nu...

Page 474: ... E911 Alarm at your telephone 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 886 The alarm goes off OR if you have a display telephone 1 Press the Exit key once to turn off the alarm 2 Press the Exit key again to clear the alarm display ...

Page 475: ...programmed The systems cannot distinguish between an incoming facsimile call and a CO PBX call Incoming call may be automatically answered by FAX Machine Ringing assignments should be turned off for fax lines When the facsimile is used the associated CO line key indicates Busy LED on a multiline terminal When the facsimile is not used the FAX Branch CO PBX line can be used as an outside line Code ...

Page 476: ...unk 0 Loop Start Loop 1 Ground Start Ground 0 14 02 21 FAX Branch Connection Set CO for Fax Branch Connection If FAX Branch is selected Program 14 10 Power Failure Telephone Setting is NOT valid 0 No 1 Yes 0 14 05 01 Trunk Group Assign trunks to trunk groups 1 100 Trunk Port 1 400 Priority 1 400 Default Trunks 1 400 assigned to trunk group 1 with priorities equal to the trunk number Trunk 1 Priori...

Page 477: ...oming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment To have the trunks ring extensions assign trunks to a Ring Group The incoming ring group assignment programmed in Program 41 03 01 overrides the setting in this program Trunks 1 400 Incoming Group Number for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Sk...

Page 478: ... whatever features the connected Telco or PBX offers You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected Telco or PBX Conditions The system does not provide a ground flash A Flash Recall key can be placed on a line key Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Drop Key PBX Compatibility InMail ...

Page 479: ...elect Timed Flash or open loop Disconnect 0 Timed Flash Hooking 1 Disconnect Cut 0 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup For each trunk indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX 0 Stand Alone Trunk 1 Behind PBX PBX 2 Not Used 3 CTX assume 9 0 15 02 05 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Transfer Key Operation Mode For the Cordless Lite Cordless Lite II telephone user to use the flash function this opti...

Page 480: ...onds 13 2 0 seconds 14 3 0 seconds 15 5 0 seconds 9 600ms 81 10 08 COT Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time Selection 2 Set the open loop disconnect duration 16 4080ms for analog trunk GCD 4COTA circuits Program 81 10 08 0 20ms 1 40ms 2 60ms 3 80ms 4 100ms 5 140ms 6 160ms 7 200ms 8 400ms 9 600ms 10 800ms 11 1 0 seconds 12 1 5 seconds 13 2 0 seconds 14 3 0 seconds 15 5 0 seconds 14 3 0 seconds Operati...

Page 481: ...le for most applications you can alter the code if needed The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan Flexible System Numbering Program Description 11 01 01 System Numbering Set the system internal Intercom numbering plan The numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must dial to access features and other extensions 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Assign the single digit ...

Page 482: ... line key programming does not follow However if you move the extension using the Station Relocation Feature the line key programming does follow Since making changes in Program 11 01 does not automatically make any other changes in any other program changing the number plan after the system is in operation may cause problems in the following programs Program 11 01 Type 2 Extension Number Program ...

Page 483: ...l Extension Analyze Table 11 01 01 Dial 3 31 Digit 7 9 Dial Extension Analyze Table 11 20 01 Table 1 Dial 31000 11 20 01 Table 1 Dial 310000 11 20 02 Table 1 Intercom 11 20 02 Table 1 Intercom Default Settings Extensions and Virtuals are numbered in the following order Program 11 02 01 and Program 11 04 01 Physical Extensions Extn Port 1 101 Extn Port 99 199 Extn Port 100 3101 Extn Port 199 3200 E...

Page 484: ...ght digits 1 99 101 199 100 199 3101 3200 200 960 3201 3961 11 04 01 Virtual Extension Numbering Assign virtual extension numbers Maximum of eight digits Virtual Extension Port No 1 99 Virtual Extension Number 201 299 Other Virtual Extension Port No Setting 11 06 01 ACI Extension Numbering Define the virtual extension number to be used for the ACI extension numbering Maximum of eight digits ACI Po...

Page 485: ...aximum of eight digits 881 11 10 03 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Setting the System Time Customize the system time Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 828 11 10 04 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Storing Common Speed Dialing Numbers Store common speed dialing Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits...

Page 486: ...ce Codes for the System Administrator MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 822 11 10 20 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS Record Erase Message Customize the night mode switching Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 716 11 10 21 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS General Message Playback Customize the VRS general message playback for t...

Page 487: ... Administrator Entry Caller ID Refuse Customize the entry caller ID Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 11 10 34 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Set Caller ID Refuse Customize the set caller ID refuse Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 11 10 35 Service Code Setup for System Administ...

Page 488: ...LT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 847 11 11 09 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Answer Message Waiting Customize the answer message waiting used for registration and setup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 841 11 11 10 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Cancel All Messages Waiting Cancel all messages waiting used for registration and setup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digi...

Page 489: ... Entry Operation Key Touch Tone On Off Customize the key touch tone Off On used for registration and setup MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 824 11 11 20 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones Customize the change incoming CO and ICM ring tones used for registration and setup MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 820 11 11 21 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry O...

Page 490: ...ansfer for every extension group used for registration and setup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 705 11 11 29 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group Customize the delayed transfer cancellation for each extension group used for registration and setup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 706 11 11 30 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry O...

Page 491: ...n speed dial entry used for registration and setup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 855 11 11 41 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Tandem Ringing Customize the tandem ringing used for registration and setup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 744 11 11 43 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Headset Mode Switching Customize the headset mode switching used for registration and...

Page 492: ... Destination No Split Assign the Call Forward All for any Extension Service Code MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 791 11 11 53 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination No Split Assign the Call Forward Busy for any Extension Service Code MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 792 11 11 54 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forwa...

Page 493: ...cancelling Camp On MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 870 11 12 06 Service Code Setup for Service Access Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call Customize the switching of voice call and signal call used for service access MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 812 11 12 07 Service Code Setup for Service Access Step Call Customize the step call used for service access MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight di...

Page 494: ...p for Service Access Clear Last Number Dialing Data Assign a service code to clear the Last Number Dial MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 876 11 12 18 Service Code Setup for Service Access Clear Saved Number Dialing Data Define the service code for Clear Save Number Dialing List if it is not acceptable MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 885 11 12 19 Service Code Setup for Service Access Interna...

Page 495: ...ss Call Pickup Customize the Service Codes for call pickup which are used for service access MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 867 11 12 28 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Another Group Customize the Service Codes for call pickup for another group which are used for service access MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 869 11 12 29 Service Code Setup for Service Access Direct ...

Page 496: ...ice Codes used for common canceling service code access MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 720 11 12 38 Service Code Setup for Service Access General Purpose Indication Customize the Service Codes used for general purpose indication access MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 883 11 12 40 Service Code Setup for Service Access Station Speed Dialing Customize the station speed access Service Codes MLT 0...

Page 497: ...ng the general purpose relay on and off MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 880 11 12 51 Service Code Setup for Service Access VM Access SV9100 InMail and VMS Customize the Service Codes used for the VM access InMail and VMS MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 717 11 12 52 Service Code Setup for Service Access Live Monitoring SV9100 InMail Define access code used for InMail Live Monitoring VRS At ...

Page 498: ... 02 Service Code Setup for Log Out for SLT Assign for single line telephones SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 755 11 13 03 Service Code Setup for Set Wrap Up Time for SLT Assign for single line telephones SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 756 11 13 04 Service Code Setup for Cancel Assign for single line telephones SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 757 11 13 05 Service Code Setup for Set Off Duty for SL...

Page 499: ...m of eight digits 728 11 14 03 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set DND for Other Extension Customize the set DND for other extension used with the Hotel Motel feature MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 729 11 14 04 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel DND for Other Extension Customize the cancel DND for other extension used with the Hotel Motel feature MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 730 11 14 05...

Page 500: ...um of eight digits 739 11 14 14 Service Code Setup for Hotel Room Status Change for Own Extension Customize the room status change for own extension Service Codes used with the Hotel Motel feature MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 740 11 14 15 Service Code Setup for Hotel Room Status Change for Other Extension Customize the room status change for other extension Service Codes used with the Hotel...

Page 501: ...o APSU Unit Customize the wake on LAN to APSU unit Service Codes MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 11 15 09 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Transfer to Incoming Ring Group When a call is transferred using this service code it is transferred to the ring group destination for that incoming trunk For example trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4 When the call is transferred using t...

Page 502: ... Single Digit Service Code Setup Intercom Off Hook Signaling Assign a one digit service code to be used for off hook Signaling 0 9 Maximum of one digit 11 16 05 Single Digit Service Code Setup Camp On Customize the 1 digit Service Code used for setting Camp On 0 9 Maximum of one digit 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND Call Forward Override Bypass Customize the 1 digit Service Code used ...

Page 503: ...s 01 128 to assign the digits to be dialed using the Dial Extension Analyze Tables These tables are used when Program 11 01 01 is set to option 9 Dial Extension Analyze Up to eight digits can be assigned Dial maximum of eight digits 0 9 No Setting 11 20 02 Dial Extension Analyze Table Type of Dials Assign the Type of Dial for the Extension Analyze Table from Program 11 20 01 Type of Dials 0 Not us...

Page 504: ...or Delayed Ringing Program 15 11 01 ring the covering extension after this time Station Timer Class is referred by the station assigned to CAR VE 21 01 02 20 31 04 Intercom Interdigits Time When placing Intercom calls users must dial each digit in this time Station Timer Class is referred by stations Trunk Timer Class is referred by DID Automatic Answer Trunk E M trunks 21 01 03 20 31 05 Trunk Int...

Page 505: ...tion Timer Class is referred by held call 24 02 03 20 31 15 Delayed Call Forwarding Time If activated at an extension No Answer Call Forwarding occurs after this time Station Timer Class is referred by the station sets No Answer Call Forward 24 02 04 20 31 16 Transfer Recall Time A transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this time Station Timer Class is referr...

Page 506: ...f External Page announcements Station or Trunk Timer Class is referred by the caller makes announcement Conditions Timer Classes are also used for CAR VE When Timer Class is set to 0 it uses the system wide timers All stations and trunks are assigned to Timer Class 0 at default Both system wide timers Timer Class 0 and Timer Class timers Timer Class 1 15 can be used in the same system Default Sett...

Page 507: ...9 01 Timer Class for Extensions Assign the timer class 0 15 to each extension for each Night mode This entry includes virtual extension number 0 15 0 Not assigned 0 20 30 01 Timer Class for Trunks Assign the timer class 0 15 to each trunk for each Night mode 0 15 0 Not assigned 0 20 31 01 Timer Class Timer Assignment Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension fo...

Page 508: ...s 60 20 31 08 Timer Class Timer Assignment DIL Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group set in Program 22 08 0 64800 seconds 0 20 31 09 Timer Class Timer Assignment DID Ring No Answer Time In systems with DID Ring No Answer Intercept this time sets the Ring No Answer time This is the time a DID call...

Page 509: ...er Assignment Transfer Recall Time An unanswered transferred call recalls after this time to the extension that initially transferred it 0 64800 seconds 30 20 31 17 Timer Class Timer Assignment VRS DISA No Answer Time Disconnect or IRG or VM A VRS DISA caller can ring an extension for this time before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer After this time expires the call follows the program...

Page 510: ...ercept programming 0 64800 seconds 10 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External Program the time an extension user must wait before the Barge In feature can be used on a call this time expires before a call is put in a talk state This time also affects Voice Over 0 64800 seconds 5 21 01 09 System Options for Outgoing Calls Ringdown Extension Timer Hotline Start Afte...

Page 511: ...Hold after this time 0 64800 seconds 90 24 01 04 System Options for Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time Set the Hold Recall Time A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension for this time If still unanswered the call changes to System Hold 0 64800 seconds 30 24 01 06 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time Normal Set the Park Hold Time 0 64800 seconds A call that is parked longer than the pr...

Page 512: ...onversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 3600 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Disconnect Time Determine the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 10 25 07 09 System Timers for VRS DISA DISA Internal Paging Time Set the maximum time for ...

Page 513: ...se a trunk on which there is no conversation This can happen if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the line Only use this feature in an emergency and when no other lines are available Conditions This feature only works on an analog trunk ISDN and IP trunks do not have the Forced Trunk Disconnect availa...

Page 514: ...e in progress 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 21 01 18 System Options for Outgoing Calls Reset Dial After Failure of Trunk Access Enable Disable an extension user ability to continue to dial codes or extensions after receiving Trunk Busy This must be Enabled for this feature to work 0 Enable On 1 Disable Off 1 Operation To disconnect a busy trunk Multiline Terminal 1 Press line key for trunk OR Dia...

Page 515: ...515 3 Hookflash You can now place a call on the free line 4 Dial the trunk access code 9 trunk number for the trunk disconnected in Step 2 ...

Page 516: ...itial Contact Resistance 50m Ohms Conditions When relays 5 6 of a PGD 2 U10 are assigned as General Purpose Relays they cannot be used for Door Box Page Relays Therefore it is recommended to first use relays 7 8 for General Purpose Relay function allowing relays 5 6 to be used for Door Box Page Relays All General Purpose Relays can be programmed with a drive timer The drive timer allows the relay ...

Page 517: ...etup Terminal Type B2 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type B2 When using a PGD U10 for general purpose relay functionality the digital port must be set to one of the valid PGD settings 0 Not Set 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP Tone Ringer 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP Door Box 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI 12 APR B2 Mode 0 10 05 01 General Purpose Relay Setup Slot No Physical Port of D...

Page 518: ...0 2 seconds 3 0 3 seconds 64800 6480 seconds 0 11 12 50 Service Code Setup for Service Access General Purpose Relay This is the access code to enable disable the General Purpose relays After dialing the service code the user must then dial the relay 0 8 to enable disable the relays 0 Relay on GCD CP10 1 8 Relay assigned on PGD MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 880 15 07 01 Programmable Function ...

Page 519: ...519 3 Dial Relay Number 0 8 0 is for the relay on the GCD CP10 1 8 are relays on the PGD 2 U10 ADP ...

Page 520: ...re relays on the PGD 2 U10 ADP OR 1 Press the Line Key assigned as a General Purpose Relay the key is not lit OR 1 Wait for the drive timer to expire Single Line Telephone 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 880 3 Dial Relay Number 0 8 0 is for the relay on the GCD CP10 1 8 are relays on the PGD 2 U10 ADP OR 1 Wait for the drive timer to expire ...

Page 521: ...ser knows the group number A call ringing another pickup group when the user does not know the group number There are 64 Call Pickup Groups available Conditions A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name Group Call Pickup can be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park Group Call Pickup can be used to answer calls ringing Call Arrival Keys or Virtual Extensions Virtual Extensions c...

Page 522: ...ts 856 11 12 26 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Specified Group Customize the Service Codes for call pickup for specified group MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 868 11 12 27 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup Customize the Service Codes for call pickup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 867 11 12 28 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Anot...

Page 523: ...ons Answer Service Group Call Pickup Another Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group Service Code 769 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 10 03 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup for Specific Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for a specific group using service code 768 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 10 04 Class of Service Options Answer Service Telephone...

Page 524: ...er 2 At multiline terminal only press the Group Call Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 851 25 OR Dial 869 To answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 At multiline terminal only press the Group Call Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 851 26 group OR Dial 868 and the group number 1 9 or 01 64 ...

Page 525: ... to the conversation Group Listen turns off the multiline terminal handsfree microphone so the caller does not pick the co worker s voices during a Group Listen Conditions An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen Group Listen is not available to single line telephones Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related F...

Page 526: ...0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 Operation To initiate Group Listen 1 Place or answer call using the handset 2 Press Speaker twice but do not hang up Speaker flashes slowly You can talk to the caller through your handset Your co workers hear your caller s voice over your telephone speaker after pressing Speaker twice Press Speaker a third time to turn off Group Listening To talk Handsfree after initiating Gr...

Page 527: ...tion user can still hear the outside or intercom voice Conditions The Mic key or Handset Transmission Cut Off key flashes when active Two service set tones are heard when Handset Mute is activated or deactivated The called party must have answered using handset or speakerphone for the mute feature to work Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Componen...

Page 528: ...one Setup Defaults Program 80 01 01 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number The following features require that the system tones listed below be changed to match the table After changing these settings the system must be reset for the changes to take effect Call Screening Call Holding Busy Greeting Await Answer Transfer 1 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 33 Default Time Slot Refer to Table ...

Page 529: ...0dB 1 1 32 0dB 11 Internal Confirmation Tone 3 Basic 2 0 5 32 0dB 6 1 32 0dB 12 Internal Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 0dB 13 External Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 0dB 14 Intercom Ringback Tone 0 Basic 2 9 10 32 0dB 0 20 32 0dB 15 Override Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 0dB 16 Lock Out Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 32 0dB 6 1 32 0dB 17 Clock Alarm Tone 0 Basic 4 6 1 32 0dB 0 1 32 0dB 6 1 32 0dB 0 7 32 0dB 18 BGM 0 Basic ...

Page 530: ...vice Clear Tone 3 Basic 2 0 1 32 0dB 9 1 32 0dB 27 Talkback Tone 2 Basic 2 0 1 32 0dB 6 1 32 0dB 28 Speaker Monitor Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 0dB This tone is what the originator 6 1 32 0dB hears when placing a handsfree speaker ICM call 29 Door Relay Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 0dB 6 1 32 0dB 30 Door Box Call Tone 1 Basic 2 0 1 32 0dB 6 1 32 0dB 31 Paging Tone 2 Basic 2 0 1 32 0dB 6 1 32 0dB 32 Splash Tone...

Page 531: ... 1 26 3dB 45 External Ring Back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 10 32 0dB 0 30 32 0dB 46 DID Error Tone 0 Basic 2 11 5 32 0dB 0 5 32 0dB 47 External Busy Tone 0 Basic 1 11 0 32 0dB 48 Voice Mail Message Indication 0 Basic 2 9 1 32 0dB Tone 0 1 32 0dB 49 Not Used 50 External Special Audible Ring 0 3 10 10 32 0dB Tone 12 2 32 0dB 0 30 32 0dB 51 External Intercept Tone 0 2 12 3 32 0dB 4 2 32 0dB 52 External Call W...

Page 532: ... Tone 1 Mute 1 Basic 2 0 1 8 12dB 6 1 8 12dB 61 Splash Tone 2 Mute 2 Basic 2 0 1 8 12dB 6 1 8 12dB 62 Splash Tone 3 Mute 3 Basic 2 0 1 8 12dB 6 1 8 12dB 63 EXT SPK Ring back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 10 32 0dB 0 30 32 0dB 64 Music on Hold MOH 0 0 0 0 32 0dB Service Tone Setup Program 80 01 02 Item No Item Repeat Count 02 Basic Tone Number 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 03 Duration Count 0 255 100 255...

Page 533: ...Speaker An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for outgoing calls or for both outgoing calls and incoming calls Monitor User can place a call without lifting the handset but must lift the handset to speak Conditions Handsfree and Monitor are not available for single line telephones Prime Line Selection affects how incoming and outgoing calls are handled and thus determines what happens when the...

Page 534: ...ephones Forced Intercom Ring ICM Call Type Enable Disable Forced Intercom Ringing If enabled incoming Intercom calls normally ring If disabled Intercom calls voice announce 0 Disable Voice 1 Enable Signal 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign Class of Service 1 15 for extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port ...

Page 535: ...o a handset call 1 Lift the handset To turn on off Monitor 1 Press MIC Feature 1 or the Microphone Function Key Program 15 07 or SC 851 02 to turn on or off the Microphone Monitor is off when MIC LED is lit the Microphone Function Key is lit or the handset is lifted ...

Page 536: ... Speaker phone to be enabled Program 15 02 16 A multiline terminal user can process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone instead of the handset With Microphone Cutoff enabled Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep instead of two Incoming Intercom calls always ring single line telephones The extension you are calling must be set to Voice for this feature ...

Page 537: ...all If required change the service code used for toggling an outgoing ICM call between a voice call and signal call MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 812 15 02 16 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Handsfree Operation Enable Disable an extension user ability to use the speakerphone on outside calls When disabled the user can hear the conversion but cannot respond handsfree 0 Disable 1 Enable 1...

Page 538: ...ck or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 Operation To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle Speaker 2 Dial 721 3 Press Speaker to hang up This disables Forced Intercom Ringing To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle Speaker 2 Dial 723 3 Press Speaker to hang up This disables Han...

Page 539: ...8 are not available for the Electra Professional telephones An extension with a headset can receive voice announced Intercom calls and respond handsfree when idle A Headset Function key is required to answer or place a call in headset mode The Electronic Headset Switch EHS is only supported on the ITL DTL 8LD ITL DTL 12 24 and ITL 320C terminals The EHS only functions with the Plantronics CX5xx an...

Page 540: ...t Ring Volume MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 874 11 11 65 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Headset Mode Switching Enable Disable headset mode MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 15 02 41 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Incoming Ring Setup Determine if incoming calls ring the speaker or headset 0 Speaker Normal Ring 1 Headset Ring 0 15 02 42 Multiline Telephone Basic Data S...

Page 541: ...ncoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy 1 0 No 1 Yes 0 20 02 12 System Options for Multiline Telephones Forced Intercom Ring ICM Call Type Determine whether intercom calls should ring or voice announce extensions 0 Disable Voice 1 Enable Signal 0 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension ability to have calls queued if a ...

Page 542: ...s or respond to voice announced Intercom calls with the headset plugged in The headset only activates when the Headset key is pressed Press the Headset key to answer a ringing call OR Press the Headset key and then a line key or press Speaker then 9 to make an outgoing call OR Press the Headset key to get intercom dial tone OR If on a call press the Headset key to hang up ...

Page 543: ...sive hold is important if a user does not want a co worker picking up their call on Hold Group Hold If a user places a call on Group Hold another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick up the call This lets members of a department easily pick up each other s calls Intercom Hold A user can place an Intercom call on Hold The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extensio...

Page 544: ...n B on hold and then calls station C station C cannot transfer the call For a station to retrieve a held ICM call the station must have an ICM key assigned in Program15 07 00 The Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is used when an internal call from a Single Line Telephone or 3rd Party SIP telephone is placed on hold On extensions Hold Recall to Operator is not supported Default Setting Enabled System Ava...

Page 545: ... ringing or on hold MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 862 14 01 16 Basic Trunk Data Setup Forced Release of Held Call Enable Disable Forced Release of Held Call 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Set up the Trunk Access Maps This sets the access options for trunks 0 No access 1 Outgoing access only 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and ac...

Page 546: ... Assignment for Extensions Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called Call Pickup Groups are set up in Program 23 02 Department Groups 1 64 Priority 1 9999 Default 1 extensions in Department Group 1 with priority in port order Port 1 priority 1 Port 960 priority 960 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15...

Page 547: ...d recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time 0 64800 seconds 90 24 01 04 System Options for Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time Set the Hold Recall Time A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension for this time If still unanswered the call changes to System Hold 0 64800 seconds 30 24 01 05 System Options for Hold Forced Release of Held Call Set the Forced Release of Held ...

Page 548: ...ment Group can pick it up 1 Press Hold 2 Dial 832 3 Press Speaker to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 832 3 Hang up To pick up a call on Group Hold 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 862 Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 862 Intercom Hold To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press Hold 2 Press Speaker to hang up To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press Speaker...

Page 549: ...s a single key for Extensions such as the front desk reservation services housekeeping or the maitre d of your restaurant Feature Access Codes for one button access to selected features and outside lines Voice Mail so your guests can leave requests even when your service providers are unavailable A Department Calling Group A Department Calling Group allowing for example your guests to reach the fi...

Page 550: ...from calling guests in another a handy feature for guests that want to maintain their privacy If you need to you can always allow inter room calling e g for families or groups that have separate rooms Toll Restriction When Checked In Control a guest s long distance dialing automatically when they check in Use this feature to set up two different Toll Restriction modes The first mode is for you and...

Page 551: ...ess code 641 When Program 42 01 06 is disabled valid room status changes are limited Refer to the PMS Developer Guide for information on valid status changes The current room status in Program 42 02 03 cannot be checked via PCPro When the system is configured for the VRS feature Wake Up call greetings to single line room telephones are supported Wakeup calls to multiline room telephones do not pro...

Page 552: ... 11 10 16 726 Leaving Message Waiting Requires CPU to be licensed for Hotel Motel 11 14 01 727 Set DND for Own Extension 11 14 02 728 Cancel DND for Own Extension 11 14 03 729 Set DND for Other Extension 11 14 04 730 Cancel DND for Other Extension 11 14 05 731 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension 11 14 06 732 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension 11 14 07 733 Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension 11 ...

Page 553: ... Y Y Y Y Code 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42 01 06 is set to 0 Disabled Change Status Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 0 Code Code Original Status Code 1 N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Code 2 Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code 3 Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y...

Page 554: ... SV9100 PMS LIC Part code BE114072 This license is only required when using PMS integration PVA PMS license Part code BE114099 This license is only required when using PVA PMS for PMS integration UM8000 Hotel Motel license SV91 UMS Hospitality PMS Lic Part code EU914320 This license is only required when using the UM8000 Mail hotel features such as PMS integration and Hotel Guest room mailboxes Re...

Page 555: ...or the System Administrator GCD CP10 must be licensed for Hotel Motel MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 726 11 14 01 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set DND for Own Extension Customize the set DND for own extension used with the Hotel Motel feature GCD CP10 must be licensed for Hotel Motel MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 727 11 14 02 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel DND for Own Extension Customi...

Page 556: ...for Hotel Motel MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 734 11 14 09 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set Room to Room Call Restriction Customize the set room to room call extension used with the Hotel Motel feature GCD CP10 must be licensed for Hotel Motel MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 735 11 14 10 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction Hotel Customize the cancel room to ...

Page 557: ...monitor Service Codes used with the Hotel Motel feature GCD CP10 must be licensed for Hotel Motel MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 770 11 14 18 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction Customize the set hotel PMS code restriction Service Codes used with the Hotel Motel feature GCD CP10 must be licensed for Hotel Motel MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 766 15 03 01 Single Line T...

Page 558: ...ge In at the receiving extension i e Barge In receive 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Intrusion Tone Turn Off or On the Barge In Intrusion Tone If disabled this also turns off the Barge In display at the called extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 40 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Do Not Disturb Turn Off or On an ...

Page 559: ... Message 2 VRS Message Time 0 42 01 02 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up Call Message Assignment VRS Message for Wake Up Calls You must make an entry for this program if you have selected 1 or 2 in Item 1 above 0 100 0 No Setting 0 42 01 03 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up Call No Answer Assign the wake up call no answer options for Hotel Motel Service 0 No Transfer 1 Transfer to the Op...

Page 560: ...ows the current room status setting 1 Room Clean Occupied 2 Maid Required 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required 5 Maintenance Request 6 Out of Order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Vacant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 No Setting 42 03 01 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Check In Operation Set the Hotel Motel check in operation COS options 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 42 03 02 Class of Service O...

Page 561: ...3 11 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Change Room Status for Own Extension Set the Hotel Motel change room status for own extension COS options 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 42 03 12 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel SLT Room Monitor Enable Disable a single line telephone ability to use Room Monitor 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 42 03 13 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel PMS Restriction Level Enable Dis...

Page 562: ...hen using the PMS feature 0 Off 1 On 0 42 06 05 PMS Service Setting AREYUTHERE LINETEST Send Timing Set the AREYUTHERE LINETEST send timing when using the PMS feature 1 128 seconds 10 42 06 06 PMS Service Setting AREYUTHERE LINETEST Send Count Set the AREYUTHERE LINETEST send count when using the PMS feature 0 20 times 3 42 06 07 PMS Service Setting Check Out Auto Flexible Status Change When Progr...

Page 563: ... room status codes can be defined in this program Note the code definitions only apply to the system itself when sending room status messages to the PMS Application the status codes are always sent as defined in the PMS Developer Guide 1 Room Clean Occupied 2 Maid Required 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required 5 Maintenance Request 6 Out of Order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Vac...

Page 564: ...Off Agent logged off There are 960 internal Hotline extensions available Conditions An extension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partner s extension If a station is a agent the Hotline key blinks to indicate the agent s status Hotline keys can be assigned to the DSS consoles Hotline does not override Do Not Disturb Hotline always follows the Handsfree Answerback Forced Inte...

Page 565: ...n Keys Ringdown Extension Internal External Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Hotline code 01 partner s extension number Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default ...

Page 566: ...vice Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline for SPK Turn Off or On an extension user ability to press Speaker to activate hotline or ringdown 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 06 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Unscreened Transfer Ring Inward Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Unscreened Transfer 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Se...

Page 567: ...iority 1 30 05 02 DSS Console Lamp Table Busy Extension Define the LED patterns for busy extensions on the DSS consoles 0 7 7 On 30 05 03 DSS Console Lamp Table DND Extension Define the LED patterns for DND extensions on the DSS consoles 0 7 3 RW 30 05 04 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Busy Define the LED patterns for busy agents function on the DSS consoles 0 7 7 On 30 05 05 DSS Console Lamp Table ...

Page 568: ... LED patterns for hotel status code 6 on the DSS consoles 0 7 3 RW 30 05 15 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 7 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 7 on the DSS consoles 0 7 6 IW 30 05 16 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 8 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 8 on the DSS consoles 0 7 4 IR 30 05 17 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 9 Hot...

Page 569: ...ntercom call Operation To place a call to your Hotline partner 1 Press the Hotline key Program 15 07 or SC 851 01 partner s extension number You can optionally lift the handset after this step for privacy To transfer your outside call to your Hotline partner 1 Press the Hotline key 2 Announce the call and hang up OR Hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unannounced If unanswered th...

Page 570: ...rst digit of the called party number When both Hot Key Pad and Dialing Number Preview are turned on Hot Key Pad has priority and Dialing Number Preview does not work When both Hot Key Pad and Hotline are turned on Hot Key Pad has priority and Hotline does not work When placing an outgoing call with the Hot Key Pad feature the user must dial the trunk access code before dialing the called party num...

Page 571: ...ass 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 08 20 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hot Key Pad Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make a call by dialing the number without going off hook 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 Operation To place an intercom call using Hot Key Pad 1 The multiline terminal is idle There is no need to press Speaker 2 Dial the extension 3 Dialed extension rings To...

Page 572: ...a station is off hook and digits are not dialed in a programmed time Conditions Howler tone is generated 45 seconds after a call is disconnected and the telephone is left off hook or the telephone is left off hook without dialing Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None ...

Page 573: ...s memory block 0 64800 seconds 15 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Customize the system basic tones and system service tones The system must be reset for the changes to take affect 0 255 0 until On Hook Refer to Table 2 31 Service Tone Setup Defaults Program 80 01 01 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number The following features require that the system tones listed below be changed t...

Page 574: ...Mail extensions 5596 5611 are set to DP in Program 15 03 01 InMail extensions 5596 5611 are set to Special in Program 15 03 03 Call Forwarding to Voice Mail An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail Once forwarded calls to the extension connect to that extension mailbox The caller can leave a message in the mailbox instead of calling back later Forwarding can occur for all calls imme...

Page 575: ...multiline terminal user can then Choose Exit to let the call go through to their mailbox Choose ANSW to intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox Choose SCRN to monitor the message being left by the caller Personal Answering Machine Emulation A multiline terminal user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine This lets In Mail screen their calls just like their an...

Page 576: ...voice mail ports are not assigned to a Department Group the calls are handled as though no voice mail queuing feature was enabled The calls either access voice mail if a port is available or they receive a busy signal The Voice Mail Queuing feature does not work with the Conversation Record feature Message Key will Operate as Voice Mail Key The system enhances a telephone Message key function when...

Page 577: ...rity Code Programming InMail provides softkeys when programming the security code These softkeys allow a user to select OK CLEAR or EXIT following an entry of a new code InMail Internal Message Notification Timer When Message Notification places a call out the system waits up to 30 seconds for ringback reorder or busy tone from the trunk If detected notification call out processing begins normally...

Page 578: ...A Z using upper and lower case letters Each extension user should also have a name recorded in their Subscriber Mailbox In addition each extension used by Directory Dialing must be installed and have an active Subscriber Mailbox Personal or Group An outside caller can route to a Master Mailbox or a Routing Mailbox programmed as a Directory Dialing Mailbox from The Answer Tables Answer Schedule Ove...

Page 579: ...tion list do not use blank destinations within the list The system considers blank entries to be the end of the list and does not use entries following the blank InMail is supported for centralized voice mail in a KTS to KTS CCIS network InMail is supported for centralized voice mail in a NetLink network However replication should be scheduled for non peak hours of operation Email forwarding requi...

Page 580: ...ion IDs Live Record does not work for monitored calls Live Record does not work for conference calls Fixed Call Forwarding can be used to transfer a user s unanswered calls to their voice mail Call Forwarding does not have to be programmed manually by each user Off premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines When the voice mail places a call on hold it uses Group H...

Page 581: ...count display Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s InMail Mailbox License InMail Email Client License System Version License Related Features Barge In Caller ID Call Forwarding Central Office Calls Placing Clock Calendar Display Contact Centre Direct Inward Line DIL Hold Message Waiting One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Transfer ...

Page 582: ...ent Group Pilot Numbers Dial Assign a Department Group pilot number for the Voice Mail eight digits maximum The extensions are assigned to the group in Program 16 02 01 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 11 12 08 Service Code Setup for Service Access Barge In Customize the Service Codes used for barge in service MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 810 11 12 52 Service Code Setup for Service Access...

Page 583: ... 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color Select the color of the large LED when a voice mail message is waiting at the extension 0 Green 1 Red 1 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type For each UNIVERGE SV9100 voice mail extension set this option to 0 0 DP 1 DTMF 1 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Terminal Type Enter 1...

Page 584: ...user to transfer a call to another extension or voice mail without answering the call Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23 02 Depa...

Page 585: ...f 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 02 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forward When Busy Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 04 Class of...

Page 586: ...TMF Signal on ICM Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Continued Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 15 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Initiate You should set this option to 1 for voice mail 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive Turn Off or O...

Page 587: ...one 1 Ring Back Tone 0 Assign Trunks As Automated Attendant Trunks Method 1 Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to ring into Voice Mail as a Direct Inward Line DIL Trunks 1 400 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI...

Page 588: ... Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 1 For Either Method Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment To enable Voice Mail Overflow assign selected extensions to a Ring Group that rings for unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ports In Program 22 06 enter 1 to enable overflow ringing Maximum of eight d...

Page 589: ...sage Wait commands You should normally enable this option If enabled be sure that the programmed Message Notification strings do not contain the code 9 for trunk access When using an external voice mail and Centrex transfer this option should be disabled or the service code 3 in Program 11 12 42 must be changed 0 Off 1 On 1 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time Se...

Page 590: ...port 1 Maximum of 12 characters InMail The system substitutes the port number for the when calling the port 47 01 03 SV9100 InMail System Options Subscriber Message Length Set the maximum time for recorded messages for Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox vi...

Page 591: ...essing HOLD X Extension number entered by pressing LK2 InMail automatically replaces the X command with the number of the extension that initially received the message X M 47 01 08 SV9100 InMail System Options Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number Set the time delay 0 99 seconds that occurs just before InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification call...

Page 592: ...ween Busy Non Pager Callout Attempts Set the time InMail waits after it dials a busy non pager callout destination before retrying the callout number 1 255 minutes 15 47 01 12 SV9100 InMail System Options Wait Between RNA Non Pager Callout Attempts Set the time InMail waits after it dials an unanswered non pager callout destination before retrying the callout number There are three types of unansw...

Page 593: ...ption is set to 0 InMail retries a digital pager Message Notification the number of times specified in 47 01 14 Number of Callout Attempts This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to telephone numbers A digital pager notification is acknowledged when the recipient logs onto the mailbox 0 No Disabled 1 Yes Enabled 0 47 01 16 SV9100 InMail System Options Name Format Specify how na...

Page 594: ...ns Message Playback Order Set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order When a subscriber listens to their messages InMail can play the oldest message or the newest message first 0 FIFO first in first out or oldest messages first 1 LIFO last in first out or newest messages first 0 47 02 05 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Auto Erase Save of Messages Determine what happens when a Subscribe...

Page 595: ...d Alert Tone Interval Time 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 47 02 08 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Message Waiting Lamp Enable Disable Message Waiting lamp at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox For Subscriber Mailboxes you should enable this option For Guest Mailboxes you should disable it 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 47 02 09 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Auto Attendant Direct to Vo...

Page 596: ... 0 action 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 47 02 14 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Next Call Routing Mailbox Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call R...

Page 597: ...dest messages first 1 LIFO last in first out or newest messages first 0 47 06 03 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Auto Erase Save of Messages Determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits the mailbox without either saving SA or erasing E the message Depending on the setting of this option InMail either automatically saves or erases the mes...

Page 598: ...val Time 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable 1 47 06 06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Message Waiting Lamp Enable Disable Message Waiting lamp at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox For Subscriber Mailboxes you should enable this option For Guest Mailboxes you should disable this option 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 47 06 07 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb Enable Di...

Page 599: ...ng Mailbox Dial Action Table If disabled the caller can dial only 0 to use the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 47 06 12 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Next Call Routing Mailbox Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting The digits th...

Page 600: ...03 Call Routing Mailbox Options Time Limit for Dialing Commands Determine the time InMail waits for an Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing the call to the Timeout destination Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout action programmed If the caller waits too long to dial When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed the caller routes to that destination W...

Page 601: ...ions For more detail on this interaction refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the InMail System Guide 0 No Repeats 1 10 Announcement repeats 1 10 times 0 47 09 03 Announcement Mailbox Options Hang Up After Use this option along with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Repeat Count above to provide additional routing options to Automated Attendant caller...

Page 602: ...Mailbox the outside caller shears the recorded announcement Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed InMail then hangs up reroutes the call or provides additional dialing options If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table If any Input Data value is entered the ter...

Page 603: ...des additional dialing options If the Default Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table If any Input Data value is entered the terminal displays the Default Mailbox Number selection below 0 Undefined 1 Subscriber Mailbox STA 2 Group Mailbox 3 Routing Mailbox Answer Table 1 3 Answer Table 2 16 ...

Page 604: ... 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range of days For this type of schedule you select The day of the week the schedule should start The day of the week the schedule should stop The time on the start day the schedule should start The time on the stop day the schedule should stop The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the calls 3 Date A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a specific day ...

Page 605: ...ilbox is a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table 0 Undefined 1 Subscriber Mailbox STA 2 Group Mailbox 3 Routing Mailbox 3 Answering Mailbox Number Set the number of the Answering Mailbox the Automated Attendant uses when the selected schedule is in effect This mailbox is defined in 47 12 02 Answering M...

Page 606: ...d Date Type 3 schedules To make a schedule run continuously make the same entry for 47 12 07 Schedule Start Time and 47 12 08 1700 5 00PM 08 30 8 30AM All other schedules are 0000 Schedule End Time 47 12 08 InMail Answer Schedules Schedule End HHMM 24 hour clock Default Time For example Answer Table 1 Specify the time the Answer Schedule should 0130 1 30AM Schedule 1 start It applies to Day of the...

Page 607: ...ncement Message Assign Voice Mail Announcement Mailbox as the message source for the 1st Announcement Message Dial maximum of eight digits No Setting 41 19 03 Voice Mail Delay Announcement 1st Delay Message Sending Count Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending Count This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play 0 No message is played 1 255 0 41 19 04 Voice Mail Delay Announcement M...

Page 608: ...ilbox type 0 None 1 Subscriber 2 Routing 1 Operation Calling Your Mailbox To call your mailbox With a multiline terminal your Voice Mail key flashes green and your Message Centre keys flash red when they have messages waiting If you do not have a Voice Mail key your Message Waiting LED flashes instead Multiline Terminal 1 Press your Voice Mail key Program 15 07 or SC 851 01 8 OR Press the Vmsg sof...

Page 609: ... Message displayed press Speaker or lift the handset The voice mail is called The voice mail is only called if there are new messages If the display indicates Check Messages No Messages press the Exit key to return the telephone to idle If Program 15 02 26 1 Voice Mail Key 1 Press the Message key once The voice mail is called When there are new messages the Message Waiting LED on the telephone fla...

Page 610: ... mailbox number or a co worker s mailbox number OR Press the DSS Console or One Touch key for extension user s mailbox which receives the transfer If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail the call waits before routing the called user s mailbox This gives you the option of retrieving the call instead of having it picked up by Voice Mail 4 Hang up Voice Mail prompts your c...

Page 611: ...he call on hold then pick the call back up You can restart and stop recording as required Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 754 The system automatically reconnects you to your call To stop recording hookflash twice You can restart and stop recording as required Personal Answering Machine Emulation Multiline Terminal Only To enable or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation 1 Press Speak...

Page 612: ...ages in your Voice Mail mailbox CHECK MESSAGE VRS GENERAL MESSAGE Not listened to the current General Message CHECK MESSAGE name Message Waiting requests left at your telephone by your co workers 3 Press VOL or VOL to scroll through your display 4 When you find the message you want to answer press Speaker You can either Go to your Voice Mail mailbox Listen to the new General Message Automatically ...

Page 613: ...e letters that correspond to the name of the person you wish to reach The Directory Dialing Message tells you how many letters you need to dial and whether you should enter the person s first name or last name To exit Directory Dialing without selecting a name dial 3 The Automated Attendant announces the name matches and tells you which digit to dial 1 3 to reach each of the announced names To hea...

Page 614: ...essage in the called extension s mailbox The caller hears the mailbox Greeting if recorded 2 Dial 2 to Park and Page The caller returns to these options if the Park is not picked up 3 Dial 3 to have the system try and locate this person The Find Me Follow Me feature returns the caller to these options if the user is not located 4 Dial 4 for other options Normally this routes to the extensions Next...

Page 615: ...ion Park and Page Undefined 0 No 0 No If unanswered caller hears greeting and can leave a message Undefined 0 No 1 Yes If unanswered caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 2 to Park and Page Undefined 1 Yes 0 No If unanswered caller hears greeting and can leave a message Undefined 1 Yes 1 Yes If unanswered caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 2 to Park and Page Defined 0 No 0 No If unanswered ...

Page 616: ...immediately hears greeting and can leave a message 1 Yes 0 RNA 0 No STRF If unanswered caller hears greeting and can leave a message 1 UTRF If unanswered caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 2 to Park and Page 1 1 Yes 0 RNA 1 Yes Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a message 1 Yes 1 IMM 0 No Park and Page occurs immediately 1 Yes 1 IMM 1 Yes Caller immediately hears greeting and can...

Page 617: ...r Mailbox This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a subscriber Mailbox recording or default greeting The digits the caller can dial depend on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options 1 32 default 1 By default Call Routing Mailboxes numbers are 01 08 47 02 17 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Enable Paging Enab...

Page 618: ... provides additional dialing option while listening to a Subscribe Mailbox recording or default greeting The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox or alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options 1 32 default 1 By default Call Routing Mailboxes numbers are 01 16 47 06 15 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Enable Paging Enable the paging option for the appro...

Page 619: ...urrent Paging Message if any Alternately dial L 5 Exit the listen mode b Rec Select to record the Paging Message Alternately dial R 7 Pause Select to pause recording Alternately dial Resume Select to resume recording if paused Alternately dial Cncl Select to erase the recording Alternately dial E 3 Done Select to confirm the recording and exit the recording mode Alternately dial c Del Select to er...

Page 620: ...H Select Call Options You are at the Call Handling Options Menu Alternately dial CO 26 3 Do one of the following a DVM Select to turn Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on or off Alternately dial O 6 Paging Select to turn Park and Page on or off Alternately dial E 3 Back Select to go back to the Mailbox Options Menu To retrieve a call parked in a personal parked orbit refer to Picking Up a P...

Page 621: ...ate 64kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 KHz Audio Format CCiTT u law User Pro Access Options There are two different User Pro logins available to make changes To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV9100 LAN port in the address line At default the IP address is 192 168 0 10 User Admin Mode UA Mode This mode allows the user admin to access any telephone an...

Page 622: ...ssage was left in type of message the message number and the date and time to the second the message was left The table below shows how to interpret the message name to determine this information Default Incoming Ringing Tone File Name Format BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS wav maximum 32 characters B Mailbox number maximum eight digits or VRS for the VRS message T Message Type Greeting or VRS message Recor...

Page 623: ...y telephone When downloading deleting an audio file via User Pro the file is not accessible by another User Pro session or from the telephone This feature is only supported using a LAN connection When uploading an audio file the extension will be checked whether it is WAV or not However the format of the uploaded file will not be checked If the uploaded file is not in the proper format it may not ...

Page 624: ...ows XP 1 Select Control Panel then Folder Options 2 Click on the Files tab 3 Select the WAV extension from the list then click Advanced 4 Check Confirm to open the file after download then click OK 5 Close the folder option by clicking OK again Windows Vista It is not possible to change the save to folder option The downloaded file is automatically opened for playback Default Settings None System ...

Page 625: ...r accounts that are used when connecting to the KTS via PCPro WebPro If using PCPro these are the accounts that are used to connect If using WebPro these are the accounts that are used to login Maximum of eight digits 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level Set the system password user levels 0 Prohibited User 1 MF Manufacturer Level 2 IN Installer Level 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 4 ...

Page 626: ... Messages using User Admin Mode UA All messages stored on the InMail can be accessed via the Mailbox User Mode for playback or deletion 1 To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV9100 LAN port in the address line At default the IP address is 192 168 0 10 2 At the login screen enter username USER1 and password 1111 3 You will then see the main menu click on the InMail Audio Up Do...

Page 627: ...ailbox greeting In order for uploaded greetings to play on the InMail they must be in the proper format Audio files not recorded in the proper format may not playback on the InMail The proper format is Bit Rate 64kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 KHz Audio Format CCiTT u law 1 To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV9100 LAN port in the address line At de...

Page 628: ... enter username Extension Number and password 1111 3 You will then see the main menu click on the InMail Audio Up Download icon The greeting numbers correspond to the same greeting number when accessed via the telephone Greeting 1 is GR1 greeting 2 is GR2 and greeting 3 is GR3 Greeting 7 is the paging greeting used with the park and page feature 4 To delete a greeting click on the red X to the rig...

Page 629: ...ty for outside callers allowing them to simply dial the main voice mail number and be automatically logged into their mailbox Two types of voice mail access modes exist for this feature 1 Specifying the VM Pilot number as a DID DIL DISA VRS destination OR Dialing the VM pilot number after calling in from a Mobile Extension 2 Program to forward a call to VM 102 by any of following Programs Program ...

Page 630: ...s feature by setting the VM box number in Program 13 04 11 which corresponds to the Speed Dial number registered in Program 15 22 01 Common Speed Dial area is used for this feature Group or Station Speed Dial areas are not supported with this feature When a number in the Common Speed Dial includes a trunk access code or end code the Redial name indication will work if the number matches completely...

Page 631: ...ing Trunks support sending Caller ID Analog Line ISDN Line BRI ISDN Line PRI SIP Line H 323 Line Required Component s InMail Mailbox License 1012 System Version R1 License 0411 Related Features Caller ID Flexible Ringing Mobile Extension Speed Dial System Group Station InMail ...

Page 632: ...Bin No system then finds the associated VM Box number with this Program Mailbox Number 0 896 900 931 0 14 01 22 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID to Voice Mail Enable Disable the system ability to send the Caller ID digits to voice mail Trunks 1 400 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 15 22 01 Mobile Extension Setup Mobile Extension Target Setup For each Mobile Extension number select the Abbreviated Dial bin num...

Page 633: ...ion Table Number Conversion Transfer Destination Number 2 For each DID Translation Table entry 1 4000 specify the first and second Transfer Destinations if the callers receives a busy or no answer action defined in Program 22 11 04 If the Transfer Destinations are busy or receive no answer those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination Program 22 10 0 No Setting 1 1 00 Incoming Grou...

Page 634: ...l table Program 25 15 01 0 Operation Retrieve VM Messages To retrieve VM messages from outside of office If incoming analog trunks are used in the system Main Number 214 555 5678 Outside party number 214 555 1212 Program 22 02 01 Trunk 1 DIL Program 22 07 01 VM Pilot number 200 Program 13 04 01 Speed Dial area No 0 2145551212 Program 13 04 11 Speed Dial area No 0 001 VM BOX number not extension nu...

Page 635: ...sable the Security Code when the destinations is your cell phone and it may be inconvenient to dial digits after answering the notification callout When the extension user enables Cascading Message Notification the system will try each enabled destination that is active for the current day and time i e in schedule The system will not try any destinations that are disabled or are not in schedule Wh...

Page 636: ...system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external numbers by the system dial plan settings Depending on the system ARS routing maybe needed to properly route external calls If no trunks are available when an outside destination is attempted it is counted as a Busy No Answer attempt Program 47 02 28 is used to enable or disable message notification queuing If enabled message notif...

Page 637: ...637 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 1 ...

Page 638: ...638 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 2 ...

Page 639: ...639 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 3 ...

Page 640: ...t answer the system follows the Cascading Message Notification retry attempt settings and notification will eventually stop if the call is not answered 6 Once the notification process begins a new message does not restart the process if it is already in progress Once the process ends e g if the message is acknowledged or the maximum number of callout attempts is reached the next new message will r...

Page 641: ...on will eventually stop if the call is not answered Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s VM Mailbox License 1012 System Version R1 License 0411 Related Features None ...

Page 642: ...delay that occurs just before SV9100 InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager Set this delay so the pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback number 0 99 seconds 30 47 01 09 SV9100 InMail System Options Wait Between Digital Pager Callout Attempts Use this option to set the m...

Page 643: ...ion Set how many attempts SV9100 InMail retries an incomplete Message Notification callout This total includes unacknowledged callouts callouts to a busy destination and callouts to an unanswered destination This option applies to pager and non pager callouts 1 99 rings 1 47 02 23 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options All Message Notification Enabled Use this option to enable or disable notificati...

Page 644: ...tting This entry is in 24 hour military time For example 08 is 8 00 AM and 20 is 8 00 PM For 24 hour notification make the Start Hour the same as the End Hour There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 23 24 Hour Clock 0 47 20 03 Station Mailbox Message Notification Notification End Hour For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to set the hour...

Page 645: ...r callouts If the Busy Attempts and RNA Attempts are both met the notification callout to the selected entry is cancelled There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 1 99 Attempts 5 47 20 07 Station Mailbox Message Notification Notification RNA Attempts For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to set how many times InMail will retry an incomplete...

Page 646: ...tion Mailbox Message Notification Day of Week Wednesday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Message Notification on Wednesday There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 20 13 Station Mailbox Message Notification Day of Week Thursday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disabl...

Page 647: ... the same as the End Hour There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Group Mailbox 0 23 24 Hour Clock 0 47 22 03 Group Mailbox Notification Options Notification End Hour For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to set the hour when Message Notification will stop Notification will occur only for new messages received between the Start Hour and this setting This ent...

Page 648: ... pager callouts If the Busy Attempts and RNA Attempts are both met the notification callout to the selected entry is cancelled There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Group Mailbox 1 99 Attempts 5 47 22 07 Group Mailbox Notification Options Notification RNA Attempts For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to set how many times InMail will retry an incomplete M...

Page 649: ...oup Mailbox Notification Options Day of Week Wednesday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Message Notification on Wednesday There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 22 13 Group Mailbox Notification Options Day of Week Thursday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable M...

Page 650: ...p Mailbox Options menu C o n f i g u r e M b o x 1 0 1 C o d e N o t f y C a l l H M o r e Dial N 6 Press Notfy Notification Type Selection menu M e s s a g e N o t i f i c a t i o n P h o n e E m a i l B a c k Dial P 7 Press Phone All Message Notifications Setting menu P h o n e N o t i f i c a t i o n O f f O n O f f D e s t B a c k 2 All message Notifications Setting menu P h o n e N o t i f i ...

Page 651: ... t i o n O n D e s t 4 D e s t 5 B a c k M o r e Soft key Operation 3 Line Phone Super Display Phone Dest1 Destination1 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 1 menu Dest2 Destination2 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 2 menu Dest3 Destination3 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 3 menu Dest4 Destination4 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 4 menu Dest5 Destination5 Proceed ...

Page 652: ...6 5 4 0 0 E n b l D i s b l C h n g e B a c k Soft key Operation 3 Line Phone Super Display Phone Enbl Enable Turn destination x notifications on Disbl Disable Turn destination x notifications off Chnge Change Go to destination x notification setting menus Back Back Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu Key Operation Key 2 Go to destination x notification setting menus Key 3 Toggle de...

Page 653: ... Exit Exit Turn Security Code Required flag On Turn Security Code Required flag Off Keep current setting and proceed to Busy Attempt count menu Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu Key Operation Key 7 Key 6 Key Key Turn Security Code Required flag On Turn Security Code Required flag Off Keep current setting and proceed to Busy Attempt count menu Keep current setting and return...

Page 654: ...t count R N A A t t e m p t s 0 5 N e x t E x i t Soft key Operation 3 Line Phone Super Display Phone Next Next Keep current setting and proceed to main Notification menu Exit Exit Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu Key Operation Key 0 9 Set RNA Attempt count Key Keep current setting and proceed to main Notification menu Key Keep current setting and return to main Notificati...

Page 655: ...655 Cascade Message Flow Chart 1 ...

Page 656: ...e synchronization the email account and the voice mailbox operate independently For example deleting the voice mail message does not automatically delete the email and visa versa If Email Notification tries to deliver an email and it doesn t go through because of a connection problem i e no connection or a dropped connection it will retry every 15 minutes for 24 hours If the email still can t go t...

Page 657: ...eplies to a notification email this is the address to which the reply is sent Explanation of the Message Sender From Field Like any other email client Email Notification uses the From field to identify the person that left the message being delivered In the email message the data in the From field is formatted as Name Reply To where Name identifies the person that left the message Reply To1 is the...

Page 658: ...ach text message typically 120 160 characters SMS will not send the wav file attachment even if enabled in programming An extension set up for notification via SMS Text Messaging should have the Email Message as Attachment option disabled in system programming Attempting to deliver a wav file attachment to an SMS messaging service may have undesirable results SMS Text Message Notification The foll...

Page 659: ...screen POP3 Login InMail Email Notification supports POP3 Login The logic of this method is that it allows a user to send e mail from any location as long as they can demonstrably also fetch their mail from the same place Check with your email provider to see if this type of login is required Some Common SMTP Settings Common Email Notification SMTP Server Settings Provider Server Name and Account ...

Page 660: ...lphonenumber teleflip com A More Complete SMS Portal Listing For a more complete SMS portal list see http www livejournal com tools textmessage bml mode details Conditions SV9100 software required to support this feature The Email Notification feature 1014 is licensed on a per mailbox basis Refer to the InMail System Guide for more information about this feature A mailbox set for E mail Notificati...

Page 661: ...ail Station Mailbox Options Enable E mail Notification Enables the email notification feature on a per mailbox basis 0 Off 1 On 0 47 02 21 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options E mail Address Assigns the destination email address on a per mailbox basis Maximum of 48 characters No Setting 47 02 22 SV9100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Include Message as Attachment Determines if the email notificati...

Page 662: ...g 47 06 20 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Include Message as Attachment Determines if the email notification includes the voice message as a WAV file attachment This should be set to 0 if sending an SMS text message to a cell phone 0 Off 1 On 1 47 06 25 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Email Message Save Delete Option When email notification is enabled use this option to set how notification han...

Page 663: ...st be checked manually Maximum of 48 characters No Setting 47 19 01 InMail POP3 Setup Server Name Set the POP3 server name If the DNS server setting is not assigned in Program 90 11 11 the IP Address must be used instead of the name Maximum of 48 characters No Setting 47 19 02 InMail POP3 Setup POP3 Port Set the POP3 server port 0 65535 110 47 19 03 InMail POP3 Setup SSL Encryption Enable SSL encr...

Page 664: ...s Alternately dial OP 67 3 Notfy Select Notification Alternately dial N 6 4 Email Select Email Alternately dial E 3 5 Do one of the following a On Select to turn email notification on Alternately dial O 6 b Off Select to turn email notification off Alternately dial O 6 c Back Select to exit without making any changes Alternately dial ...

Page 665: ...ps an active in schedule number that is busy in DND or is unanswered If a destination is answered the party must dial 1 and if enabled enter the security code to hear new messages If the system is forwarded to a voice mail system since the destination does not enter a 1 it will be counted as a failed attempt and the system will move on to the next destination When all active in schedule destinatio...

Page 666: ...ng Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Transfer Enable Disable loop supervision for the trunk 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Make sure this option is disabled or Find Me Follow Me will not work for CO calls 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 ...

Page 667: ...ion to set the hour when Find Me Follow Me will start Find Me Follow Me will occur only between this setting and the End Hour setting 0 23 24 Hour Clock No Setting 47 21 03 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me End Hour Use this option to set the hour when Find Me Follow Me will end Find Me Follow Me will occur only between this the Start Hour and this setting 0 23 24 Hour Cl...

Page 668: ...w Me on Wednesday There are three separately programmed Find Me Follow Me entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 21 09 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Day of Week Thursday For the selected entry 1 3 use this option to enable or disable Find Me Follow Me on Thursday There are three separately programmed Find Me Follow Me entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disable...

Page 669: ...ng 0 23 24 Hour Clock No Setting 47 23 04 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me Number Use this option to set the telephone number Find Me Follow Me will dial Enter the number exactly as you want the system to dial it including a leading 1 for toll calls if required but do not include a line access code such as 9 If the number you enter is extension number it will be an Interco...

Page 670: ... 09 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Day of Week Thursday For the selected entry 1 3 use this option to enable or disable Find Me Follow Me on Thursday There are three separately programmed Find Me Follow Me entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 47 23 10 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Day of Week Friday For the selected entry 1 3 use this option to enable or di...

Page 671: ...fy On 8am 5pm Pager 12039265400 O 6 Turn Message Notification on or off On Off C 2 Change your Message Notification setup Chnge When you see Notification Begin Enter the hour you want Message Notification to begin Enter 2 digits for the hour A 2 Select AM AM P 7 Select PM PM Skip this option without changing your entry Next Back up to the previous level without changing your entry Exit When you se...

Page 672: ...hen you see Number Enter the Message Notification callout number 16 digits max o Enter the number exactly as you want the system to dial it including a leading 1 for toll calls if required o If the number you enter is 4 digits or less it is an Intercom call If it is more than 4 digits it is an outside call Accept the number entered and back up to the previous level OK Clear Erase the number you ju...

Page 673: ...nguage can be changed using dial access codes or softkeys only The ability to change other extensions language options is allowed on a class of service basis in Program 20 13 53 The system will not allow an InMail language to be selected if that language prompt set has not been loaded onto the InMail SD card When an invalid language is selected an error tone is heard Supported Languages 01 US Engl...

Page 674: ...iwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Reserved 26 Russian Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s InMail Mailbox License 1012 System Version R1 License 0411 Related Features None ...

Page 675: ... Language Selection for own Extension This setting is needed if the dial access code to this feature is desired MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 11 11 69 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation IntraMail Language Selection for Specific Extension This setting is needed if the dial access code to this feature is desired MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 20 13 53 Class of Serv...

Page 676: ...be used for the InMail prompts 1 US English 2 UK English 3 AU English 4 CA French 5 Dutch 6 Mex Spanish 7 LA Spanish 8 Italian 9 German 10 ES Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 ParisFrench 13 BR Portugue 14 Japanese 15 MandChinese 16 Korean 17 IB Portugue 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Reserved 26 Russian 1 ...

Page 677: ...her softkey Ext Enter the extension number to be changed Choose Lang Select desired language press down arrow to advance to next page Press softkey for desired language Press Speaker Exit VMail To change spoken InMail mailbox language press VMail Softkey Own To change your own extension display language press Own Softkey Choose Lang Select desired language press down arrow to advance to next page ...

Page 678: ...rmation which can determine whether they should use Barge In for the extension or trunk This information automatically displays for a multiline terminal once programmed Conditions Preventing ICM calls does not affect dialing other service codes including 911 Intercom calls can ring or be voice announced at the called extension Ringing Line Preference can automatically answer ringing Intercom or tr...

Page 679: ...ing Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 11 11 13 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal Select the service code used at an extension to change the displayed language on a multiline terminal display MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 778 ...

Page 680: ...1 Class of Service for Extensions Assign Class of Service 1 15 for extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Intercom Calls Turn Off or On Intercom calling for the extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 08 11 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Protect...

Page 681: ...Tone 5 1100Hz 6 1400Hz 7 2000Hz 82 01 02 Incoming Ring Tone Frequency 2 Customize the Intercom ring tone 1 520Hz 2 540Hz 3 660Hz 4 760Hz 5 1100Hz 6 1400Hz 7 2000Hz Refer to Default Incoming Ringing Tone 82 01 03 Incoming Ring Tone Modulation Customize the Intercom Ring Tone modulation if desired 0 No Modulation 1 8Hz Modulation 2 16Hz Modulation 3 Envelope 2 Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ri...

Page 682: ...rvice Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to enable Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension user to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals T...

Page 683: ...dulation Pattern 4 High 2000 760 8Hz Modulation Trunk Incoming Mid 1400 660 8Hz Modulation Low 1100 540 8Hz Modulation Pattern 5 High 1100 1400 8Hz Modulation Intercom Incoming Pattern Mid 660 760 8Hz Modulation Low 520 660 8Hz Modulation Pattern 6 High 760 760 No Modulation Alarm Sensor Pattern Mid 760 760 No Modulation Low 760 760 No Modulation Pattern 7 High 1400 540 16Hz Modulation Trunk Incom...

Page 684: ...phone picks up your voice OR If your telephone rings lift the handset To check the extension data multiline terminal only 1 Press the Help key 2 Dial the extension number You display shows your telephone extension number port number and extension Department Group You can also check any other extension numbers information by pressing Help the extension number 3 Press Exit to return the normal time ...

Page 685: ...E has a number of DSP resources on the blade each one can convert a speech channel from IP to TDM and vice versa It is possible for DT800 IP telephones to talk directly to other DT800 IP telephones without using GPZ IPLE DSP resources DT700 IP Multiline Telephones ITL The IP multiline telephone operates the same way as a DT300 DTL digital multiline telephone The DT700 has all of the features and f...

Page 686: ...r that outputs 27VDC requiring a separate power outlet per IP telephone Loss of power in the building will prevent the telephones from functioning Only use the NEC supplied power supply Power over Ethernet PoE The PoE switch 802 3 AF is only method supported provides power over the spare pairs The switch can be used with other devices than the IP telephones and detects whether or not power is need...

Page 687: ...s do not use Program 80 01 Service Tone Setup entries The tones are generated locally by the IP telephone When a Door Box chime rings an IP telephone the system activates the chimes using a ring command Because of this if the volume is adjusted while the door chime is sounding the ringing volume of the IP telephone is also adjusted Music on Hold Music on Hold is also provided by the IP telephone T...

Page 688: ...when using Analog Trunks with IP Phones Due to all Analog trunks being different padding of the Analog Trunks in Programs 81 07 and 14 01 may be necessary Even after the pad changes are made an echo may still be present the first few seconds of the call while echo cancellers are learning the characteristics of the circuit on this call Program 90 68 01 can be used to automatically test the lines an...

Page 689: ... terminals utilizing NAPT can be registered to the primary or a secondary system Refer to the feature SV9100 NetLink for additional details With SV9100 system software and GPZ IPLE daughter board installed half duplex connections are not supported For troubleshooting purposes a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet data from the SV9100 IPLE Ethernet port When downl...

Page 690: ...n If the types of terminals and number of keys are different between overriding and overridden phones the Telephony Service Providers 1st Party and 3rd Party may not function properly Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All IP Multiline Terminals Required Software None Required Component s GCD CP10 with GPZ IPLE Daughter Board installed System Version R1 License 0411 System Port Lic...

Page 691: ...nal terminals reside behind may not require any port forwarding This feature is only available when using a GPZ IPLE Due to the fact that there are many manufacturers producing routers there may still be times when port forwarding is required In all software versions SIP ALG s Application Level Gateway or other SIP Applications MUST be disabled in all routers If a SIP ALG or a similar SIP applicat...

Page 692: ...the IP Address assigned in Program 10 12 09 5081 UDP 172 16 0 10 Secondary signaling port and must be forwarded to the IP Address assigned in Program 10 12 09 10020 10531 UDP 172 16 0 20 Voice ports and must be forwarded to the IP Address assigned in Program 84 26 01 Port forwarding does not need to be assigned at the Remote Terminal location Conditions The router the SV9100 resides behind require...

Page 693: ...y RTP packet can t be received from the terminal within 10 seconds the call is dropped and the IP Terminal displays the following Each NAPT terminal can have a separate Register and Subscribe expire timer The load of the CPU will increase with each NAPT terminal using a short timer Refer to NAPT Terminals Minimum Timer Settings to view the minimum timer settings based on the number of NAPT termina...

Page 694: ...r the GCD CP10 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 GCD CP10 Network Setup IP Address Set IP address for GPZ IPLE The IP Address assigned in Program 10 12 01 cannot start with the same leading digits as the IP Address assigned here 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 GCD CP10 Networ...

Page 695: ... come on line 0 Normal 1 Auto 2 Manual 0 10 54 01 License Configuration for Each Package License Code Assign VoIP Resource Licenses 5103 to GCD CP10 slot 1 If applying more than 255 licenses to a slot the licenses must be applied across multiple indexes For example assigning 256 VoIP resource licenses 5103 to the CPU slot could be assigned using different methods as long as the total for the CPU s...

Page 696: ...o Peer Mode On a per station basis enable or disable Peer to Peer mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 84 10 01 ToS Setup ToS Mode When Input Data is set to 1 Protocol 7 is invalid When Data is set to 2 Protocols 2 6 are invalid 0 Disable Invalid 1 IP Precedence 2 Diffserv 0 84 10 07 ToS Setup Priority D S C P Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point 0 63 0 84 22 01 DT800 DT...

Page 697: ...P multiline station or Softphone In Manual mode a user can also Logoff the IP phone to allow another user to login with their own user ID and password To Logoff the IP phone Press the Down Arrow Softkey press the Prog Softkey and then press the LOGOFF Softkey 0 Off 1 On 1 84 22 05 DT800 DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup Nick Name Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on ...

Page 698: ...rt with the same leading digits as the IP Address assigned here 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 GCD CP10 Network Setup Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of the GPZ IPLE 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 ...

Page 699: ... 10 58 01 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 25...

Page 700: ...nes the SIP Subscribe expiry timer If this value is set to 0 for a NAPT terminal the value in Program 84 23 02 is applied 60 65535 seconds 0 Disable 180 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the IP address for each DSP on the GPZ IPLE xxx xxx xxx xxx 172 16 0 20 84 26 02 IPL Basic Setup RTP Port Number Assign the RTP port number to be used for each DSP on the GPZ IPLE Only even numbered ports...

Page 701: ...hat has been cleared specifically for voice applications thus avoiding any interference problems and delivering crystal clear and secure voice conversations The ML440 provides numerous features and conveniences for optimal comfort Its illuminated graphic color LCD display enables use in poorly lit environments while its internal loudspeaker provides handsfree operation with excellent sound quality...

Page 702: ...sfer This makes it easy for end users to receive and move calls around Four programmable keys on the base on the handset The keys can be programmed for many of the same features that are supported on the DT800 DT700 desk sets Line key programming is flexible The following is an example for the first three programmable keys Line Keys 1 and 2 CAP Keys Line Key 3 Intercom Key G566 andG266 The G566 an...

Page 703: ...tive calls and in addition updating the handset firmware can take several hours It is recommended updates are performed after normal business hours Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 IP DECT Customer Engineer Manual for additional information Conditions DAP Manager is required to support AP400 Access Points and ML440 handsets The ML440 handset requires AP400 Access Points The DAP manager does not suppor...

Page 704: ...6 G266 and AP400 AP300 system supports seamless roaming between Base Units The ML440 G566 G266 and AP400 AP300 system are not supported for use with DeskTop Suite The ML440 G566 G266 and AP400 AP300 system cannot be used on multiple SIP servers at the same time The ML440 G566 G266 and AP400 AP300 do not support voice announce calls If the SV9100 is set to voice in Program 20 02 12 then each phone ...

Page 705: ...play 262K TFT type Color LCD w backlight 176 x 220 pixel display Built in vibrator Yes Yes Yes Speakerphone mode Yes Yes Yes Bluetooth headset No No No Headset connection Yes Yes Yes Backlit for keys Yes Yes No Volume key up down Yes Yes Yes Mute key Yes Yes Yes Softkeys based on status call Yes Hold Conference Transfer Yes Mute Yes Mute Centralized directory Yes Yes Yes ...

Page 706: ...o Attendant Call Queuing No No No Automatic Release Yes Yes Yes Automatic Route Selection ARS Yes Yes Yes Background Music No No No Barge In Yes No No ML440 Can monitor but cannot use the microphone toggle feature The handset mute button is the only way to mute audio from handset during monitoring G566 G266 Can be barged into but cannot initiate Barge In Call Appearance CAP Keys Yes No No Call Arr...

Page 707: ...Call Waiting Camp On can be performed using dial access codes or a function key G566 G266 Call Waiting Camp On can be performed using dial access code only Callback Yes No No G566 G266 handsets can receive a Callback but cannot set one for another phone Caller ID Yes Yes Yes Caller ID Caller Return Yes Yes Yes Function of handset Central Office Calls Answering Yes Yes Yes Central Office Calls Plac...

Page 708: ...This is a function of the ML440 G566 G266 handset Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns No No No Ring tones can be changed on the ML440 G566 G266 handset only Do Not Disturb Yes Yes Yes ML440 Do Not Disturb DND can be set using dial access codes or a function key but no confirmation tones are provided G566 G266 Do Not Disturb DND can be set using dial access codes only Door Box Yes Yes Yes ...

Page 709: ...patibility Yes Yes Yes K CCIS IP Yes Yes Yes The following programs must be disabled set to 0 when using a ML440 handset in a CCISoIP network Peer to Peer 15 05 50 0 Link Reconnect 50 06 01 0 K CCIS T1 Yes Yes Yes Last Number Redial Yes Yes Yes Call Redial function is a function of the handset Line Preference Yes No No Long Conversation Cutoff Yes Yes Yes With ML440 an alarm tone is not provided b...

Page 710: ...ll Page It cannot receive either Internal or All Call Pages or display page information Paging Internal Yes Yes Yes A ML440 G566 ZG266 can only initiate an External or All Call Page It cannot receive either Internal or All Call Pages or display page information Park Yes Yes Yes PBX Compatibility Yes Yes Yes PC Programming Yes Yes Yes Personal Park Yes No No Power Failure Transfer No No No Prime Li...

Page 711: ...e system Serial Call Yes No No Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets No No No Softkeys No No No All handset softkeys are fixed and do no follow SV9100 soft key settings Speed Dial System Group Station Yes Yes Yes ML440 Speed dial bins are available using function line key 28 for group and 27 for system and dial access codes G566 G366 Must use dial access codes to use speed dial feature Canno...

Page 712: ... Yes Yes User Programming Ability Yes No No Virtual Extensions Yes No No Voice Mail Integration Analog Yes Yes Yes Voice Over Yes No No ML440 can initiate voice over but cannot respond to a voice from another extension Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Yes Yes Yes By nature these are SIP devices Voice Response System VRS Call Yes No No The ML440 can be used to record and erase VRS messages However...

Page 713: ...ion R1 License 0411 System Port License 0300 VoIP Resource license 5103 IP Terminal License 5111 Related Features Call Appearance CAP Keys Call Forwarding Intercom IP Multiline Station SIP IP Single Line Telephone SIP Softkeys UM8000 Mail InMail ...

Page 714: ... Network Setup Subnet Mask Set the Subnet mask of the GPZ IPLE 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 2...

Page 715: ...g Caller ID 0 Recommended setting is 0 Wait Caller ID 0 Wait Caller ID 1 Immediate Ring 1 15 02 13 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Redial List Mode Select the type of numbers that are stored in the Redial List Internal and External numbers 0 or External only 1 For the ML440 G566 G266 extensions this should be set to 0 0 ICM Trunk Extension Trunk Mode 1 Trunk Mode 1 15 02 34 Multiline Telephon...

Page 716: ...lass of Service Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 08 11 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Protect for the Call Mode Switching from Caller Set this option for the ML440 G566 G266 handset Class of Service When an extension is set to ring mode for ICM calls enabling this option prevents callers from chan...

Page 717: ... Assign Call Forwarding destinations for busy CTX PBX calls 1 9 0 R Maximum of 24 digits No Setting 84 24 01 DT800 DT700 Multiline CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 711 Audio Frames Input the amount of audio in the packets when using the G 711 Codec This should be set to 20ms 2 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 2 84 24 28 DT800 DT700 Multiline CODEC Information Basic Setup Audio Capability Prior...

Page 718: ...be shared among SIP Stations or SIP Trunks Registered SIP Stations and or SIP Trunks require a one to one relation with the GPZ IPLE DSP Resource This is a required component of SIP implementation in the SV9100 The UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD CP10 contains a regular TCP RTP IP stack that can handle real time media support industry standard SIP RFC 3261 communication on the WAN side and interface with the ...

Page 719: ...oard RJ 45 connector provides a WAN LAN connection Voice and signaling data to from the IP Stations are converted into IP Frames and transmitted through the Data Communication IP Network The GPZ IPLE supports a maximum of 256 VoIP connections Duplex mode Auto or Full and speed 10 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps are configured via SV9100 chassis programming The IPLE does not support half duplex only full duplex...

Page 720: ...es 09 txt Section 2 5 Transfer Attended of draft ietf sipping service examples 15 txt draft ietf sip session timer 10 txt When all VoIP DSP resources are busy the SIP phone cannot preempt active calls to make a 911 call The UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD CP10 is the registration server for the SIP stations The configurable IP Address is located in Program 10 12 09 SV9100 Network Setup IP Address T 38 Fax is ...

Page 721: ...Program 15 05 49 is set to 2 Allowed while RTP is not available SIP INFO is received while RTP is not established An In band method such as RFC2833 is used once the voice path is established SIP INFO functions independently from other DTMF methods such as RFC2833 This means SIP terminals should send DTMF information by a single method otherwise the system will receive both separately causing doubl...

Page 722: ...es have Alphanumeric Displays and are backlit However the display is not updated with CPU messages Analog Communications Interface ACI No Ancillary Device Connection No Answer Hold No Answer Key No Attendant Call Queuing No Automatic Release Yes Automatic Route Selection ARS Yes Background Music No Barge In Yes Call Appearance CAP Keys No Call Arrival CAR Keys No Call Duration Timer No Call Durati...

Page 723: ... Monitoring No Call Redirect No Call Waiting Camp On No Callback Yes Caller ID Caller Return Yes Caller ID Call Return is a SIP device feature not a system feature Caller ID Yes Caller ID is shown only on ISDN SIP or Analog CO trunks that are directed at the SIP device Caller ID will not display for calls transferred to the SIP device Call Transfer Yes Only Announce Supervised transfer is supporte...

Page 724: ... be set from the SIP device using dial access codes In some cases Do Not Disturb can be set via the SIP device but is not system side DND Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override Yes Door Box Yes Door Box will not ring a SIP device A SIP device can call a door box but cannot activate the relay Drop Key No Dterm Handset Cordless No Dterm IP Gateway System No E 911 Compatibility No Electra Elite Termina...

Page 725: ...N Compatibility Yes K CCIS IP Yes K CCIS T1 Yes Last Number Redial No Line Preference No Long Conversation Cutoff Yes Meet Me Conference No Meet Me Paging Yes Meet Me Paging Transfer Yes A SIP device can receive a Meet Me Paging Transfer but it cannot originate a Meet Me Paging transfer call Memo Dial No Message Waiting No Message Waiting Answer Yes Microphone Cutoff Yes Microphone Cutoff is a fun...

Page 726: ...ces however when this is done the telephones cannot access ICM dial tone Private Line Yes Programmable Function Keys No Programming from a Multiline Terminal No Pulse to Tone Conversion No Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Yes Multiline Telephones can Quick Transfer to a SIP device s mailbox but a SIP device cannot execute Quick Transfer Redial Function No Call Redial Function is a function of the clie...

Page 727: ...o T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Yes Tandem Ringing No Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference TAPI Compatibility No Tone Override No Traffic Reports No Transfer Yes Transferred calls cannot be pulled back once transfer is initiated Trunk Group Routing Yes Trunk Groups Yes Trunk Queuing Camp On Uniform Call Distribution UCD No Uniform Numbering Network Yes UM8000 Yes User Programming Abil...

Page 728: ...rol is a function of the client device Wireless DECT No Default Setting None System Availability Terminals SIP Terminals Compliant with RFC 3261 RFC 3262 RFC 3264 Session Description Protocol RFC 1889 Real Time Protocol Required Components GCD CP10 GPZ IPLE System Version R1 License 0411 System Port License 0300 VoIP Resource License 5103 IP Terminal License 5111 Related Features None ...

Page 729: ... To header is wrong or out of service the call is sent back to the original terminal If the standard SIP phone is placed on hold park from another extension this call cannot be transferred until the station that placed the call on hold park retrieves the call An unattended transfer can only be completed while both parties are in a talking state The SV9100 supports both Attended and Unattended tran...

Page 730: ...mber Program Name Description Input Data Default 10 12 03 GCD CP10 Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for the GCD CP10 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 GCD CP10 Network Setup IP Address Set IP address for GPZ IPLE The IP Address assigned in Program 10 12 01 cannot start with the same leading digits as the ...

Page 731: ... has no affect on the terminal trunk port assignment or usage 0 Common use for both IP extensions and trunks 1 IP Extension 2 SIP Trunk 3 CCIS Networking 4 Use for NetLink 5 Blocked 6 Common without Unicast Paging 7 Multicast Paging 8 Unicast Paging Resource 1 1 Resource 2 256 0 10 54 01 License Configuration for Each Package License Code Assign VoIP Resource Licenses 5103 to GCD CP10 slot 1 If ap...

Page 732: ...mber Define the Media Gateway Starting RTCP Port Number The RTCP Port Number is the RTP port number 1 RTP Port Number 1 10021 84 06 04 PVA Data Setting Fract Lost Threshold Define the fractional lost threshold this data is sent to the UNIVERGE SV9100 GCD CP10 when the value exceeds the defined value 0 100 0 84 06 05 PVA Data Setting Packets Lost Threshold Define the packet lost threshold this data...

Page 733: ...on Numbering Define the IP Phone extension number Maximum of eight digits 1 101 2 102 3 103 99 199 100 3101 960 3961 SIP Extension Codec Information Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 84 19 01 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 711 Audio Frames Define the G 711 audio frame size 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 2 84 19 02 SIP Extension CODEC Information B...

Page 734: ...ion CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Voice Activity Detection Mode Enable Disable Voice Activity Detection for G 729 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 84 19 09 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Jitter Buffer min Define G 729 Jitter Buffer minimum accepted value 0 270ms 20 84 19 10 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G729 Jitter Buffer average Define G 729 Jitter Buffer average accept...

Page 735: ...the average setting for the G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms 60 84 19 37 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer Max Define the maximum setting for the G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms 120 84 19 38 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 726 Audio Frames Define the number of G 726 Audio Frames 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 3 84 19 39 SIP Extension IP CODEC Inf...

Page 736: ...ng confirmation handling mode local denotes that the VoIP DB will generate tone and check Network denotes that TCF is sent over the network provider 0 Receive TCF signal by VoIPDB 1 Through TCF signal to external FAX 1 84 33 18 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup T 38 RTP Format Payload Number Sets the payload number for T 38 RTP Format 0 2 8 96 127 103 84 34 01 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTFMF ...

Page 737: ...E Only even numbered ports are supported 0 65534 10020 84 26 03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 Define the TCP port number for RTCP to use for each DSP 0 65534 10021 IP Phone Configuration Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name Define the extension virtual extension name Maximum of 12 characters STA 101 Ext 1...

Page 738: ...ia Trunk for Standard SIP Sets the incoming calling name display type on a standard SIP terminal Trunk name is the first priority and abbreviated SPD name is second priority 0 Both name and number 1 Name only 2 Number only 3 None 0 15 05 43 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Video Mode Enable or Disable Video Mode for standard SIP terminals 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 15 05 49 IP Telephone Terminal B...

Page 739: ...for the SIP Phone 2 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Enter the Subnet Mask Address 3 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Enter the Default Gateway address 4 GPZ IPLE Address 0 0 0 0 Enter the GPZ IPLE IP Address This information can be located in Program 10 12 09 UNIVERGE SV9100 Network Setup IP Address 5 Extension Number 0 Assign the SIP Phone extension This information must match Program 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Ope...

Page 740: ...th the same IP Address requires Program 15 05 18 to be set for both extension numbers In the router firewall that the SV9100 resides behind port forwarding is required Port forwarding at the SIP Terminal end is not required as long as Program 15 05 45 Plug and Play is enabled The ports that must be forwarded to the SV9100 are as follows UDP Port 5070 MUST be forwarded to the IP Address assigned in...

Page 741: ... the GCD CP10 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 07 GCD CP10 Network Setup NAPT Router IP Address Default Gateway WAN Define the IP Address of the WAN side of the router 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 08 GCD CP10 Network Setup ICMP Redirect When receiving ICMP redirect messages this de...

Page 742: ... 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 10 12 11 GCD CP10 Network Setup NIC Setup Define the LAN interface Speed and Mode of the VoIP Application supported IPLE daughter board does not support half duplex connection 0 Auto Detect 1 1...

Page 743: ...anslations For example if a system had multiple NAPT phones and another site with multiple IP phones connected via a VPN connection you would not want the phones connected over the VPN to use the NAPT feature The network address or single IP phone addresses of the Remote location would be entered here This is for the IP Phones at this location to not use the NAPT feature 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 12...

Page 744: ...ble 1 Enable 0 15 05 47 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Registration Expire Timer for NAT On a per station basis this setting defines the SIP registration expiry timer If this value is set to 0 for a NAPT terminal the value in Program 84 23 01 is applied 60 65535 seconds 0 Disable 180 15 05 48 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Subscribe Expire Timer for NAT On a per station basis this ...

Page 745: ... Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 84 26 03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 Define the TCP port number for RTCP to use for each DSP 0 65534 10021 Operation None ...

Page 746: ... IPLE H 323 is an optional interface that can provide IP trunks and Tie Lines It can operate in the following modes COI COID DID TLI DTI Depending on the requirements and resource allocation in the LAN WAN Internet the GPZ IPLE H 323 can be configured to use any of the following voice compressions G 729 Low bandwidth requirement is used on most Wide Area Network links G 711 High bandwidth requirem...

Page 747: ...ility Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s GCD CP10 with GPZ IPLE Daughter Board System Version R1 License 0411 System Port License 0300 VoIP Resource License 5103 IP Trunk License 5001 Related Features None ...

Page 748: ...24 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 2...

Page 749: ...d across multiple indexes For example assigning 256 VoIP resource licenses 5103 to the CPU slot could be assigned using different methods as long as the total for the CPU slot is 256 1 Index 1 has 128 of feature code 5103 and index 2 also has 128 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256 2 Index 1 has 255 of feature code 5103 and index 2 has 1 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256 1 255 Resource L...

Page 750: ...Service ISDN CLIP Determine if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators should be allowed 0 Off 1 On 0 20 09 02 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Caller ID Display Turn Off or On the Caller ID display at an extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 21 17 01 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Assign the Caller Party Number for each IP trunk The assigned...

Page 751: ... Access Additional Data If a Service Type is selected in Program 44 02 02 set the additional data if required for the Pre Transaction Table for selecting ARS F Route 24 digits max 1 9 0 To enter a wild card don t care digit press Line Key 1 to enter an 1 Delete Digit 0 255 255 Delete All Digits 2 0 500 0 No Setting 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Number 0 4 0 No Setting 0 44 05 01 ARS F Route Table...

Page 752: ...r average Define the G 729 jitter buffer average for H 323 0 270ms 60 84 01 09 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 729 Jitter Buffer max Define the G 729 jitter buffer maximum for H 323 0 270ms 120 84 01 15 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Jitter Buffer Mode Define the jitter buffer mode for H 323 1 Fixed 2 Self adjusting silence period 3 Self adjusting 3 84 01 16 H 323 Trunk Basic Informatio...

Page 753: ...2ms 5 64ms 6 128ms 6 84 01 26 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Echo Canceller NLP Mode Define the echo canceller NLP mode for H 323 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 84 01 28 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Echo Canceller NLP Noise Setting Define the echo canceller NLP noise setting for H 323 0 Automatic level adjustment 1 Fixed level 0 84 01 30 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup TX Gain Define the TX ...

Page 754: ...fine the G 722 jitter buffer minimum for H 323 0 160ms 30 84 01 66 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer average Define the G 722 jitter buffer average for H 323 0 160ms 60 84 01 67 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer max Define the G 722 jitter buffer maximum for H 323 0 160ms 120 Operation None ...

Page 755: ... that can operate in the following modes COI COID DID TLI DTI Depending on the requirements and resource allocation in the LAN WAN Internet the GPZ IPLE SIP can be configured to use any of the following voice compressions G 711 Law Highest Bandwidth G 729 a Most often used The LAN WAN or Internet connection is provided by a 10 Base T 100 Base TX Ethernet For a list of vendors that have successfull...

Page 756: ... the SV9100 can have only one Gateway If SIP Trunks are programmed in a NetLink Secondary system only SIP Profile 1 can be utilized The SV9100 can only use one DNS Server two SIP Carriers that require their own DNS Server can t be used During a database migration from SV8100 some memory blocks required for SIP Trunks will not convert For a list of conversion exceptions refer to Conversion Exceptio...

Page 757: ... 2 0 With SIP Trunk E 164 Support enabled the SIP call can be displayed once dialed as Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 This display is a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs Internet Telephony Service Providers and may require that PBX handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly This feature uses the following SIP header fields Request URI...

Page 758: ...tem Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Trunks IP SIP Required Component s GCD CP10 GPZ IPLE System Version R1 License 0411 System Port License 0300 VoIP Resource License 5103 IP Trunk License 5001 ...

Page 759: ...ng this numbering scheme This presentation can be a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs Internet Telephony Service Providers so it is necessary the PBX can handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly Conditions E 164 Enhancement is applied for the SIP trunk interface Outgoing call from caller history of incoming calls is only possible from multiline terminals Netl...

Page 760: ...760 Required Component s GCD CP10 GPZ IPLE System Version R1 License 0411 System Port License 0300 VoIP Resource License 5103 IP Trunk License 5001 ...

Page 761: ...ernal call cannot be transferred to a SIP Interconnection trunk A video call cannot be changed to a voice call A voice call cannot be changed to a video call Video capability in the initial invite message is required for the Video Terminal When using an MCU the SV9100 requires the Carrier Type Setting Program 10 29 14 to be set to 0 Standard When using an MCU the same video capability must be set ...

Page 762: ...alf Duplex 3 10Mbps Full Duplex 4 10Mbps Half Duplex 5 1Gbps Full Duplex 0 10 12 07 GCD CP10 Network Setup NAPT Router IP Address Default Gateway WAN Define the IP Address of the WAN side of the router Only used when Program 10 20 21 is enabled 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 08 GCD CP10 Network Setup ICMP Redirect When receiving ICMP redir...

Page 763: ...10Mbps Full Duplex 5 1Gbps Full Duplex 0 10 19 01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection Select type of GPZ IPLE DSP Resource This program setting has no affect on the terminal trunk port assignment or usage 0 Common use for both IP extensions and trunks 1 IP Extension 2 SIP Trunk 3 CCIS Networking 4 Use for NetLink 5 Blocked 6 Common without Unicast Paging 7 Multicast Paging 8 Unicast Paging 0 10 23 01 SIP ...

Page 764: ...P Trunk Port Binding Enable Disable IP Trunk Port binding 0 Disable 1 Enable Profile 1 Profile 2 0 10 29 01 SIP Server Information Setup Default Proxy Outbound Define the SIP Proxy setup Default Proxy Outbound When SIP trunking is used this must be on If entries are made in Program 10 29 xx for an SIP Server and the SIP Server is removed or not used the entries in Program 10 29 xx must be set back...

Page 765: ...p Domain Name Define the domain name of the SIP PROXY Server provided by the SIP Carrier For example if the SIP Proxy server address is proxy sipprovider com you would assign sipprovider com in this program If no SIP Proxy address is provided use the SIP Registration address as the proxy address Maximum of 64 characters Profile 1 Profile 2 No Setting 10 29 13 SIP Server Information Setup Proxy Hos...

Page 766: ...ter If the SV9100 is connecting to the SIP Carrier using NAT Translations this setting must be enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Profile 1 Profile 2 0 10 36 01 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Registration Enable Disable the SIP trunk registration 0 Disable 1 Enable Profile 1 Profile 2 0 10 36 02 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup User ID Assign the SIP User ID provided by your SIP Carrie...

Page 767: ...re code 5103 for a total of 256 1 255 Resource Licenses 0 10 67 01 SIP Stack Configuration Setup DNS Mode Select whether DNS mode is enabled 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 10 67 02 SIP Stack Configuration Setup DNS IP Address Set the IP Address of DNS Server The SV9100 can only use one DNS Server two SIP Carriers requiring their own DNS Server can t be used XXX XXX XXX XXX 0 0 0 0 10 67 03 SIP Stack Configu...

Page 768: ...oups Trunk Port 1 400 Priority 1 400 Default Trunks 1 400 assigned to trunk group 1 with priorities equal to the trunk number Trunk 1 Priority 1 Trunk 400 Priority 400 14 18 05 IP Trunk Data Setup SIP Profile SIP Trunk Assign each SIP Trunk to either Profile 1 or Profile 2 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 1 15 03 18 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Select Special Terminal Used for selecting Speci...

Page 769: ...ter a wild card don t care digit press Line Key 1 to enter an Maximum of eight digits Use line key 1 for a Don t Care digit No Setting 44 02 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Service Type Set the Service Type 0 3 for the Pre Transaction Table for selecting ARS F Route 0 No Setting None 1 Extension Call Own 2 ARS F Route Table F Route 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Option 0 44 02 03 Dia...

Page 770: ... DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point 0 63 0 84 13 01 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 711 Audio Frames Set the G 711 Audio Frame Number 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms Profile 1 Profile 2 2 84 13 02 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Voice Activity Detection Mode Enable Disable the G 711 VAD Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable Profile 1 Profile 2 0 84 13 03 SIP Trun...

Page 771: ...C Information Basic Setup G 729 Jitter Buffer Average Set the average G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300ms Profile 1 Profile 2 40 84 13 11 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Jitter Buffer max Set the maximum G 729 Jitter Buffer 0 300ms Profile 1 Profile 2 80 84 13 17 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Jitter Buffer Mode Set the Jitter Buffer Mode 1 Static 2 Self Adjusting 3 84 13 18 SIP Tru...

Page 772: ...umber of G 726 Audio Frames Define the number of G 726 audio frames 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms Profile 1 Profile 2 3 84 13 39 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 726 VAD Mode Enable Disable the VAD mode for G 726 0 Disable 1 Enable Profile 1 Profile 2 0 84 13 40 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 726 Jitter Buffer min Define the minimum level for the G 726 jitter buffer 0 300ms P...

Page 773: ...cepted value of the Session timer that the SV9100 will allow If the Session timer from the Carrier is lower than the value defined here the SV9100 will deny the call 1 65535 seconds Profile 1 Profile 2 1800 84 14 09 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Called Party Information This Program is used for inbound calls only When set to a 0 Request URI the SV9100 will look into the SIP Request URI field t...

Page 774: ...x 172 16 0 20 84 26 02 IPL Basic Setup RTP Port Number Assign the RTP port number to be used for each DSP on the GPZ IPLE Only even numbered ports are supported 0 65534 10020 84 26 03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 Define the TCP port number for RTCP to use for each DSP 0 65534 10021 84 34 01 VoIPDB DTMF Setup DTFMF Relay Mode This program enables or disables DTMF Relay for Typ...

Page 775: ...hen this data is set to 1 then for any outbound SIP calls a is added as a prefix to the Request URI To and From header fields of the SIP message When it is set to 2 then if the dialed international access code matches the value in Program 10 02 02 this value is removed from the number dialed and the added as a prefix to the Request URI To and From header fields of the SIP Message 0 Off 1 Mode 1 2 ...

Page 776: ...e and country code but do not add the International Access code When it is set to 2 then for any inbound SIP calls that include a and a country code not defined in Program 10 02 01 delete the and add the International Access Code in Program 10 02 02 If the country code is a match then delete both the and country code and add the Caller ID Edit Code from Program 10 02 03 0 Disable 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2...

Page 777: ...55 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 10 12 11 GCD CP10 Network Setup NIC Setup Define the LAN interface Speed and Mode of the VoIP Application supported IPLE daughter board does not support half duplex connection 0 Auto Detect 1 100Mbps Full Duplex 3 10Mbps Full Duplex 5 1Gbps Full Duplex 0 10 23 01 SIP System Interconnection Setup System Interconnection Deter...

Page 778: ... For example assigning 256 VoIP resource licenses 5103 to the CPU slot could be assigned using different methods as long as the total for the CPU slot is 256 1 Index 1 has 128 of feature code 5103 and index 2 also has 128 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256 2 Index 1 has 255 of feature code 5103 and index 2 has 1 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256 1 255 Resource Licenses 0 11 01 01 System...

Page 779: ... Video Call to function set to 1 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 20 08 13 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service ISDN CLIP Determine if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators should be allowed 0 Off 1 On 0 21 17 01 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk Assign the Caller Party Number for each IP trunk The assigned number is sent to the central office wh...

Page 780: ...RS F Route For the SIP System Interconnection set each Dial Digit to 2 F Route 0 No Setting None 1 Extension Call Own 2 ARS F Route Table F Route 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Option 0 44 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Additional Data This is the F Route Table set in Program 44 05 1 Delete Digit 0 255 255 Delete All Digits 2 0 500 0 No Setting 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Numb...

Page 781: ...eader To sip 4400441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 44441509555123 172 16 0 10 No Setting Request URI Invite sip 00441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 Toheader To sip 00441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 441509555123 172 16 0 10 2 00 Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 Toheader To sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 441509555123 172 16...

Page 782: ...0 Program 10 02 02 00 Displayed in terminal incoming caller history as Original Program 10 02 01 0 Program 10 02 01 49 Delete and replace the and matched country code from an incoming SIP INVITE using E 164 numbering scheme Delete and Country Code from Incoming SIP INVITE Program 84 14 16 Program 84 14 13 Description 2 Mode 2 1 On With a SIP INVITE for incoming calls When a is presented as the int...

Page 783: ...783 Original Program 10 02 01 0 Program 10 02 01 49 Making an outgoing call from history of incoming calls 1 From an idle multiline terminal 2 Press soft key List 3 Press soft key CID 4 Press Speaker ...

Page 784: ...12 Supported Fax Codecs are G 711 a law G 711 u law and G 726 It is necessary to set the same Fax Codec on both systems If the Codec does not match the Fax call will fail The SIP RTP session will continue It is necessary to perform a disconnect operation in this case If one side changes the Codec and the other side does not the FAX call will fail The Codec exchange will continue until the call is ...

Page 785: ...10 12 07 GCD CP10 Network Setup NAPT Router IP Address Default Gateway WAN Assign the WAN address of the router that the CCPU is using for NAT 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 GCD CP10 Network Setup IP Address Set IP address for GPZ IPLE The IP Address assigned in Program 10 12 01 cannot start with the same leading digits as the IP Addres...

Page 786: ...2 No Setting 10 28 02 SIP System Information Setup Host Name Define the Domain name This information is generally provided by the SIP carrier Maximum of 48 digits Profile 1 Profile 2 No Setting 10 28 03 SIP System Information Setup Transport Protocol Define the Transport type This option is always set to UDP 0 UDP 1 TCP Profile 1 Profile 2 0 10 29 01 SIP Server Information Setup Default Proxy Outb...

Page 787: ...ost cases a domain name is used so this entry is left at the default 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Profile 1 Profile 2 0 0 0 0 10 29 07 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar Port Number Define the Registrar Port Numbers 0 65535 Profile 1 Profile 2 5060 10 29 14 SIP Server Information Setup SIP Carrier Choice Define the SIP Carrier Choice Selecting Car...

Page 788: ...entication Password for the SIP Trunk Maximum of 32 characters Profile 1 Profile 2 No Setting 10 68 01 IP Trunk Availability Trunk Type Assign the trunk type as 1 SIP 0 None 1 SIP 2 H 323 3 CCIS 0 10 68 02 IP Trunk Availability Start Port Set the trunk port number to start the assignment from 0 400 0 10 68 03 IP Trunk Availability Number of Ports Set the number of ports to assign from the starting...

Page 789: ...G 711 a law 2 G 711 u law 3 G726 Profile 1 Profile 2 2 US 1 other 84 33 13 FAX Over IP Setup Payload Size Set up the payload size 1 4 10ms base Profile 1 Profile 2 2 20ms 84 33 14 FAX Over IP Setup Jitter Buffer Mode Static mode will use value defined in average jitter buffer Self adjusting automatically adjusts values between minimum and maximum jitter buffers defined 1 Static 2 Self Adjusting Pr...

Page 790: ... 38 relay mode SV9100 original mode Type 2 Pass Through mode PBX compatible mode If Type 2 is selected FAX over IP feature is executed using Program 84 33 settings 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 Profile 1 Profile 2 1 If Program 84 33 01 is disabled Programs 84 33 12 84 33 19 are not valid Also Program 84 33 index must be set to SIP Trunk Operation None ...

Page 791: ...ram 10 03 05 ETU Configuration CLIP Information Announcement allows the Calling Party Number IE in the Setup Message for a call when placed out an ISDN Trunk Calling Party Number CPN Presentation from Station Calling Party Number CPN Presentation from Station allows each unique station or virtual extension 10 digit number representing the DID number of the originating station to be sent out over t...

Page 792: ...unks 25 48 The T1 PRI Interface cannot use trunks 9 16 even if available since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks When using Mobile Extension in a NetLink Network the ISDN PRI must be utilized in the Primary System If fractional PRI has the number of ports changed the Trunk Port number might change if they become split or fit into an empty gap of trunk ports For example if you h...

Page 793: ...call is received the system assigns the lowest trunk number of the ISDN circuit to the incoming call associated with the B Channel When an Outgoing call is placed using the ISDN PRI BRI the system assigns the Trunk and B Channel association according to the chart below This is based on the Trunk to Trunk Group and Trunk Group Priority assignment in Program 14 05 01 Refer to the charts below for ex...

Page 794: ... system is compatible with ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI services BRI services currently supported include Basic BRI Call Control BCC Point to Point BRI Terminal Connection no daisy chaining Multipoint BRI Terminal Connection daisy chaining BRI services require the installation of GCD 2BRIA Each GCD 2BRIA has two BRI circuits The GCD 2BRIA uses a single universal slot Trunk Number Trunk Group Trun...

Page 795: ...tallation of NT1 Network Terminators and interconnecting cabling CO Line Service is not supported ISDN BRI cannot be configured for CO Emulation BRI and DID Callers with Non Matching SPID Numbers This feature allows you to determine whether the system checks the called party number with the SETUP message and the SPID setup Depending on the system programming this can allow DID calls to be received...

Page 796: ... carrier The network carrier must allow the SV9100 to edit the Calling Party Name information SV9100 does not support ISDN sub addressing SV9100 does not support ISDN Network Specific Parameters for the AT T protocol such as SDN Software Defined Network also known as Virtual Private Network Megacom and Megacom800 ...

Page 797: ...n or compatible This feature is not supported with Automatic Transfer This feature is not supported with Unsupervised Conference This feature is only supported with a Manual Transfer This feature is only supported when both trunks are ISDN PRI and the bearer capability of the two trunks meet the same service requirements Trunk to Trunk programming must be enabled for this feature to work Both ISDN...

Page 798: ...CD 2BRIA or GCD 2BRIA with GPZ 2BRIA NT 1 for each BRI locally provided Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL E 911 Compatibility Forced Trunk Disconnect Programmable Function Keys Station Message Detail Recording Transfer ...

Page 799: ...ding is selected in Program 10 03 08 0 Keypad Facility 1 Called Party Number 0 10 03 13 ETU Setup PRTA PKG Setup Loss of Signal Detection Limit If the transmit receive voltage is less than the setting in Program 10 03 13 the system considers this as Loss Of Signal and the PRI does not come up Note that there are different values based on the setting in Program 10 03 12 for the PRI 0 Level 0 lowest...

Page 800: ...ata Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk maximum 16 digits per entry After the above programming is complete a reset of the GCD 2BRIA is required Maximum of 16 characters 1 0 No Setting ISDN PRI Installation Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 10 03 04 ETU Setup PRTA PKG Setup Layer 3 Timer Type Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each CD PRTA This pro...

Page 801: ...te numbering plan 1 10 03 20 ETU Setup PRTA PKG Setup Network Exchange Selection Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN circuit 0 Standard Same as NI 2 1 reserved 2 reserved 3 DMS A211 4 5ESS 5 DMS A233 6 4ESS 7 NI 2 0 10 03 21 ETU Setup PRTA PKG Setup PRI Number of Ports Select the number of ports for the PRI 0 Auto 1 4 Ports 2 8 Ports 3 12 Ports 4 16 Ports 5 20 Ports 0 10 39 01 Fractional Setup E...

Page 802: ...installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 22 09 01 DID Basic Data Setup Expected Number of Digits For each DID Translation Table 1 20 enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the CO eight maximum For example for a table used with 3 digit DID service enter 3 For additional DID Services refer to Direct Inward Dialing DID 1 8 4...

Page 803: ...ce ISDN CLIP Determine if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators should be allowed 0 Off 1 On 0 21 12 01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk maximum 16 digits per entry When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 13 the system sends the calling number for the...

Page 804: ...stem Default 1 Unknown 2 ISDN Plan 3 Data Plan 4 Telex Plan 5 National Standard Plan 6 Private Plan 0 44 05 11 ARS F Route Table Network Specified Parameter Table Define the network specified parameter table for each F Route table 0 16 0 SMDR Dialed Digits for either ISDN BRI or PRI Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 35 02 15 SMDR Output Options CLI DID Number Switching Det...

Page 805: ...xtensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 02 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Caller ID Display Turn Off or On the Caller ID display at an extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 09 03 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Sub Address Identification Define whether or not an extension displays the Caller Sub Address 0 Deny 1 Allow COS 1 15 0...

Page 806: ...ce Two B Channel Transfer Turn On or Off the ability to use the ISDN PRI 2 B Channel Transfer service 0 Off 1 On 0 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Transfer If DISA caller can place outgoing calls through the system refer to Program 20 14 Enable loop supervision for the DISA trunk If DISA caller cannot use the system trunks for outgoing calls enter Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 15 07 ...

Page 807: ...hannel Transfer Turn ON 1 or OFF 0 the ability for an incoming call to be transferred Trunk to Trunk to an outgoing call when 2 B Channel Transfer is used 0 Negative Integer 1 No Edit 0 24 02 09 System Options for Transfer Two B Channel Transfer Retry Timer Enable Disable disconnect Supervision for the system trunks 0 64800 seconds 10 Operation To Perform an ISDN 2 B Channel Transfer 1 Receive or ...

Page 808: ...808 DTI U40 ETU Programming Flowchart for ISDN PRI Answering Calls the GCD PRTA Overlap ...

Page 809: ...5 enter 0 to print Caller ID Number 1 DID Calling Number or 2 Caller ID Name o In 35 02 16 enter 0 to print the trunk port name assignedin 14 01 01 or enter 1 to print the received dialed number In 22 02 01 enter 3 Yes ...

Page 810: ...should the ring cadence change to a unique alarm sound Yes Do you want to change the way PRI calls ring telephones Yes No Trunks Do you want to adjust the gain volume for trunks No Consider using CAP Keys Multiple Directory Numbers or Ring Groups for PRI trunks instead of Direct Trunk Appearance Do you want line keys or CAP Keys for incoming PRI trunks Yes No Finished In 22 04 01 assign extension ...

Page 811: ...08 13 enter 0 to disable calling number display by telco In 20 08 13 enter 1 to enable calling number display by telco Start In 10 03 01 determine the mode of theGCD PRTA 0 not set 1 T Bus No Is the CRC Multi Frame CRC4 used Yes In 10 03 06 determine the length of cable used to connect from the CSU to theGCD PRTA 0 0 40m 1 40 81m 2 81 122m 3 122 162m 4 162 200m Enblock Is the Dial Sending Mode Enb...

Page 812: ...RI trunks to trunk groups This determines available channelsfor PRI trunks Build an outgoing restriction matrix In the default program extensions have full access to all trunks Do you need to restrict certain extensions from placing calls on certain trunks Yes No In 15 06 01 assign extensions to Access Maps Should caller hear DTMF In 14 07 01 for each Access Map select the access options for each ...

Page 813: ...813 ...

Page 814: ... set up Trunk Group Routing B Is the amount of time the system waits before placing the call in a talk state sufficient No Yes In 15 07 01 do not assign function keys as line keys No Should extension users have one button placing of outside calls Yes In 15 07 01 do not assign Trunk Group Access or trunk group keys No Should extension users have one button access to trunk groups for placing calls Y...

Page 815: ...l Rerouting Network Conditions The originating system must have a dial treatment of D019RE where 9 is the ARS trunk access code in the destination system for this feature to work ARS must be enabled in all systems for this feature to work The CCIS Call Rerouting feature is not supported on stations using 3rd party CTI The CCIS Call Rerouting feature is not supported on a station which is controlle...

Page 816: ...m Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s GCD CP10 GPZ IPLE K CCISoIP License 5012 System Version R1 License 0411 System Port License 0300 VoIP Resource License 5103 IP Trunk License 5001 Related Features K CCIS IP ...

Page 817: ...4 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 GCD CP10 Network Setup IP Address Set IP address for GPZ IPLE The IP Address assigned in Program 10 12 01 cannot start with the same leading digits as the IP Address assigned here 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 0 10 10 19 01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection Select type of GPZ IPLE DSP Resource This program ...

Page 818: ... IP Trunk Availability Trunk Type Set trunk type to CCISoIP for interconnecting trunks 0 None 1 SIP 2 H 323 3 CCIS 0 10 68 02 IP Trunk Availability Start Port Set the trunk port number to start the assignment from 0 400 0 10 68 03 IP Trunk Availability Number of Ports Set the number of ports to assign from the starting point set in Program 10 68 02 0 400 0 11 01 01 System Numbering Service Code Cu...

Page 819: ...enter service type for each trunk Trunks 1 200 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 26 01 01 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS Service Enable Disable ARS 0 Disabled ARS service is Off 1 Enabled ARS service is On 0 26 01 06 Automatic Route Selection Service Class of Service Match Access With the...

Page 820: ... 269 and 270 are local exchanges these would be the first three table entries which route according to the settings made in Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 for each of the table entries If the next entry is 2 the system checks no further in this program and routes all other 2xx numbers according to the entries made in Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 for this table entry Dial a maximum ...

Page 821: ...umber 0 100 0 No Route If Service Type 1 in 26 02 Select Trunk Group Number 0 100 Trunk Group Number 0 No Route 101 150 Networking ID If Service Type 2 in 26 02 F Route Time Schedule Not Used 0 500 F Route Table Number F Route Time Schedule Used 0 500 F Route Selection Number 0 26 02 04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS ARS Class of Service For each Dial Analysis Table 1 2000 set the Automatic Route Sel...

Page 822: ...pause the entry would look like D05P1234 This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming Wnn Wait nn seconds P Pause in analog trunk R Redial the initially dialed number including any modifications E End of Dial Treatment All Dial Treatments must end with the E code X When ARS is enabled X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the extension number of the c...

Page 823: ...a lower priority trunk group is used 0 Off No Beep 1 On Beep s 0 44 05 07 ARS F Route Table ARS Class of Service For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the Class of Service used for ARS An extension ARS COS is determined in Program 26 04 01 0 16 0 44 05 08 ARS F Route Table Dial Treatment For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the Dial Tr...

Page 824: ...CP to use for each DSP 0 65534 10021 Programming Example The following example uses the first two priorities of System A to route 10 digit local calls out trunk group one of System B If that fails the call is routed out trunk group one of System A This example assumes the following System A has local trunks 1 8 in trunk group 1 Both systems are already configured for the LAN on which they reside a...

Page 825: ...g setup Set to F Route table 2 2 2 44 02 03 Closed numbering setup Set to use F Route table 1 for intercom calls 1 1 44 05 01 Closed numbering setup Set table 1 first priority to use CCIS trunk group 10 10 10 44 05 09 Closed numbering setup Set table 1 first priority maximum digit length to 3 3 3 44 05 10 Closed numbering setup Set table 1 first priority to remote system point code 2 1 44 05 01 AR...

Page 826: ...s for IP stations and trunks A DSP provides format conversion from circuit switched networks TDM to packet switched networks IP Each voice channel from the circuit switched network is compressed and packetized for transmission over the packet network In the reverse direction each packet is buffered for de jittering decompressed and sent to the circuit switched network Each DSP converts a single sp...

Page 827: ...ack can only be set when the destination party is busy and the calling party hears a busy tone The calling party must hang up after setting CCIS Call Back CCIS Call Back can only be set by pressing a programmed Feature key Softkeys or dialing a service code is not supported CCIS Call Back can only be set from a multiline terminal CCIS Call Back target can only be a multiline terminal The following...

Page 828: ...LE Ethernet port Verified Account Codes for Toll Calls across a CCIS network are not restricted when a trunk access code is added to the number allowing ARS routing through another K CCIS T1 IP networked site This access code typically a 9 precedes the dialed 1 used by the system to identify a long distance call As a result the call is no longer considered long distance and the account code is not...

Page 829: ... P2P CCIS call Standard SIP terminals are not supported for Peer to Peer connection If Program 50 15 04 is set to 0 Disable in system A Peer to Peer is disabled for system A and any remote systems when calling system A When port translation is done through a NAT router Peer to Peer is disabled When RTP encryption is enabled Peer to Peer is disabled SV9100 K CCIS IP to another SV9100 for calls from...

Page 830: ...ing Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 15 05 50 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Peer to Peer Mode On a per station basis enable or disable Peer to Peer mode 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 50 15 04 CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting Connection Method for Terminal Choose the connection method for the DT700 0 Peer to Peer disable 1 Peer to Peer enable 1 84 34 01 VoIPDB DTMF S...

Page 831: ...sing CCIS over IP 0 300 80 84 33 16 FAX Over IP Setup Average Jitter Buffer Setup FAX over IP Codec settings when using CCIS over IP 0 300 120 84 33 17 FAX Over IP Setup Maximum Jitter Buffer Setup FAX over IP Codec settings when using CCIS over IP 0 300 160 84 33 18 FAX Over IP Setup RTP Payload Type Setup FAX over IP Codec settings when using CCIS over IP 97 127 103 84 33 19 FAX Over IP Setup FA...

Page 832: ... Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On the extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller This should be set to Off 0 in the destination system 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension ability to have calls queued if a call rings ...

Page 833: ...cally 1 or Manually 0 receive off hook Signals Allow a busy extension to Automatically 1 or Manually 0 receive off hook signals This setting is to receive incoming call signaling information during call queuing 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Camp On Turn Off or On extension user ability to block callers from dialing to camp on 0 Off 1 On COS 1 1...

Page 834: ...edial is pressed the display indicates REDIAL ABB The user can then press to redial the number displayed or enter an System Speed Dialing bin number to be dialed Press the Redial key repeatedly to scroll through the last 10 numbers dialed Cursor Key Operation By pressing the Left Cursor Key the user can access the Redial and Incoming Call History menus The flow chart below shows the menu access se...

Page 835: ...e 776 to clear the Last Number Dial MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 876 15 02 13 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Redial List Mode Select the type of numbers that are stored in the Redial List Internal and External numbers 0 or External only 1 0 ICM Trunk Extension Trunk Mode 1 Trunk Mode 1 20 08 05 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Dial Number Preview Preset Dial Turn Off or ...

Page 836: ...r lift the handset optional OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 816 The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and dials the last number dialed To check the number saved for Last Number Redial 1 Press Redial or the Left Cursor key once The stored number displays for six seconds The stored number dials out if you Lift the handset Press an ...

Page 837: ...erminal has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference The user hears either trunk dial 9 or Intercom dial tone Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines With Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines an extension user can automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extens...

Page 838: ...Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number For Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines assign trunks to trunk groups This is part of Trunk Group Routing programming Trunk Port 1 400 Priority 1 400 Default Trunks 1 400 assigned to trunk group 1 with priorities equal to the trunk number Trunk 1 Priority 1 Trunk 400 Priority 400 ...

Page 839: ...unk Ports 1 400 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 01 02 Basic Extension Data Setup Outgoing Trunk Line Preference Turn Off or On an Outgoing Trunk Line Preference for extensions 0 Off 1 On 0 15 02 10 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls Enable Idle or Ringing Line Preference for trunk calls Program...

Page 840: ...only works for trunks that do not ring an extension Trunks 1 400 Incoming Group Number for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 1 23 03 01 Universal Answer Auto Answer Let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions When the user lifts the handset they automatically answer the ringing c...

Page 841: ...e the system can provide a warning tone on outgoing trunks calls before the call is disconnected Conditions Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA and Tie Lines Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call discon...

Page 842: ...ervice of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 02 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 03 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing Turn Off or On an e...

Page 843: ...ontains a number of flow charts to help technicians diagnose and resolve problems that may arise during and after the installation of the UNIVERGE SV9100 system Side Tone Auto Setup Per each analog trunk or all analog trunks the most suitable CODEC Filter setting for Program 81 07 and Program 81 17 can be automatically adjusted using Programs 90 68 01 and 90 68 02 During the trunk measurement proc...

Page 844: ...844 None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ...

Page 845: ...e a telephone meeting without leaving the office The GCD CP10 provides two blocks of 32 conference circuits or three blocks of 32 conference circuits when the modem function is not used allowing each block to have any number of internal or external parties conferenced up to the block limit of 32 Conditions None Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required ...

Page 846: ...ity to use Meet Me Conference and Paging 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 31 01 04 System Options for Internal External Paging Privacy Release Time Set the Privacy Release Time After the user initiates Meet Me Conference the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation 0 64800 seconds 90 Operation Meet Me External Conference To make a Meet Me External Conference Multiline Terminal ...

Page 847: ... the handset 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone code 0 8 You connect to the other parties Meet Me Internal Conference To make a Meet Me Internal Conference Multiline Terminal 1 While on a call press Conf softkey 2 Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the zone 4 When a co worker answers your pag...

Page 848: ...lash twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add To join a Meet Me Internal Conference 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker or lift the handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 863 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 864 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key Program 1...

Page 849: ...r the Page they can join in the conversation Conditions With Meet Me Paging Transfer a user can page a co worker and have the call automatically transfer when the co worker answers the page An extension access to internal and external page zones affects the Meet Me Paging feature Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging operation Default Settings Enabled System Availability Termin...

Page 850: ...et Me Answer to External Paging Customize the Service Codes used for meet me answer to external paging service access MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 865 11 12 23 Service Code Setup for Service Access Meet Me Answer in Same Paging Group Customize the Service Codes used for meet me answer in same paging group service access MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 863 15 07 01 Programmable Function ...

Page 851: ...Internal Paging for each extension If allowed extension can place and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements If denied extensions can make but not receive All Call Internal Paging announcements If combined Paging zones should be restricted as well change the internal page zone group in Program 31 07 01 to 0 0 Deny 1 Allow 0 Operation Meet Me External Page To make a Meet Me External Page 1 ...

Page 852: ... Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the zone OR 1 At the multiline terminal press the Internal Paging Zone key Program 15 07 or SC 851 21 zone 2 Announce the zone To join a Meet Me Internal Page 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker or pick up the handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 863 if your extension is i...

Page 853: ...in the facility Conditions An extension user can set up a conference with their current call and up to 31 other inside parties An extension user can Page a co worker and meet with them on a page zone With External Paging an extension user can broadcast an announcement over paging equipment connected to external paging zones Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other mult...

Page 854: ...X1 Relationships between AUX number and Relay number are as follows AUX2 Relay2 AUX1 Relay1 1 11 12 21 Service Code Setup for Service Access Meet Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging Group Customize the Service Codes used for meet me answer to specified internal paging group service access MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 864 11 12 22 Service Code Setup for Service Access Meet Me Answer to Ex...

Page 855: ... ability to use Meet Me Conference and Paging 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups i e Page Zones 0 64 0 No Setting 0 for IP Station 1 for TDM Station 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Paging Receiving Allow Prevent All Call Internal Paging for each extension If allowed ext...

Page 856: ...ll 4 From a multiline terminal when the paged party answers press Transfer or the Transfer softkey OR From a single line telephone when the paged party answers hang up The party is transferred To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker or pick up handset OR At single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 865 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone 0 8 T...

Page 857: ...lephone when the paged party answers hang up The party is transferred To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker or pick up handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 863 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 864 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key ...

Page 858: ... Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress Conditions When Memo Dial calls out it outdials the entire stored number Memo Dial does not automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number Only one number can be stored at a time If a number is already stored in Memo Dial and you are on an internal or external call and the Dial Memo Key ...

Page 859: ...ial number you want to store 3 Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation To call a stored Memo Dial number 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the Memo Dial key Program 15 07 or SC 851 31 3 Press Speaker The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number OR Press the line key The stored number dials out To check to see the stored Memo Dial number 1 Do ...

Page 860: ...ey can be used to check the number of messages in voice mail and call the voice mail to listen to the messages If no Voice Mail Programmable Function Key is defined Program 15 07 01 code 77 the telephone Message Waiting LED flashes to indicate new messages This option is not available with a networked voice mail the voice mail must be local Refer to the Voice Mail Integration Analog feature for th...

Page 861: ...am 15 02 38 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Cycle For example if a message waiting was set before any of these programs were changed the lamp remains the same until the message waiting is set again If both Voice Mail Message and Message Wait indication are set the color set for Message Wait overrides the color used for Voice Mail Message indication When the system has the Hotel Motel license 0007 the...

Page 862: ... Service Code Setup Message Waiting Customize the message waiting Service Codes used to set message waiting when a busy or ring back signal is heard 0 9 Maximum of one digit 0 15 02 28 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Color Determine whether an extension Message Waiting Lamp lights Green or Red when a message is received 0 Green 1 Red 1 15 02 35 Multiline Telephone Basic D...

Page 863: ...ort 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Message Waiting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to leave Message Waiting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 80 01 01 48 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Set repeat count for tone 16 Lockout 0 endless Refer to Table 2 31 Service Tone Setup Defaults Program 80 01 01 80 01 02 48 Service Tone Setup Bas...

Page 864: ...iting This includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have left for you 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 873 3 Hang up To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 871 3 Dial...

Page 865: ...been heard CHECK MESSAGE name Message Waiting requests left at your telephone by your co workers 3 Press VOL or VOL to scroll through your display 4 When you find the message you want to answer press Speaker You can do one of the following Go to your Voice Mail mailbox Listen to the new General Message Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting ...

Page 866: ...uring an intercom call with the handset on hook you hear three beep tones and the LED is on solid This also occurs on an outside call When using the Handset Transmission Cutoff key during an intercom call with the handset off hook you hear three beep tones through the handset and the Handset Transmission Cutoff and MIC keys flash This also occurs on an outside call When Handset Transmission Cutoff...

Page 867: ...setting for multiline terminal handsfreemicrophone after being disconnected and reconnected If set to 0 the microphone is always off when the terminal is reconnected If set to 1 the microphone remains in the same state it was in when the terminal is reconnected 0 Off 1 On 1 Operation To mute your telephone handset or Handsfree microphone while on a call 1 Press MIC This only turns off the Handsfre...

Page 868: ...00 feature is available with Version 1000 or higher Refer to the SV9100 System Hardware Manual for a complete list of supported packages Hardware Migration license 0048 is required to migrate SV8100 hardware to the SV9100 SV8100 licenses will not migrate After an SV8100 to SV9100 database conversion there will be no VoIP Daughter Board and GCD CP10 present InMail messages and recordings will not m...

Page 869: ...e Line Telephone Interface Daughter Board Yes CD 8LCA 8 Single Line Telephone Interface Yes PZ 8LCE 8 Single Line Telephone Interface Daughter Board Yes CD LTA Combo Card 8 Digital 2 Single Line and an optional PZ 4COTE or PZ 2BRIA can be Installed Yes CD 4COTA 4 Loop Ground Start Trunk Yes PZ 4COTE 4 Loop Ground Start Trunk Daughter Board Yes CD 8COTBH 8 Loop Ground Start Yes CD 2BRIA 2 Basic Rat...

Page 870: ... 50 The conversion of IP system communication mode the peer to peer mode does not support conversion It is changed to the extension terminal based setting After conversion completion Please set Program 15 05 50 10 26 03 15 05 50 The conversion of IP system communication mode the peer to peer mode does not support conversion It is changed to the extension terminal based setting After conversion com...

Page 871: ...nk Codec setting does not support conversion Please set Program 84 35 for every type 84 31 19 84 31 25 84 36 and 84 38 The conversion of VOIP echo canceler setting does not support conversion Please set Program 84 36 and 84 38 84 31 26 84 31 36 84 38 The conversion of VOIP echo canceler setting does not support conversion Please set Program 84 38 for every type 84 26 84 26 The VOIP package does no...

Page 872: ... 84 19 56 84 33 08 84 19 57 84 33 09 84 19 58 84 33 10 84 19 61 84 33 05 84 21 21 84 34 01 84 21 42 84 33 01 84 25 31 84 34 01 84 25 32 84 33 01 84 27 08 84 35 04 84 27 09 84 35 05 84 27 10 84 37 02 84 27 11 84 37 03 84 27 12 84 36 02 84 27 13 84 36 01 84 27 15 84 37 04 84 27 16 84 37 01 84 27 17 84 37 05 10 36 10 36 10 28 04 10 36 02 10 30 02 10 36 03 10 30 03 10 36 04 10 30 04 10 29 20 10 12 06 ...

Page 873: ... 3 Self adjusting 84 19 17 84 21 22 84 24 17 84 25 17 84 31 08 0 Disable 1 Line E C 2 Acou E C 1 Line E C 2 Acou E C 184 31 02 84 31 37 0 disable 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Echo Path Mode 3 Echo Path Auto Detect 1 Enable Mode 84 21 19 0 G 711_PT 0 G 711_PT 1 G 723_PT 2 G 729_PT 2 G 729_PT 3 G 722_PT 84 21 20 3 G 722_PT 4 G 726_PT 4 G 726_PT 5 iLBC 84 11 28 0 G 711_PT 1 G 723_PT 2 G 729_PT 0 G 711_PT 2 G...

Page 874: ...7 12 5db 57 12 5db 14 01 03 58 13 0db 14 01 04 59 13 5db 14 01 05 60 14 0db 15 02 29 61 14 5db 31 06 04 62 15 0db 31 06 05 63 15 5db 32 03 02 32 03 03 44 07 01 44 07 02 44 07 03 44 07 04 47 01 18 47 01 19 47 10 02 80 01 04 15 05 18 0 Disable 0 Disable 1 Group1 1 Enable 2 Group2 3 Group3 4 Group4 5 Group5 6 Group6 7 Group7 8 Group8 9 Group9 10 Group10 35 01 01 0 Not set 3 LAN 4 CTA CTU 0 Not set 3 ...

Page 875: ...s required for the trunks used for this feature The Mobile extension internal extension number Proxy Port is linked to a speed dial bin to provide integration If all external trunks are busy when a call is made to the mobile extension ringback tone is presented giving the impression the phone is ringing A DID is directed to the Mobile Extension internal extension number Proxy Port and to provide i...

Page 876: ...ne telephone port the service codes used are as per a single line telephone port Any feature not listed should be assumed to be not supported Hold Transfer Incoming Ring Group member Department Group member DID Toll Restriction Class of Service DSS Keys Though DSS keys are available for the Mobile Extension they cannot provide an exact indication of busy status if for example the Mobile Extension ...

Page 877: ...r Each Extension Group 11 11 26 Yes Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group 11 11 28 Yes Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group 11 11 29 Yes DND Setup for Each Extension Group 11 11 30 Yes DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group 11 11 31 Yes Pilot Group Withdrawing 11 11 35 Yes Station Speed Dial Number Entry 11 11 39 Yes Auto Attendant 11 11 44 Yes Bypass Call 11 12 01 Yes Ye...

Page 878: ...Group 11 12 25 Yes Yes Call Pickup for Specified Group 11 12 26 Yes Yes Call Pickup 11 12 27 Yes Yes Call Pickup for Another Group 11 12 28 Yes Yes Direct Extension Call Pickup 11 12 29 Yes Park Hold 11 12 31 Yes Answer for Park Hold 11 12 32 Yes Group Hold 11 12 33 Yes Answer for Group Hold 11 12 34 Yes Personal Extension Park 11 12 35 Yes Door Box Access Door Box can also ring the Mobile Extensi...

Page 879: ...l Restriction 11 14 09 Yes Yes Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction Hotel 11 14 10 Yes Yes Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension 11 14 11 Yes Yes Check in 11 14 12 Yes Yes Check out 11 14 13 Yes Yes Room Status Change for Own Extension 11 14 14 Yes Room Status Change for Other Extension 11 14 15 Yes Yes Room Status Output 11 14 16 Yes Hotel Room Monitor 11 14 17 Yes Yes Although some f...

Page 880: ...the Transferring Phone is presented to the Mobile Extension Transferred Trunk Call without CID Transferred before inter digit timeout CPN of Mobile Extension is presented to the Mobile Extension Transferred after inter digit timeout CPN of the Transferring Phone s CPN is presented to the Mobile Extension Only when the outbound trunks are ISDN or SIP trunks ISDN will need to accept the inbound Call...

Page 881: ...tect Level selected in Program 80 03 01 The Mobile Extension uses the to perform a flash so any service codes which begin with must be changed Programs 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 To provide a proper disconnect Disconnect Supervision is required for the trunks used for this feature When an entry is made in Program 15 22 01 for a Mobile Extension ports are reserved for Mobile Extension usage in groups ...

Page 882: ...e Cell Phone user continues to ring over the time set in Program 22 01 12 the system answers the call as a normal Mobile Extension call Callback to Cell Phone will not proceed and no retry is made if all trunks are busy when trying to callback Callback trunk routing follows Program 15 22 03 setting When set 0 Normal trunk access code ARS also can be used If Mobile Extension does not answer the Cal...

Page 883: ... SMDR for Callback is tied to the extension number of Mobile Extension If the user calls a Mobile Extension port during while using the Callback to Cell Phone feature the caller hears a busy tone The Callback to Cell Phone feature can be used on the K CCIS network Netlink can be used for the Callback line but not for the incoming line Default Settings No Mobile Extensions are configured System Ava...

Page 884: ...on Customize the service code for Setup and Entry 11 12 Service Code Setup for Service Access Customize the service codes for Service Access 11 13 Service Code Setup for Contact Centre Customize the service codes which are used with the Contact Centre 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Dialing Data For the bin number defined in Program 15 22 01 for the Mobile Extension enter the external...

Page 885: ...Hold ring tone to the Mobile Extension on answer after which the Mobile Extension user presses to connect the call For each Mobile Extension number select whether the user needs to use DTMF confirmation before a call is answered Until the is pressed the call is treated as not being answered 0 Always 1 On analog line 2 Never 0 15 22 03 Mobile Extension Setup Trunk Access Code Select whether the Nor...

Page 886: ...Party Number maximum 16 digits per entry The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial in number When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 12 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21 13 If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Program 21 12 and Program 21 13 the system sends the data in...

Page 887: ...t when calling a Mobile Extension the Progress Tone is played to the caller Refer to Table 2 31 Service Tone Setup Defaults Program 80 01 01 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Tone 57 Off Hook Beep Tone Headset Earpiece ringing Tone If required change the tone heard when a Mobile Extension user goes off hook to answer a call prior to pressing The system must be reset for this change to take affect Refer ...

Page 888: ...or this change to take affect 0 15 detect level 0 10dBm 0 to 25dBm 15 detect level 1 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 2 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 3 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10...

Page 889: ...ogram 13 04 03 1 Internal Dial Mode 1 9 0 P R Maximum 24 Characters 2 Incoming Ring Group 0 100 IRG Number P Pause R Recall Additional Digits when using ISDN functionality No Setting 14 01 30 Basic Trunk Data Setup Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Enable Disable Flexible ringing on each Trunk port base 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 15 22 01 Mobile Extension Setup Mobile Extension Target Setup For each Mobile ...

Page 890: ...o access the Mobile Extension Proxy Port However it must be noted that the 0 Hang Up code must be used prior to terminating any call e g transfer hang up etc as analog trunks do not provide Disconnect Supervision Placing an Intercom Call to a Mobile Extension 1 Lift the handset or press SPK 2 Dial the extension number assigned to the Mobile Extension If the Mobile Extension is turned off incoming ...

Page 891: ...nswer the call This step is required when using analog trunks for the Mobile Extension feature Sending a Flash from the Mobile Extension 1 While on a conversation a hook flash is returned by dialing from the Mobile Extension Internal Dial Tone After Hang Up 1 When a call is finished disconnect the call and receive internal dial tone by dialing 0 Placing Retrieving a Call on Hold from the Mobile Ex...

Page 892: ...ension or Off Premise number 5 Dial 0 from Mobile Extension only 6 Hang up To activate Call Forward Follow Me 1 When activating Call Forwarding From the Mobile Extension Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension If the Caller ID of the Mobile Extension matches the Speed Dial bin entry Program 13 04 and 15 22 internal dial tone is heard by the Mobile Extension user OR When activ...

Page 893: ...am 22 01 12 Answer time from Mobile Extension 3 seconds Program 20 01 16 Mobile Extension Callback Duration time 15 seconds Program 20 18 01 Extension Dial Tone Time 30 seconds 1 Call the system Trk1 from the cell phone setting as a mobile extension Ex 150 2 The Cell Phone user hangs up within 3 seconds before system answers 3 System makes the Callback to the cell phone 4 Answer the cell phone wit...

Page 894: ...oes not send any DTMF 1 Call the system Trk1 from the cell phone setting as a mobile extension Ex 150 2 The Cell Phone user hangs up within 3 seconds before system answers 3 System makes the Callback to the cell phone 4 The Cell Phone answers within 15 seconds 5 The Cell phone hears a dial tone but does not send any DTMF within 30 seconds 6 System disconnects the call ...

Page 895: ...nks Ground Start Trunks can be connected to the system Ground and Loop Start Trunks can be mixed in the system per trunk Ground Start Trunks are provided with line supervision to reduce call collisions Loop Start Trunks Loop Start Trunks can be connected to the UNIVERGE SV9100 system Loop Start is assigned per trunk at the associated blade Ground Start and Loop Start Trunks can be mixed in the sys...

Page 896: ... After answering a VRS DISA trunk the system waits this time for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password If the caller fails to dial during this time the system drops the call 0 64800 seconds 10 34 01 02 E M Tie Line Basic Setup Receive Dial Type for E M Tie Line For DID and tie trunks set the trunk signaling 0 DP 1 DTMF 1 Loop Start Ground Start Trunks Program Number Program Name ...

Page 897: ...s 650ms 20pps 500ms 1 Pattern B Pattern B 10pps 800ms 20pps 800ms 1 Pattern B 81 10 02 COT Initial Data Setup Prepause Time Selection Specify the loop open time for a hookflash signal sent to the CO or PBX when Recall on a multiline terminal is pressed A single line telephone generates a hookflash to the CO or PBX line when a single line telephone hookflash is assigned 1 13 1 13 seconds 0 No Setti...

Page 898: ...red Trunks 1 400 1 57 15 5 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 32 0dB 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Transfer Enable loop supervision for each Tie Line that should be able to place outgoing calls 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 14 02 01 Analog Trunk Data Setup Signaling Type DP DTMF Set the outgoing signaling type for the tie trunk To set incoming signaling refer to Program 34 01 02 0 Dial Pulse 10 PPS...

Page 899: ...ardless of this program setting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 14 01 Class of Service Options for DISA E M First Digit Absorption Delete First Digit Dialed For Tie Lines turn Off or On the ability to absorb ignore the first incoming digit Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3 and 4 digit Tie Line service This option does not apply to DISA 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 14 02 Class of Service Option...

Page 900: ...ISA Turn Off or On a DISA caller ability to use the Call Forward service codes Program 11 11 01 through Program 11 11 05 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 14 11 Class of Service Options for DISA E M DISA Tie Trunk Barge In Turn Off or On a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Barge In 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 14 12 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Retrieve Park Hold Turn Off or On a DISA caller abi...

Page 901: ...tion for Common Speed Dialing numbers 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 21 05 10 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for Group Speed Dials For the Toll Restriction Class you select Enable Disable Code Restriction for Group Speed Dialing numbers 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 21 05 11 Toll Restriction Class Intercom Call Restriction For the Toll Restriction Class you select Enable Disable Intercom Call Restriction If enab...

Page 902: ...e should send dial tone to the calling system after the call is set up Disable if the Tie Line should not send dial tone 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 34 01 05 E M Tie Line Basic Setup System Toll Restriction Determine if an incoming Tie Line call should be subject to Toll Restriction 0 No Off 1 Yes On 0 34 02 01 E M Tie Line Class of Service Assign the Tie Line Class of Service 1 15 Use Program 20 ...

Page 903: ...34 07 01 E M Tie Line Timer First Digit Pause E M Immediate Start Define the First Digit Pause E M Immediate Start timer 0 64800 seconds 3 34 07 02 E M Tie Line Timer First Digit Pause E M Wink Start Define the First Digit Pause E M Wink Start timer 0 64800 seconds 0 34 07 03 E M Tie Line Timer First Digit Pause LD Trunk Define the First Digit Pause LD Trunk timer 0 64800 seconds 3 34 07 04 E M Ti...

Page 904: ...m 0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 2 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 3 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm...

Page 905: ...m 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 Type 1 5 2 2dBm 80 03 05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward Twist Level Define the forward twist level for DTMF Tone Receiver 0 9 1dB 10dB Type 1 ...

Page 906: ...30dBm 15 detect level 1 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 2 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 Type 1 DT 15 25dBm Type 2 BT 15 25dBm Type 3 RBT 15 25dBm Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 03 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup S N Ratio Define the S N ratio for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 4 0dB 20dB Type 1 DT 4 20dB Type 2 BT 4 20dB Type 3 RBT 4 20dB Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No 0 255 30 3...

Page 907: ...pe 4 Type 5 0 80 04 08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Minimum Time Define the off minimum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 1 255 30 30 7680 ms Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 12 300 ms Type 3 RBT 83 2520ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Maximum Time Define the off maximum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 255 30 30 7680 ms Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 ...

Page 908: ...l Setup Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection Specify the time after the incoming signal from another system is detected before the acknowledge signal is sent out Wink Start 1 15 130ms 1950ms 0 No Setting Delay 1 15 30ms 450ms 0 No Setting Wink Start 3 390ms Delay 3 90ms 81 11 06 Tie Line Initial Setup Loop Off Guard Time Selection Assign the loop off guard time to prevent noise that could cause t...

Page 909: ...ognition Time Selection Specify the minimum time before a disconnected circuit can be accessed again 1 15 0 1 1 5 seconds 0 No Setting 3 0 3 seconds 81 11 12 Tie Line Initial Setup Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection Specify the signal detection time for release of a Tie Line after a disconnect signal is received from the distant Central Office or PBX 1 14 50 700 ms 15 No Limit 0 No Setti...

Page 910: ...ial not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music on Hold feature of telecommunications systems NEC Enterprise Solutions hereby disclaim any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Conditions A maximum of 97 Music on Hold sources are possible 96 from PGD 2 U10 ports and one from the connector on the GCD CP10 External music on hold source for internal calls is pro...

Page 911: ... MOH External MOH Service Tone or VMDB If set to 1 Program 14 08 01 must be set to 0 or 1 0 Internal MOH 1 External MOH 2 Service Tone 3 VMDB 2 10 04 02 Music on Hold Setup Music on Hold Tone Selection When Program 10 04 01 is set to Internal MOH define the music that is played for Music on Hold When Item 1 is 0 1 Download File1 2 Download File2 3 Download File3 When Item 1 is 1 2 or 3 1 100 VRS M...

Page 912: ...of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 07 02 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Changing the Music on Hold Tone Turn Off or On an extension user ability to change the Music on Hold tone 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 1 15 1 22 11 09 DID Translation Number Conversion Music On Hold So...

Page 913: ...the PGD 2 U10 ADP from the system delete the type setting and with the jumper straps positioned correctly in the PGD 2 U10 ADP reconnect the module to the system Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual for the jumper strap settings 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10 DSS Console 11 Not Used 0 11 06 01 ACI...

Page 914: ...lers connect to ACI software ports by dialing the group pilot number set in Program 11 08 ACI Ports 1 96 ACI Groups 1 16 ACI Port Group Priority 01 1 1 02 1 2 96 1 96 Refer to Analog Communications Interface ACI for additional information 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number The following features require that the system tones listed below be changed to match the table After changing thes...

Page 915: ...915 Communications Interface feature for more ...

Page 916: ...916 ...

Page 917: ...917 Operation None ...

Page 918: ...ch can be used These characters are available with any option which allows Name Storing Speed Dial System Group Station One Touch Keys Extension Name Trunk Naming Conditions Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing Single line extensions cannot program names If a name is not assigned to the Extension Virtual Extension it does not show in the Extension Directory Extension Direct...

Page 919: ...ine 400 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name Define the extension virtual extension name Maximum of 12 characters STA 101 Ext 101 STA 102 Ext 102 etc 20 09 02 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Caller ID Display Turn Off or On the Caller ID display at an extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 21 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Extension Name Turn Off or On a...

Page 920: ...e directory 0 Not Listed 1 Listed COS 1 15 1 Operation To program your extension name 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 800 OR Press the Extension Name Change key Program 15 07 or SC 851 55 3 Press Hold 4 Enter the name Your name can be up to 12 digits maximum 5 Press Hold 6 Press Speaker to hang up To program any extension name 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 800 OR Press the Extension Name Change key Program 15 07 ...

Page 921: ...rs W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters π Σ Ω Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space Feature Clear the character entry one character at a time when using service code or function key Recall Clear the character entry one cha...

Page 922: ... Inward Line DIL Universal Night Answer UNA Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers With UNA an employee can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key or use Universal Answer to pick up the call Only ring groups calls can be used with Universal Night Answer For more on setting up Universal Answer refer to Central Office Calls Answering You may als...

Page 923: ...d Ring Group programming entry is available for each Night Service mode modes 1 8 Also Universal Answer allows an extension user to pick up a Universal Night Answer UNA call Mode Keys can be assigned as required for DSS Consoles With Universal Night Answer outside calls can ring External Paging Zones Programmable Function Keys simplify activating Night Service The relay circuits 5 8 are on the PGD...

Page 924: ...al Answer Customize the service code 0 used to manually answer a Universal Night Answer MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 872 11 12 50 Service Code Setup for Service Access General Purpose Relay Define the service code used for turning the general purpose relay on and off MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 880 12 01 01 Night Mode Function Setup Manual Night Mode Switching Turn Off or On an exte...

Page 925: ...Monday 03 Tuesday 04 Wednesday 05 Thursday 06 Friday 07 Saturday 01 Sunday default Time Pattern 2 02 Monday default Time Pattern 1 03 Tuesday default Time Pattern 1 04 Wednesday default Time Pattern 1 05 Thursday default Time Pattern 1 06 Friday default Time Pattern 1 07 Saturday default Time Pattern 2 12 04 01 Holiday Night Service Switching Assign one of the 10 Time Patterns to holidays Days and...

Page 926: ...2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 Incoming and Outgoing access 7 Incoming access outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Trunk Access Maps 1 400 Access Maps 1 400 Trunk Ports 1 400 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 1...

Page 927: ...nt Night Service modes for ANA assign extensions to Ring Groups For each extension in the Ring Groups 1 100 indicate in Program 22 06 01 if trunk should Ring 1 or Not Ring 0 Maximum of eight digits Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment To have trunks ring exten...

Page 928: ... 2 Mode 4 Press Speaker or hang up To activate Night Service by using programmable keys 1 Press Night Service key Program 15 07 01 or SC 851 09 Mode code number below 1 Day 1 Mode 2 Night 1 Mode 3 Midnight 1 Mode 4 Rest 1 Mode 5 Day 2 Mode 6 Night 2 Mode 7 Midnight 2 Mode 8 Rest 2 Mode To transfer a call to the Universal Answer External Page zones 1 Place the CO call on hold and dial the Transfer ...

Page 929: ...vice code or press a Programmable Function Key to send Off Hook Signaling to the called telephone Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode The Off Hook Signal can be muted ringing no off hook ringing or a beep in the handset based on the caller s programming Off Hook Ringing Use this option to enable or disable an extension Off Hook Signaling for incoming calls If enabled Off Hook Signaling occurs norma...

Page 930: ...the BLF display for Hotline and Reverse Voice Over Refer to the features Hotline and Reverse Voice Over for additional information You cannot send off hook signals to an extension that is already receiving a voice announcement An extension user can store the Off Hook Signaling Service Code 709 under a One Touch Key to provide quick Off Hook Signaling access An extension set as Operator in Program ...

Page 931: ... beep in handset 5 Speaker Handset Beep DID DNIS and DIL trunks can use any of the options normal ring group trunks can use only option 0 or 1 0 Muted Off Hook Ringing 1 No Off Hook Ringing 2 Not Used 3 Beep in Speaker SP 4 Beep in Handset HS 5 Speaker Handset Beep 5 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for off hook Signaling code 33 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851...

Page 932: ...orker 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 18 06 Service Tone Timers Interval of Call Waiting Tone Set the time between off hook Signaling alerts 0 64800 seconds 10 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Refer to Table 2 39 Customize the system basic tones and system 31 Service Tone service tones The system must be reset for the changes to take affect Setup Defaults Program 80 01 01 80 01 02 Service Tone Se...

Page 933: ...nal call 1 When Off Hook Signaling is heard in the receiver press the Flash Key to answer the call The first call is placed on hold 2 Press the Flash Key again to toggle between the two calls If the single line phone hangs up with the active call the other call on hold rings back to the single line ...

Page 934: ...s Station Speed Dial bins The stored Flash may be helpful to access features of the connected Telco PBX or Centrex Conditions One Touch keys provide a Busy Lamp Field BLF When a multiline terminal user is on a call they can transfer to another station by pressing a DSS key for that station It is not necessary to press Transfer to transfer to another station using a DSS key When a multiline termina...

Page 935: ... the service code default 851 to assign 2 digit function codes to the Function keys MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 851 20 13 18 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Programmable Function Key Programming General Level Turn Off or On an extension user ability to program General function keys using Service Code 851 by default Refer to Program 20 07 10 for Service Code 852 0 Off 1 On COS 1 ...

Page 936: ...f the digits stored in steps 3 and 4 cannot exceed 24 Valid entries are 0 9 and To enter a pause press MIC To store a Flash press Redial c Press Hold d Press Speaker For Speed Dial System Group a Dial 813 to store a Speed Dial System dialing number OR Dial 814 to store a Speed Dial Group dialing number b Dial Speed Dial number storage code e g 001 c Press Hold d Press Speaker For Central Office Ca...

Page 937: ...Press Speaker Checking the One Touch Keys To check the function of a One Touch key 1 Press the Help key 2 Press the One Touch key The stored function displays Repeat this step to check additional keys 3 Press the Exit key ...

Page 938: ...ore additional callers hear busy tone The operator extension cannot be a CAR Key or virtual extension When dialing 0 from the in skin Voice Mail across CCIS and CCISoIP it follows what is in the operator set up Extensions and trunks can be assigned to an operator group A call to an operator that is busy rolls to the next operator in the operator group Default Settings Extension 101 is an operator ...

Page 939: ... not assign an extension in Program 90 11 01 system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option Maximum of eight digits 200 20 35 01 Extension s Operator Setting Assign an extension to an operator group 0 15 0 20 36 01 Trunk s Operator Setting Allow the user to select Operator Group per trunk 0 15 0 Not assigned 0 20 37 01 Operator Extension Group Setup Define the initial operator exten...

Page 940: ... maximum loop resistance between a GCD 4DIOPA and an Off Premise Extension Single Line Telephone is 1600ohms including single line telephone set resistance The GCD 4DIOPA has a built in ringer RSG This blade supports Synchronous Ringing and detects Dial Pulse DTMF tones The GCD 4DIOPA does not support an interface to a Voice Mail unit Default Settings None System Availability Terminals Single Line...

Page 941: ... should be able to use Call Forwarding Centrex 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 144 0 Common When GPZ BS10 is installed 81 144 are available 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type Select the type of dialing the connected telephone uses For the UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless telep...

Page 942: ...ata Setup Answer On Hook when Holding SLT Enable Disable Answer on hook when Holding for SLT 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes 1 15 03 09 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Function For External Module Enable Disable the Caller ID FSK signal for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd Party vendor telephone with Caller ID display Important If voice mail is used this setting must be disabled fo...

Page 943: ...its received Type 1 The system passes the received digits from the single line telephone to the trunk immediately If the single line telephone has a Last Number Dial key without a pause this key may not be able to use the Last Number Dial key with the Type 1 setting When using a third party external paging device set this option to 1 In addition set Program 20 03 04 to 1 These programs must be set...

Page 944: ... Continued Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 15 01 Ring Cycle Setup Normal Incoming Call on Trunk Define the ring cycle for Incoming Internal calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 2 20 15 03 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Internal Call Define the incoming internal call ringing cycles for each ring type Ringing Cycle 1 13 12 20 15 05 Ring Cycle Setup DID DDI...

Page 945: ...25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 to...

Page 946: ...to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 Type 1 5 2 2dBm 80 03 05 DTMF To...

Page 947: ...Define the no tone time for the Call Progress 1 255 60 7680ms Type 2 BT Tone Detector The formula is 30 30N When set to N 1 it means 30 132 3990ms Type 3 RBT 30 1 60 132 3990ms When set to N 255 it means Type 4 Type 5 30 30 255 7680 0 82 11 01 LCA Initial Setup Bounce Protect Time Specify a time for detection of a valid 0ff Hook indication that is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of ...

Page 948: ...948 Operation Normal call handling procedures for single line telephones apply ...

Page 949: ...Call Refer to Paging Internal for more on setting up Combined Paging In addition you can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key Using the External Page Function Key when an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed it includes both the external zones and the assigned internal zone s If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group the announcement is ma...

Page 950: ...ot pass voice to a trunk used for paging until the interdigit timer expires Program 21 01 03 If a Central Office CO trunk port is used for external paging a Multiline Terminal with an AP A R Unit installed does not provide a speech path to the paging system Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s GCD 8DLCA GCD 16DLCA or GCD LTA for PGD 2 U10 ADP PGD 2...

Page 951: ...igits 880 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function keys for External Paging zones 19 zone and External All Call Page 20 If required define a function key for a multiline terminal to use the general purpose relay 51 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of S...

Page 952: ...a separate entry for each External Paging Speaker ExternalPagingSpeaker Zones 1 9 0 No Ringing No 1 Ringing Yes 0 31 06 01 External Speaker Control Broadcast Splash Tone before Paging Paging Start Tone Enable Disable splash tone before Paging over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement 0 No Tone None 1 Splash Tone 2 Chime Tone 2 31 0...

Page 953: ...ones or 20 for External All Call Paging 2 Make announcement OR 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker or pick up the handset OR At single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code 1 8 or 0 for All Call OR Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal P...

Page 954: ...uring paging VRS External paging stops If an invalid VRS number is dialed or there is no recorded VRS greeting the caller hears an error tone Paging External VRS will not play the starting and ending tone if enabled If the starting and ending tones are needed they must be recorded in the VRS message itself After the recorded VRS message is finished the paging telephone hears a busy tone When using...

Page 955: ...etup In case of normal Paging via External speaker Service code Paging group number 0 all 1 8 In case of VRS Paging via External speaker Service code Paging group number 0 all 1 8 VRS message number 001 100 MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 803 20 07 13 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS Record VRS Msg Operation Turn Off or On an extension user ability to record erase and listen to...

Page 956: ...ch key for External Paging zone 2 to play VRS greeting number 099 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 7 5 1 3 Press Line Key to be programmed 4 Dial 0 1 Function Code for DSS One Touch Key 5 5 Dial 7 0 3 2 0 9 9 6 Press Speaker When using the Paging External VRS feature FC 20 External All Call Paging code cannot be used as a programmable function key ...

Page 957: ...the external zones only Conditions Internal Paging does not require a PGD 2 U10 ADP A maximum of 50 extensions is supported for Internal or All Call Paging Group A maximum of 50 TDM extensions are supported for Internal or All Call Paging Group A maximum of 50 IP extensions are supported for Internal or All Call Paging Group A system must have at least one extension port idle to make an Internal P...

Page 958: ...must be assigned to an Internal Page Group Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones Required Component s None Related Features Meet Me Paging Meet Me Paging Transfer Paging External Programmable Function Keys Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 11 12 19 Service Code Setup for Servic...

Page 959: ...m Options for Internal External Paging Page Announcement Duration Set the maximum allowable duration for a Paging announcement External Paging only 0 64800 seconds 1200 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number Assign extensions to Internal Paging Zones An extension must be assigned to a 2 digit zone to access any 2 digit zone Internal Page Zones 0 1 9 00 01 64 0 64 0 ...

Page 960: ... Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page is announced as an External Page only 3 Make an announcement 4 Press Speaker to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 64 Dialing 0 or 0...

Page 961: ...all remains in the park orbit until it is answered Programmable Function Key and Service Code Available for Personal Park The Personal Park feature is enhanced by using a Programmable Function Key or service code 3 digit or 1 digit to place a call in Personal Park This option is available for multiline terminals single line sets and UNIVERGE SV9100 Wireless telephones and can be used for analog or...

Page 962: ...rk calls without using Hold or Transfer Call Park Step Call is supported in the local system only A parked call cannot be retrieved from Hold Dial Tone Second dial tone When a call is parked from a virtual extension the virtual extension is released When parking a call from a virtual extension Programs 15 02 21 and 15 18 01 must be set to 1 Park Group assignment is by the terminal extension not th...

Page 963: ...held caller hears a busy tone This feature does not work when calling a Networked or virtual extension If an extension already has a call in their Personal Park Orbit the Personal Park for a Co Worker s Extension will not work until the first call is retrieved from Park A Personal Park Programmable Function Key or the Soft Key must be used to park the call in a co worker s park This operation cann...

Page 964: ...one Basic Data Setup Automatic Handsfree Set whether pressing a One Touch key preselects the key or goes off hook to access the key 0 Preselect 1 One Touch Automatic Handsfree 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a keys as a Park Orbit key code 04 plus Park orbit number 01 64 or as a Personal Park key Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Ser...

Page 965: ...ty to Personal Park on a Co Worker s extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 27 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Park Automatically Search Turn Off or On using the Call Park Automatically Search option 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 24 01 02 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Callback Time A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an extension for this time After this time the system invo...

Page 966: ...r an idle park location in ascending order 3 Use Paging to announce the call 4 Press Speaker to hang up If not picked up the call recalls to you The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time Program 24 01 06 The call rings the extension to which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time Program 24 01 02 The call then goes on Hold for the Park Hold Time then recalls again for the Hold Recall...

Page 967: ...it code Program 11 16 11 The Intercom call to the co worker is dropped A confirmation tone is heard and the outside call is parked at your extension If the co worker answers the call the outside call rings back after the intercom call is completed The call can then be placed in Personal park if desired To Park a personal call at a co worker s extension after calling them An extension s Class of Se...

Page 968: ... call in Park press the Park key Program 15 07 or SC 852 04 OR With Program 15 02 08 set to 1 One Touch and a call in Park press Feature then the Park key Program 15 07 or SC 852 04 Call Park Step Call To Park a call in the first available system orbit You can Park Intercom or trunk calls 1 Press Hold or Transfer 2 Dial 831 If you hear a busy tone the orbit is busy Proceed to step 3 3 Dial Program...

Page 969: ...ers are those dialed after the PBX trunk access code The only PBX facility telephone system users can access are the PBX outside trunks Automatic Pause The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during manual dialing Speed Dialing Last Number Redial Repeat Redial and Save Number Dialed This gives the connected PBX time to set up its trunk circuits Conditions When using Ac...

Page 970: ...ly If the system routes a call to a PBX trunk it does not automatically insert the PBX access code It outdials the call just as the user dialed it Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Account Code Entry Call Forwarding Centrex Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Code Restriction Direct Inward Line D...

Page 971: ...t to 1 for the trunks to ring and light correctly Trunks 1 400 0 Normal delayed 1 Immediate Ringing 1 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup For each PBX trunk port enter 1 Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode 0 Stand Alone Trunk 1 Behind PBX PBX 2 Not Used 3 CTX assume 9 0 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Assign a Toll Restriction Class 1 15 to each extension Day Night Mode 1 9 9 Po...

Page 972: ...ine terminal press Speaker and dial 9 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset and dial 9 2 Dial the PBX access code and number OR 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 804 3 Dial the PBX trunk number e g 005 for line 5 4 Dial the PBX access code and number OR 1 Press the PBX trunk key Program 15 07 or SC 852 01 1 to 400 2 Dial th...

Page 973: ...tions is shown below PC Programming Overview Connecting As can be seen in PC Programming Overview three connection types are available to PCPro WebPro If using PCPro a user can connect directly remotely using a modem or via LAN A connection with the system is made via the Connection Dialog in the application Refer to PCPro Connection Dialog Modem remote connections are established via the internal...

Page 974: ...e established via the Ethernet connector on the GCD CP10 blade PCPro Connection Dialog If using WebPro a user can connect only via IP To connect launch Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the switch refer to WebPro Login Screen ...

Page 975: ...rowser System Data License Information and Modification History are among the items that can be viewed in WebPro refer to WebPro Home Page WebPro Home Page The Maintenance Debug section is added to allow the WebPro user to turn on debug traces for engineering troubleshooting refer to Maintenance Debug Screen ...

Page 976: ...gnment Station Speed Dial InMail features Station Name Call Forwarding Display Language Ring Tone and End User Password To login to the WebPro End User Programming point to the IP address of the system in a web browser like you would logging into WebPro Use the extension number as the User Name refer to WebPro End User Screen and the password is assigned in Program 90 28 01 Default is 1111 WebPro ...

Page 977: ...inal and the host PC for uploading downloading via LAN PCPro WebPro TCP port is set for 8000 at default but can be changed via WebPro using Program 90 38 02 Program 90 38 02 is not accessible from Phone Programming or PCPro Screen Resolution 800 x 600 minimum 1024 x 760 recommended The hardware software requirements for the host PC running WebPro are Item Requirement Browser MS Internet Explorer 6...

Page 978: ...3 01 10 13 02 10 13 03 10 14 10 15 10 16 01 10 16 02 10 16 03 10 16 04 20 01 03 47 01 01 80 01 80 02 01 80 02 02 80 02 03 80 02 04 80 03 80 04 84 03 01 84 03 02 84 03 06 84 03 07 84 03 08 84 05 01 84 05 02 84 06 01 84 06 02 84 06 03 84 06 04 84 06 05 84 06 06 84 06 07 84 06 08 84 06 09 84 06 10 84 06 11 84 09 and 84 10 PCPro and WebPro have been enhanced allowing T1 ISDN layer 1 status System Alar...

Page 979: ...be made to a waiting PCPro terminal with a preprogrammed IP Address This allows for a pre authorized connection for programming purposes without using CO Lines and potentially reducing the cost of calls for maintenance The outgoing IP call connects by sending a TCP establishment request to a waiting PC Programming terminal A fixed encrypted user ID and password are used to verify the connection If...

Page 980: ... 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 10 12 03 GCD CP10 Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP addre...

Page 981: ...re the accounts that are used to login Maximum of eight digits 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level Set the system password user levels 0 Prohibited User 1 MF Manufacturer Level 2 IN Installer Level 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 5 UA User Programming Level 1 90 26 01 Program Access Level Setup Maintenance Level Define access levels to each program Th...

Page 982: ...re of Outbound IP Connection for PC Programming 0 Not Set 1 Major Alarm 2 Minor Alarm Alarm 58 Failure of Connection Outbound IP Connection Adding parameter 01 Programming session is already active 02 Not setting of IP Address or Port 03 Caller ID is not match 10 Failure of getting IP Address 11 Socket Open Error 12 Socket Port Setting Error 13 TCPSession Timeout 90 36 01 Firmware Update Time Sett...

Page 983: ...Maximum of 16 digits 0 9 9 No Setting Operation Outbound IP Connection 1 Open PC Pro on PC that has same IP address as assigned in Program 90 69 02 2 Go to Communications Connect 3 Select Outbound IP 4 Input Connection port same as Program 90 69 01 5 Select Connect When PCPro does not receive a TCP established request within three minutes fixed time it ends the state of Attempting to Connect 6 Dia...

Page 984: ...tings Version Conversion Y PCPro can convert databases between different UNIVERGE SV9100 versions Programming Modes Offline Y Ability to program offline and upload to the UNIVERGE SV9100 at a later date Live Update Y Y Changes made in WebPro apply immediately No upload is required PCPro has Interactive Mode to make live changes Remote Connection Upload Y PCPro can download the database from the UN...

Page 985: ...n Y Y Multi Assignments Extension Numbers Y PCPro provides special screens that allow multiple values to be set easily This applies mainly to table data These screens shorten the programming time Line Keys CAP Y Line Keys General Y Account Codes Y Defaults View Y Copy System Data Level Y Y Copy items in an individual program Group Level Y Y Copy data for ports telephone trunk Modification Tracking...

Page 986: ...ckSearch Y Y WebPro has a simplified search facility It applies only to programs PCPro provides extensive searching on programs Wizards and IPK cross referencing Reports System Data Y PCPro can generate various reports based on values in the database Verify Y Maintenance Y CAP Keys Y Numbering Plan Y Class of Service Y Modification History Y Simulators LCR ACR Y Import Export Speed Dials Y PCPro a...

Page 987: ...RGE SV9100 GCD CP10 SMDR Capture Y PCPro provides a tool for capturing SMDR reports from the UNIVERGE SV9100 Modification History Y PCPro keeps a running list of all the modifications made to a system databases It also tracks uploads downloads System Initialize Y Y This is the ability to initialize the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Time Setting Y Y This sets the time on the UNIVERGE SV9100 Software Updat...

Page 988: ...ne Single line telephones must be equipped with a ground start button for use with Ground Start Trunks System features cannot be activated from single line telephone or multiline telephone with PSA L adapter when Power Failure Transfer is in operation When power is restored to the system one of the following happens depending on which telephone a single line telephone or multiline telephone with P...

Page 989: ...ogramming Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 14 02 09 Analog Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone Detection Set the basic options for each analog trunk port 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 14 02 14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start Ground Start Set the basic options for each analog trunk port 0 Loop Start Loop 1 Ground Start Ground 0 Operation None ...

Page 990: ...mming section of this feature Incoming Prime Line Preference When the Prime Line rings the extension lifting the handset answers the call Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer s service calls and then dispatch repair technicians When a customer calls in the dispatcher lifts the handset to get their call Incoming Prime Line P...

Page 991: ... Not Specified 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Trunk Port Number For outgoing Prime Line selection assign each Prime Line trunk to a different Access Map and deny outbound access to all trunks except the Prime Line trunk 0 No access 1 Outgoing access only 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming access and access when trunk ...

Page 992: ...om calls or trunk calls have answer priority when both are ringing simultaneously 0 Intercom call priority 1 Trunk call priority 1 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extension s to a ring group that consists of a Prime Line Maximum of eight digits Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls...

Page 993: ...993 1 Lift the handset Depending on your Line Preference programming you either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance ...

Page 994: ... follow Call Forwarding if not Direct Inward Line DIL Other programmed options for outgoing calls also affect a Prime Line Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming Direct Inward Line DIL calls ring an idle Department Group member then follow Program 22 08 then Program 22 05 An extension user can have Line Preference options applied to their Private Line A Priva...

Page 995: ... placing calls that is not available to others in the system 0 Disable Private Line Normal 1 Enable Private Line Private Line 0 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Trunk Port Number Assign Private Line to the Private Line Access Map refer to Program 15 06 in this section Use option 5 for Incoming option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing In all other Access Maps assign option 3 to the Private L...

Page 996: ... DID DDI Mode Switching 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extension to Private Line ring group Set the ringing in Program 22 06 use option 1 for Incoming or Both Way Private Lines Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines Do not assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring group Maximum of eight digits Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group...

Page 997: ...ultiline terminal on you Private Line 1 Press the Private Line key then press Speaker or lift the handset 2 Dial the number To answer a call from your multiline terminal on your Private Line 1 Press Private Line key or press Speaker or lift handset To place a call on your Private line from a single line telephone 1 Pick up handset Private Line dial tone is heard 2 Dial the number To answer a call ...

Page 998: ...ng copied This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the telephone displays as DUPLICATE DATA It is recommend to either clear these non existent keys or to copy only from an extension which has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied Speed Dialing and One Touch Calling also offer qui...

Page 999: ...or one touch transfer DSS keys can distinguish whether the telephone is set for DND Call Forward All Calls of if the telephone is off hook When a Ring Group call rings a station a BLF Indication for this station shows idle or busy based on Class of Service option 20 13 49 All features programmed under one touch keys are still subject to class of service restrictions If you change the extension ass...

Page 1000: ...e Function Key Programming Appearance Level Turn Off or On an extension user ability to program the Appearance function keys using Service Code 852 When programming a feature as a Programmable Function Key refer to Program 15 07 01 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 18 Class of Service for Options Supplementary Service Programmable Function Key Programming General Level Turn Off or On an extension user a...

Page 1001: ...he UNIVERGE SV9100 Programing Manual To undefine a key enter 000 When a key is programmed using service code 852 that key cannot be programmed with a function using the 851 code until the key is undefined 000 For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 852 04 must be undefined by dialing 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 851 48 To check the function of a programm...

Page 1002: ...one Programming Programming from a multiline terminal can require a password to enter programming Temporary License can be activated only from a multiline terminal not PCPro or WebPro When activated the system is temporarily licensed for all licenses except Encryption feature code 0030 Each time the temporary license is activated the program is read only until the temporary license expires Each ti...

Page 1003: ...ord Setup Password Configure the administrator accounts that are used when connecting to the KTS via PCPro WebPro If using PCPro these are the accounts that are used to connect If using WebPro these are the accounts that are used to login Maximum of eight digits 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level Set the system password user levels 0 Prohibited User 1 MF Manufacturer Level 2 IN Install...

Page 1004: ... a call to an OCC over a DP trunk Depending on programming Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion OR Wait 10 seconds Dial the OCC security code and desired number The system dials the digits after the conversion as DTMF Conditions Pulse to Tone Conversion is valid only for Dial Pulse trunks Program 14 02 01 options 0 or 1 Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Te...

Page 1005: ...10 PPS 1 Dial Pulse 20 PPS 2 DTMF 2 14 02 07 Analog Trunk Data Setup DP to DTMF Conversion Options For each trunk set the type of DP to DTMF Conversion required 0 Automatic 1 Automatic and Manual 2 Manual 2 Operation To convert your telephone dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line 1 Place a call over pulse line 2 Dial to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing ...

Page 1006: ...ine cordless phones UNIVERGE SV9100 telephones only support redial using Softkey or Navigation key Stored name for Redial Function is cleared when the system is reset With SV9100 software names and numbers stored as a common or group speed dial can be displayed for redialed numbers Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Feat...

Page 1007: ...r or lift the handset OR 1 Press the List softkey 2 Press Redial 3 Press the up and down arrow to view the number to dial 4 Press or press Speaker or lift the handset To access a System Speed Dial bin 1 Press the left Navigation key REDIAL ABB is displayed along with the last dialed number 2 Dial the System Speed Dial bin number The number stored in that bin is displayed for your preview 3 Press o...

Page 1008: ...shness until the file transfer is complete When the time turns to 12 00AM the telephone system resets and switches to the new firmware The Package file needed is provided by NEC at the time the new version of main system software is released Booting from the USB drive does not replace the firmware in Flash Memory on the GCD CP10 The time entered on the Firmware Upgrade screens is relative to the t...

Page 1009: ...able here For example the file name might be SV9100_v1 xx xx 6 Select the schedule type Immediately after upload At the time If you choose At the time select the date and time you want the GCD CP10 to reset and switch over to the new software version Click Start PCPro uploads the firmware package file and updates the system at the time you specified in step 6 WebPro 1 Obtain the firmware package f...

Page 1010: ... time select the date and time you want the GCD CP10 to reset and switch over to the new software version 6 Click Start Update WebPro uploads the firmware package file and updates the system at the time you specified in step 6 ...

Page 1011: ... cycle cancels Repeat Redial Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a Repeat Redial call is placed Refer to Central Office Calls Placing options as needed For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat Redial call Single line telephones cannot use Repeat Redial Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Re...

Page 1012: ...ts 0 64800 seconds 60 21 08 03 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Dial Calling Timer Set the time the system waits for the called party to answer after a Repeat Redial If the called party does not answer in this time the system hangs up and tries again after the Repeat Redial Interval Time For unanswered calls the total time between retries is the sum of Program 21 08 02 and Program 21 08 03 0 64800 seconds...

Page 1013: ...1013 To cancel Repeat Redial 1 Press Feature 2 Press Redial OR 1 Press Repeat Redial key Program 15 07 or SC 851 29 Also refer to Last Number Redial ...

Page 1014: ...LK 01 LK 08 corresponds to CO 01 CO 08 DSS Console to Extension assignments for Attendant Add On Consoles are not assigned Default Attendant Add On Console key assignments are DSS Keys 001 060 Stations 101 160 First Initialization of the system returns all programming values to default Without a PC ATA USB Drive installed press and hold the SW1 Load Switch and toggle the Reset SW2 switch Continue ...

Page 1015: ...1015 Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ...

Page 1016: ...tination extension is idle the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the associated extension like a Hotline key An extension user cannot however use the Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls by one touch operation Conditions An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one extension limited only by the number of available function keys When the destination extension ...

Page 1017: ...code 48 This allows the user at the destination to switch between calls if they were busy when the Reverse Voice Over was initiated Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service COS to each extension 1 15 Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Exten...

Page 1018: ... Over key Program 15 07 or SC 851 48 The voice over key allows you to switch back and forth between the initial call and the Reverse Voice Over Call To return to your initial caller 1 Press the Reverse Voice Over key again If the co worker you call hangs up you return to the initial call automatically When the telephone is idle To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination 1 Press your Re...

Page 1019: ...l System Group Station numbers and follow their trunk routing as the destination number Ringdown Extension follows Call Forwarding For example the ringdown destination can forward their calls When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset ringdown automatically calls the extension to which calls are forwarded If the Ringdown Extension user hears busy tone when they lift the handset they can Ca...

Page 1020: ...nals Required Component s None Related Features Callback Call Arrival CAR Keys Call Forwarding Call Waiting Camp On Do Not Disturb Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Off Hook Signaling Speed Dial System Group Station Virtual Extensions ...

Page 1021: ...rammed 0 64800 seconds 5 21 11 01 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment Program the ringdown Hotline source and destination target number up to 24 digits 960 Hotline assignments Remember to include the trunk access code usually 9 in front of the number when dialing outside numbers When programming Speed Dial System numbers as the destination the entry should be 2 bin number the service code for Sp...

Page 1022: ...3 If an extension has a line key for the trunk Ring Group calls ring the line key If the extension does not have a line key the trunk rings the line appearance key If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring group the trunk follows Access Map programming Conditions DIL trunks disregard ring group programming until DIL overflow Default Settings All trunks are in Ring Group 1 The f...

Page 1023: ...bit 0001 9999 or 0000 for auto assign Trunks 1 400 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 13 49 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service BLF Indication on CO Incoming State Turn Off or On BLF Indication on CO Incoming State 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No Answer Recall Time A...

Page 1024: ... Number for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 1 22 06 01 Normal Incoming Ring Mode Define whether or not an extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode 0 No Ring 1 Ring 1 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination For DIL Delayed Ringing assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group An unanswered DIL rings this group a...

Page 1025: ...5 01 0 Use the charts below to program the following example For this extension 1 2 301 Trunk 1 Rings Trunk 2 Flashes Trunk 3 Flashes 302 Trunk 1 Flashes Trunk 2 Rings Trunk 3 Flashes 303 Trunk 1 Flashes Trunk 2 Flashes Trunk 3 Rings 1 Trunks ring the same in the day as at night 2 MLT has trunk appearances not CAP keys Program 22 04 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Ring Group 1 2 3 Ext 301...

Page 1026: ...1026 Operation Refer to Central Office Calls Answering ...

Page 1027: ...ng telephone This service is available until the handset of the monitored telephone is placed on hook The use of monitoring recording or listening devices to eavesdrop monitor retrieve or record telephone conversation or other sound activities whether or not contemporaneous with transmission may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws Legal advice should be sought prior to ...

Page 1028: ...rvice Code Setup for Hotel Hotel Room Monitor Customize the service code 675 by default to be used for Room Monitor MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 770 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key as a Room Monitor key code 39 for both the extension being monitored and the extension initiating Room Monitor Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Fun...

Page 1029: ...upplementary Service Room Monitor Initiating Extension Turn Off or On an extension user ability to Room Monitor other extensions 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 12 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Monitor Extension Being Monitored Turn Off or On an extension ability to be monitored by other extensions 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 42 03 12 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel SLT Room Monit...

Page 1030: ...1030 Multiline Room Monitoring ...

Page 1031: ...1031 Single Line Telephone Room Monitoring ...

Page 1032: ...hile Room Monitor is active To cancel Room Monitor at either extension 1 Press the Room Monitor key at both the initiating extension and the monitored extension Single Line Telephones To activate Room Monitor at the initiating extension 1 Lift the handset at the telephone which is monitoring another telephone 2 Dial 770 3 Dial 2 4 Dial number of extension number which will be monitored You cannot ...

Page 1033: ... of digits 0 9 and The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered unanswered or busy The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired Conditions For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects Function keys simplify Save Num...

Page 1034: ... 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key as a Save key code 30 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default Operation To save the outside number you just dialed up to 24 digits Use this feature before hanging up Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Save Number Dialed key Program 15 07 or SC 851 30 Single Line Telephone 1...

Page 1035: ...er you have saved from a multiline terminal with a display 1 Press the Save Number Dialed key Program 15 07 or SC 851 30 The stored number displays for 10 seconds The stored number dials out if you Lift the handset Press an idle line key Press the Speaker key 2 Press the Exit key To clear your saved number Multiline Terminal 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 885 3 Press Speaker to hang up Single Line Telepho...

Page 1036: ...ide line the first call can be automatically put on hold If a trunk call rings a Secondary Incoming Extension to answer the call the station must be programmed with the direct trunk appearance key or an available CAP key and the SIE must be programmed to allow the call to come off the SIE key and appear on the line or CAP key The same SIE key cannot be programmed on multiple programmable function ...

Page 1037: ...07 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Hold for CO lines When talking on a CO call and another CO line key is pressed place the original trunk on Hold or Disconnect it 0 Hold 1 Disconnect Cut 1 15 02 21 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Virtual Extension Access Mode When idle Virtual Extension key pressed Determine whether a Virtual Extension Call Arrival Key CAR should function as a...

Page 1038: ...rogram 15 07 Mode 1 0 No Ring 1 Ring 0 15 10 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup When two or more virtual extensions are set on a function key on the telephone and the tone pattern by which the sound of each extension differs set up the priority of ring sound 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming Extension Ring Tone 5 Tone Pattern 5 6 Tone P...

Page 1039: ...ncoming call on a Call Arrival CAR Secondary Incoming Extension SIE Virtual Extension by lifting the handset 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 27 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension If set to 1 you can call a busy extension which is talking on a virtual extension key Program 20 13 06 Call Waiting must be set to off for this option to work 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 ...

Page 1040: ...ion you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold once for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key rings 8 Press hold a second time for Delayed Ring or Skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delays ringing 10 Press Speaker ...

Page 1041: ...ey to intercept all their calls An extension can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users A Call Arrival CAR Key virtual extension cannot be programmed as the boss s extension An extension user can also have Call Forwarding with Follow Me r...

Page 1042: ...e Code 852 by default Operation To activate Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your Secretary Call Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 851 42 boss extension Your Secretary Call Pickup key lights and the boss s telephone display shows BOSS FWD Calls intended for covered extension ring your telephone instead To cancel Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 851 42 ...

Page 1043: ... Secretary Call A secretary could use this feature for example to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting After being alerted the boss could call the secretary when it is most convenient An extension can have a Secretary Call key for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call is not available to single line telepho...

Page 1044: ... or SC 851 41 secretary extension Your boss or secretary hears ringing Your buzzer key lights steadily Your boss s or secretary s buzzer key flashes fast The telephone continues to ring until the Secretary Call key is pressed To check to see who left you a Secretary Call 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the Help key 3 Press the Secretary Call key that flashed 4 Press the Exit key To answer your S...

Page 1045: ...e security sensor can be connected to the detector circuit on the 2PGDAD A maximum of eight sensors can be connected Applied voltage when sensor is Off 5V Loop current when sensor is On 14mA When the system receives a detection signal from a contact on the 2PGDAD detector circuit The input circuit contact setting in Program 20 46 12 must match the circuit setting in Program 10 41 01 Watch mode can...

Page 1046: ...r operation which preprogrammed in Program 20 46 10 Also by pressing key from outside it is possible to enable a two way path If the monitor terminal is not idle status an emergency call destination cannot start monitor and hear no tone If a Watch or Warning message is sent to the destination and all VSR channels are busy a tone is played instead of displaying the VRS message If the VRS message is...

Page 1047: ...old Warning message stops both internal and external paging If the DND key is pressed at the called terminal while playing a Watch or Warning message the next message is not played because the terminal is determined to be busy When the terminal returns to an idle state the message is played again An emergency call via analog trunk which has no disconnect signal if Program 14 02 18 is invalid the c...

Page 1048: ...ding order If Program 14 06 01 set to 0 no outside call is provided If outgoing call restriction is set in a system an emergency call cannot go through In case of using outgoing call restrictions toll restriction Class 1 is followed Auto outgoing call via leased line cannot go through when all trunks are busy When trunks are all busy the emergency call does not complete In this case Alarm Type 33 ...

Page 1049: ...internal paging access performed while ringing continues remote inspection ringing In case of speaking status after monitor mode monitored terminal key does not operate except speaker key When disconnected from outside while monitoring the line can not be released without disconnecting the signal It disconnects when the timer in Program 20 21 05 ends A disconnect also occurs while monitoring or sp...

Page 1050: ...reports are recorded and the alarm display terminal indicates the following Security Sensor 31 Sensor Detect Remote Inspection 32 Confirm Dial Recording Emergency Call By setting Program 90 20 11 1 Report Emergency calls can be recorded on security report Maximum of 50 records can be saved Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s GCD 8DLCA GC...

Page 1051: ...or Security Sensor Service Code setting for destination number when Warning mode detected MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 748 11 10 49 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Auto Dial for Remote Inspection Service Code setting for destination number when remote inspection detects no answer MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 749 11 12 62 Service Code Setup for Service Access Security Sensor Reset...

Page 1052: ...99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 01 19 System Options Emergency Call Setting of Remote Inspection Feature when the Target is in Off Hook Status Assign to make an emergency call when the inspection target is in off hook status 0 Not Call 1 Call 0 20 08 23 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Display Indication for Securit...

Page 1053: ...imer Assign Ringing continue time for inspected extension Terminal No 1 6 0 60 0 20 45 04 Remote Watch Setup Auto Dial Number Area Setting Assign Speed dial area number when detect no answer at extension and make emergency call Terminal No 1 6 Speed Dial Area 0 1999 0 20 45 05 Remote Watch Setup VRS Message for Answer Assign VRS message number when inspected extension answered Terminal No 1 6 0 Se...

Page 1054: ...Number Area Setting Define Speed dial area number when sensor detects warning Security Sensor No 1 8 Speed Dial Area 0 1999 1999 20 46 06 Security Sensor Setup VRS Message for Answer Define VRS message number when emergency call destination answered Security Sensor No 1 8 0 Send Warning Tone 1 100 VRS Message Number 0 20 46 07 Security Sensor Setup Auto Dial Wait Timer Define wait time before maki...

Page 1055: ...rity sensor The sensor starts at once in case of set 0 0 3600 seconds 60 35 02 22 SMDR Output Options Security Auto Dialing Select whether the system should display the SAD Security Auto Dialing on SMDR report SMDR Port 1 8 0 No Output 1 Output 0 35 02 23 SMDR Output Options Watch Auto Dialing Select whether the system should display the WAD Warning Auto Dialing on SMDR report SMDR Port 1 8 0 No O...

Page 1056: ...eaker to hang up Set up Watch mode 1 Press Speaker and dial 714 2 Dial the internal paging group number 01 3 Dial the external paging group number 1 4 Dial the interval time of Watch message 05 5 Dial the VRS message number being watched 001 6 After the beep record message 7 Press Speaker to hang up To Start Watch mode 1 Press Speaker and dial 748 1 OR Press function key 32 the function keys turn ...

Page 1057: ...dial calling time 30 sec Program 20 46 10 200 Monitored terminal number 200 Program 20 46 11 30 Interval of Auto Dial 30 sec Program 20 46 12 1 General purpose relay contact detector circuit 1 Program 20 48 01 1 Security sensor time pattern 1 Program 20 55 01 60 sec default Sensor delay timer Set up Warning message 1 Press Speaker and dial 719 2 Dial the Security sensor number 1 3 Dial the Interna...

Page 1058: ...e To send a Warning message but not as an Emergency call Change Program 20 46 05 to no setting To Place an Emergency Call To send an Emergency call but not as an Warning message Set Programs 20 46 02 and 20 46 03 to 0 Remote Inspection Program Program 11 10 49 619 Auto Dial Setting for Remote Program 20 45 01 200 Remote Inspection terminal 200 Program 20 45 02 12 00 Ringing start time 12 o clock n...

Page 1059: ...ote Inspection Ring 1 At 12 00 o clock noon extension 200 starts ringing 2 The first VRS message plays when answered 3 When message finishes the call disconnects Not Answering the Remote Inspection Ring 1 At 12 00 o clock extension 200 starts ringing 2 Ringing continues for over three minutes 3 The ringing on extension 200 ends and a call is automatically placed to Speed dial bin 1999 4 When answe...

Page 1060: ...an alarm display to the terminal preprogrammed in Program 90 50 01 and report to the predefined destination in Program 90 11 After Program 90 53 01 completes alarm display is cancelled Security Report Program Example Program 10 20 01 Index 12 20000 Program 90 20 11 1 In the above settings use the sensor mode or remote inspection emergency call to record a traffic report ...

Page 1061: ... coming back from vacation The system allows all telephones to use the Selectable Display Messaging feature at the same time All telephones can use Selectable Display Messaging at one time The default messages are Selectable Display Messaging Defaults No Message Change to 1 IN MEETING UNTIL Time when meeting done 2 MEETING ROOM Room Name or extension 3 COME BACK Time when returning 4 PLEASE CALL 1...

Page 1062: ...tion Code Service Code 852 by default 20 01 02 System Options Text Message Mode Select whether an intercom caller should hear busy 1 or ring through 0 for extensions which have Selectable Display Messaging set Any extension previously set with Selectable Display Messaging must cancel the feature and reactivate for a change in this option to take affect 0 Call mode 1 No Answer Busy mode 1 20 02 07 ...

Page 1063: ...15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 19 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Selectable Display Messaging Text Messaging Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Selectable Display Messaging 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 16 01 Selectable Display Messages Program the Selectable Display Messages 1 20 Refer to the chart below for character entry Maximum of 24 characters Refer to Sele...

Page 1064: ...lashing cursor and to the right Operation To select a message 1 Press Speaker press the Text Message key Program 15 07 or SC 851 18 enter digits to append if needed Speaker to hang up Skip the remaining steps 2 Optional for messages 1 8 and 10 Dial the digits you want to append to the message You can append messages 1 8 and 10 with digits e g the time when you will be back Enter the time in 24 hou...

Page 1065: ...s Speaker and dial the Text Message service code Program 11 11 14 2 Dial the Selectable Display Message number to be used 01 20 Optional messages 1 8 and 10 dial the digits you want to append to the message 3 Press Speaker to hang up To cancel repeat Step 1 and hang up ...

Page 1066: ...g for their calls This is important in a crowded work area where several telephones are close together Because their telephone has a characteristic ring the user always can tell when their telephone is ringing Conditions None Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns ...

Page 1067: ...n port you are programming 1 High 2 Medium 3 Low 4 Ring Tone 1 5 Ring Tone 2 6 Ring Tone 3 7 Ring Tone 4 8 Ring Tone 5 2 15 02 03 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Extension Ring Tone Set the tone pitch of the incoming extension call ring for the extension port you are programming Also refer to program 15 08 1 High 2 Medium 3 Low 4 Ring Tone 1 5 Ring Tone 2 6 Ring Tone 3 7 Ring Tone 4 8 Ring To...

Page 1068: ...k Ring Tone Range Select the ring tone range for the trunk The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension Eight ring tones are available 0 12 Ring Tone Pattern 1 4 Melody 1 Melody 5 Ring Tone Pattern 5 8 0 Intercom or Trunk Ring Setting 1 High 5 Ring Tone 2 2 Mid Range 6 Ring Tone 3 3 Low 7 Ring Tone 4 4 Ring Tone 1 8 Ring Tone 5 Operation To change your extension inco...

Page 1069: ...1069 For Trunk Ring Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear Ring 1 3 Melody 4 8 If you select Ring 1 3 a second screen prompts for the tone pattern 1 4 5 Press Speaker to hang up ...

Page 1070: ... Technical Service and announce I have Ted on the telephone I need to talk to him again Just hang up when you re done and I ll get him back Conditions The transferring extension can remain off hook to auto receive the callback or hang up and it rings back to them Serial Call requires a uniquely programmed function key Program 15 07 or SC 851 43 or assigning the Transfer key as Call Back in Program...

Page 1071: ...l Call key code 43 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default Operation To place a Serial Call to a co worker 1 Place or answer a call 2 Press Hold or Transfer 3 Dial co worker s extension number Co worker must lift the handset to respond to your announcement 4 Press the Serial Call key Program 15 07 or SC 851 43 OR 5 Press Tra...

Page 1072: ...re required to support the video functionality between standard SIP phones Maximum of Four Standard SIP Phone Users Conditions CO calls cannot be transferred to a Remote Conference pilot and must directed to the conference pilot as a DID or DIL termination If peer to peer is disabled the standard SIP video feature requires VoIP DSP resource be reserved for this function reducing the number of VoIP...

Page 1073: ...n the standard SIP device support of that resolution Setting Programs 84 27 22 or 84 27 23 to 1 will allow 4 video channels for MCU video mode type 1 or 2 if DSP resources are available MCU group for mode 1 and mode 2 video cannot be enabled at the same time as it will try to reserve more than 192 VoIP DSP resources for video The system will not allow more than 192 VoIP DSP resources to be reserve...

Page 1074: ...3261 RFC 3262 RFC 3264 Session Description Protocol RFC 1889 Real Time Protocol Required Component s GCD CP10 GPZ IPLE Video license 0042 Remote Conference license 0047 System Port License 0300 VRS Port License 1001 IP Telephone license 5111 VoIP Resource license 5103 System Version R1 License 0411 Related Features Conference Remote ...

Page 1075: ... the total for the CPU slot is 256 1 Index 1 has 128 of feature code 5103 and index 2 also has 128 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256 2 Index 1 has 255 of feature code 5103 and index 2 has 1 of feature code 5103 for a total of 256 1 255 Resource Licenses 0 11 19 01 Remote Conference Group Pilot Number Enter the pilot number for remote conference Must work within current system dialing plan No...

Page 1076: ...ers Conferences 1 4 1111 Conferences 5 20 blank 20 34 06 Remote Conference Group Setting Remote Conference Password Mode Set whether users are prompted to enter a password to access the conference Normal will prompt users to enter a password If set to Skip no password is required to enter a conference 0 Normal 1 Skip 0 20 34 07 Remote Conference Group Setting MCU Mode for Remote Conference Set the...

Page 1077: ...Jitter Buffer Mode for Video Sets the jitter buffer size adjustment At default this is set to self adjusting and should only be changed when directed by support This program is not supported for v 1 00 and will be added in a future release 1 Static 2 Self adjusting 2 84 13 73 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Minimum Jitter Buffer for Video Sets the minimum value of jitter buffer for the vid...

Page 1078: ... 2 0 84 19 66 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Video CODEC This program specifies the video CODEC H 264 only 0 H 264 0 84 19 67 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Jitter Buffer Mode for Video Sets the jitter buffer size adjustment At default this is set to self adjusting and should only be changed when directed by support 1 Static 2 Self adjusting 2 84 19 68 SIP Extension CODEC...

Page 1079: ...ard SIP phones VoIP DSP resources are shared between video and voice calls The system will always keep 64 resources for voice calls When changing this program if resources are exceeded the system will provide an error message and will not allow the setting to be changed When changing this program all DSP resources are reset when idle In progress calls are not affected but until all DSP resources g...

Page 1080: ... not available for SIP voice calls VoIP DSP resources are shared between video and voice calls The system will always keep 64 resources for voice calls When changing this program if resources are exceeded the system will provide an error message and will not allow the setting to be changed When changing this program all DSP resources are reset when idle In progress calls are not affected but until...

Page 1081: ...settings are used in Programs 84 27 22 and 84 27 23 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 20 34 01 Remote Conference Group Setting Remote Conference Name Set name for remote conference Maximum of 12 characters Conferences 1 4 Conf 1 Conf 4 Conferences 5 20 blank 20 34 02 Remote Conference Group Setting Remote Conference Password Set password for remote conference Maximum of 4 numbers Conferences 1 4 1111 Conferenc...

Page 1082: ...VoIP DSP resources for mode 2 video conferences When a DSP resource is reserved it is not available for SIP voice calls VoIP DSP resources are shared between video and voice calls The system will always keep 64 resources for voice calls When changing this program if resources are exceeded the system will provide an error message and will not allow the setting to be changed When changing this progr...

Page 1083: ...een video and voice calls The system will always keep 64 resources for voice calls When changing this program if resources are exceeded the system will provide an error message and will not allow the setting to be changed When changing this program all DSP resources are reset when idle In progress calls are not affected but until all DSP resources go idle this change will not take affect 0 8 0 84 ...

Page 1084: ...ailable in Alarm Reports A MIB Management Information Base file has been created that can be loaded into an SNMP application An OID Object ID of 14399 has been registered for use by NEC for its systems this is pre configured in the MIB file Software Release 8 0 includes an enhancement to generate SNMP traps when programming changes are detected See Release 8 0 Enhancement Conditions An SNMP browse...

Page 1085: ...e data for each of the items can be read or write Read is data that can be requested from the system Write requires that a value be entered in the SNMP application For example the slot number would need to be entered when querying a card Common MIB OID information is as follows these OIDs will be seen at the beginning of the NEC portion of each OID used by the SV9100 14399 Marks the beginning of t...

Page 1086: ...0030 Encryption Read 0040 SIP Video Read 0041 XML Pro Read 0123 OAI Activation Read 2001 Activation Read 2101 P event Read Available port licenses are as follows Port Licenses Type Description Read or Write 30 CPU 2 Main 2 Licenses 0111 1st Party CTI Ethernet Read 0112 3rd Party CTI Client Read 2002 Client Read 5001 IP Trunk SIP H323 Read 5012 K CCIS over IP Read 5111 IP Terminal Read 5201 Mobile ...

Page 1087: ...ng VOIP Type Description Read or Write 40 VOIPDB 1 Hardware 1 VOIP Type Read 2 Status 1 VOIP Card Address Read 2 VOIP Subnet Mask Read 3 VOIP Card MAC Address Read 4 Gateway 1 Gateway 1 IP Address Read 2 Gateway 2 IP Address Read 3 Gateway 3 IP Address Read 4 Gateway 4 IP Address Read 5 Gateway 5 IP Address Read 6 Gateway 6 IP Address Read 7 Gateway 7 IP Address Read 8 Gateway 8 IP Address Read 20...

Page 1088: ...1088 Default Settings None System Availability Terminals None Required Component s Release 8 0 Enhancement requires Version R8 license 0418 or above Related Features None ...

Page 1089: ...the SNMP application XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 90 64 05 SNMP Setup Target Host 3 Enter the IP Address of the PC running the SNMP application XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 90 64 06 SNMP Setup Target Host 4 Enter the IP Address of the PC running the SNMP application XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 90 64 07 SNMP Setup Target Host 5 Enter the IP Address of the PC running the SNMP application XX XX XX XX 0 0 0 0 90 64 08 SNMP Set...

Page 1090: ...U IP Address Request for two examples of how these requests and responses are processed in regards to the hardware key code and the CPU IP address First the SNMP user can make a request in the application to retrieve the hardware key code This request is received by the SV9100 and in turn sends back the hardware key code via SNMP SNMP Hardware Key Code Request Similarly the SNMP user can make a re...

Page 1091: ...y the SNMP application has to be configured to watch for a particular trap to be triggered The user first sets a trap for alarm 64 When alarm 64 occurs an SNMP message is sent out that the SNMP application picks up and displays SNMP Set Trap Alarm 64 The details of the alarm is sent in the trap message displayed in the SNMP application Refer to SNMP Trap Alarm Details for information available in ...

Page 1092: ...ation is set TelPro or Service Code or WebPro or PCPro or XMLPro 1 3 6 1 4 1 14399 20 10 30 2 6 104 Source IP Address SD Change In case of WebPro or PCPro or XMLPro The IP Address of PC side is sent 1 3 6 1 4 1 14399 20 10 30 2 6 105 User SD Change In case of WebPro or PCPro or XMLPro The user name of PRG90 02 is sent In case of TelPro or Service Code The extension number is set Changed PRG format...

Page 1093: ...imer in Program 20 03 07 System Options for Single Line Telephones Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time Forced Dial does not reset when a digit is dialed The user must finish dialing all the digits before this time expires entries 0 64800 seconds default 0 Conditions Dial Pulse single line telephones cannot access any feature that requires the user to dial or A single line telephone can initi...

Page 1094: ...rence Barge In Meet Me Conference Callback Meet Me Paging Call Forwarding Meet Me Paging Transfer Call Forwarding with Follow Me Message Waiting Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Night Service Call Waiting Camp On Off Hook Signaling Central Office Calls Answering Paging External Central Office Calls Placing Paging External VRS Conference Paging Internal Department Calling PBX Compatibility D...

Page 1095: ...01 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 Program all on premise 500 2500 type single line telephones with circuit type 2 Set the DIOPU trunk to type 1 when trunks should be defined for off premise extension OPX use 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10 DSS Console 11 Not Used 0 10 03 03 ETU Setup LCA PKG Setup Tran...

Page 1096: ...Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 144 0 Common When GPZ BS10 is installed 81 144 are available 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type Enter 0 if single line telephone is a 500 type dial pulse Enter 1 if single line telephone is a 2500 type DTMF Set In Skin Voice Mail and InMail to 0 0 DP 1 DTMF 1 15 03 03 Single Line...

Page 1097: ...y shows when a multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside call 0 Calling Extension Number Calling 1 External Caller ID Forward 0 20 03 01 System Options for Single Line Telephones SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode For a busy single line 500 2500 type telephone set the mode used to answer a camped on trunk call For ESL sets enable this option 1 to allow the user to dial Service Code for Voice Mail ...

Page 1098: ...art Time 0 64800 seconds 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a unique Class of Service for Dual OPX telephones only when using Continued Dialing Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call Turn Off or On an extension...

Page 1099: ...m 0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 2 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 3 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm...

Page 1100: ... to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 Type 1 5 2 2dBm 80 03 05 DTMF T...

Page 1101: ...55 15 15ms 3825ms Type 1 1 30ms Type 2 1 30ms Type 3 1 30ms Type 4 1 30ms Type 5 1 30ms 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detection Level If required modify the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection for the DTMF tones received at a single line telephone 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm Type 1 DT 0 2...

Page 1102: ... 1 5sec 3 82 11 02 LCA Initial Setup HookFlash Start Time Specify the minimum hookflash time from a Single Line Telephone or analog Voice Mail system before it is detected as the beginning of a valid hookflash 0 40ms 1 15 90ms 790ms 5 290ms 82 11 03 LCA Initial Setup HookFlash End Time Specify the maximum hookflash duration from a Single Line Telephone to receive a second dial tone 0 HST 0ms 1 15 ...

Page 1103: ...e Softkey menu still displays the option the user cannot set the feature Using the Directory Dialing Softkeys Recall can toggle the language display from English to Japanese The feature must be active to change the volume e g telephone must be ringing page being heard etc Press the volume keys when the telephone is idle to adjust the display contrast Disabling the softkeys or limiting the menu key...

Page 1104: ...its 778 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection Select the language to be displayed on a multiline terminal display 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Dutch 7 Portuguese 8 Norwegian 9 Danish 10 Swedish 11 Turkish 12 Latin American Spanish 13 Romanian 14 Polish 1 15 02 71 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Disable Softkey Disable 1 softke...

Page 1105: ...ce programmed these bins can currently be dialed only using the Directory Dial feature Press Directory key ABB softkey press ABBc ABBg use arrow keys to locate number or enter the Speed Dial bin name press arrow key to locates number Speaker to place call Speaker and service code 2 operations are not available for any 4 digit Speed Dial System bin number DSS Console Chaining DSS Console chaining a...

Page 1106: ...s true one touch calling via a telephone function keys Cursor Key Operation By pressing the Right Cursor key the user can access all directory menus The flow chart below shows the menu access sequence refer to Right Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart If the terminal is not allowed access to Speed Dial and or Telephone Book numbers or no telephone numbers are programmed in those areas they are skipped...

Page 1107: ...nk Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk Speed Dial uses for trunk calls If the Speed Dial bin does not have a name assigned it does not show when scrolling through the directory of speed dials If Program 13 01 01 is set to 1 Intercom Access mode system speed dial bins require inserting a trunk access code When operating the Right Cursor key if the menu is not enabled by programming or there are n...

Page 1108: ...rcuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 144 0 Common When GPZ BS10 is installed 81 144 are available 11 10 04 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Storing Common Speed Dialing Numbers Customize the service code used for storing Common Speed Dialing Numbers MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 853 11 10 05 Service Code Setup for System Administrator S...

Page 1109: ...roup Assignment for Extensions For Group Speed Dialing assign extensions to Speed Dialing groups 01 64 1 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Dialing Data Enter the System and Group Speed Dialing numbers and names Maximum of 24 digits 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Recall Flash Press line key 2 Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN Press line key 3 No Setting 13 04 02 Speed Dialing Num...

Page 1110: ... key for either Common or Group Speed Dialing 0 Common and Individual Speed Dialing 1 Group Speed Dialing 0 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for System Speed Dialing 27 or Group Speed Dialing 28 You can program the key as either a general Speed Dialing key or you can choose to store a bin number with the function key This key then always dials the associated bin number If ...

Page 1111: ...tension user ability to make outbound calls using group speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment For DSS Console Chaining assign an Speed Dialing Service Code or plus a 2 digit bin number to a DSS Console key Key Number 001 114 0 99 General Functional Level 97 Door Box Access key additional data 1 8 Door Box No 00 99 Appearance Functional Level 80 03 01 DTMF Ton...

Page 1112: ...3 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 ...

Page 1113: ... detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 Type 1 5 2 2dBm 80 03 05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward twist level Define the forward twist levels for the DTMF Tone Receiver 0 9 1dB 10dB Type 1 5 5 6dBm 80 03 06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backward twist level Define...

Page 1114: ...Tone Detector Setup S N Ratio Define the S N ratio for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 4 0dB 20dB Type 1 DT 4 20dB Type 2 BT 4 20dB Type 3 RBT 4 20dB Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No 0 255 30 30 7680ms Type 1 DT tone time 0 not detect 132 3990ms Define the no tone time for the Call Progress 1 255 60 7680ms Type 2 BT Tone Detector The formula is 30 30N When set to N 1...

Page 1115: ...FF maximum time Define the off maximum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 255 30 30 7680ms Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 20 450ms Type 3 RBT 115 3480ms Type 4 Type 5 0 Operation To store an Speed Dialing number display telephones only 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 853 for system or 854 for group 3 Dial system or group storage code Initially there are 1000 System Speed Dialing codes There are Group S...

Page 1116: ...try one character at a time HOLD Telpro only Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right 7 Press Hold 8 Press Speaker to hang up or repeat steps 3 7 to program another System or Group Speed Dial bin To dial a System Speed Dialing number 1 Go off hook 2 Press Redial OR Press the Right Cursor key until the Group Speed Dial menu appears 3 Dial the System Speed Dialing...

Page 1117: ...de The stored number dials out Unless you preselect Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call If you have a DSS Console you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number To check your stored Speed Dialing numbers display telephone only 1 Press the Help key 2 For System Speed Dialing press Redial Dial the Speed Dialing Code e g common code 001 If the entire stored numb...

Page 1118: ...ion Speed Dial buffer number to be programmed 0 9 1 Station Speed Dial Buffer 1 2 Station Speed Dial Buffer 2 3 Station Speed Dial Buffer 3 4 Station Speed Dial Buffer 4 5 Station Speed Dial Buffer 5 6 Station Speed Dial Buffer 6 7 Station Speed Dial Buffer 7 8 Station Speed Dial Buffer 8 9 Station Speed Dial Buffer 9 0 Station Speed Dial Buffer 10 4 Dial the telephone number you want to store up ...

Page 1119: ... key to chain to a stored number To dial a Station Speed Dialing number Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the Handset 2 Station Speed Dial 7 Group Speed Dial 813 System Speed Dial 814 3 Dial the Speed Dial Memory Location Station Speed Dial 0 9 Group Speed Dial xxx none at default System Speed Dial 000 9999 4 Converse ...

Page 1120: ...resents equipment manufacturer ABC Corporation The ABC Corporation is divided into three groups Sales Service and Parts When a user needs to search the ABC Corporation Telephone Book for a Sales number the search from all 450 entries in the ABC Corporation Telephone Book can be narrowed to the entries in the Sales Group only Conditions A maximum of 200 Telephone Books is supported Each extension i...

Page 1121: ... for you MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 13 07 01 Telephone Book Dial Number and Name Speed Dialing Data Assign telephone numbers to entries in each book There are 200 books with 450 entries 0 449 in each book Maximum of 24 digits 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Recall Flash Press line key 2 Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN Press line key 3 No Setting 13 07 02 Telephone Book Dia...

Page 1122: ...book A station can have a maximum of two telephone books assigned Maximum of eight digits 0 200 Port 1 1 Port 2 2 Port 200 200 15 19 02 System Telephone Book Setup for Extension Telephone Book 2 Assign a station to the second telephone book A station can have a maximum of two telephone books assigned Maximum of eight digits 0 200 0 15 19 06 System Telephone Book Setup for Extension Locking of Tele...

Page 1123: ... want to search and press the centre cursor pad button All the entries in the group are selected press the Up Down arrows to scroll through all entries in the group Select the NUM softkey to search by number Use the same search criteria explained in the Search by Number section Select the MEM softkey to search by registry memory area 0 449 Type in the registry memory area 0 449 to jump to that ent...

Page 1124: ... is already used you have the option to overwrite that field the old entry will be deleted If you do not want to overwrite it press NO if you do press YES If you selected a memory area that was not assigned all the entries that you made to the new memory area are assigned and you are returned to the speed dial entry selection window To delete entries in the Telephone Book 1 Press the DIR softkey 2...

Page 1125: ... unavailable Conditions If required use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code default code 2 A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned code 36 In Program 20 08 12 enable 1 or disable 0 an extension user ability to use Department Step Calling Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related...

Page 1126: ... extensions in Department Group 1 with priority in port order Port 1 priority 1 Port 256 priority 256 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On Call Queui...

Page 1127: ...ansferred among four extensions SMDR shows how long each of the callers stayed on the call Data Call Tracking Data Call Tracking can log the system internal data calls Since SMDR normally logs external trunk data calls Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of data terminal activity Digit Counting With Digit Counting SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls For example if the digi...

Page 1128: ...such as HyperTerminal Printing of the SMDR information must be done from that program Internal SMDR provides Answered Calls SMDR records the calling extension and the extension number or name of who was called Held Calls SMDR records the extension numbers of the party on hold and the held party The duration of the call is recorded as the time both parties are connected until one party becomes idle...

Page 1129: ...the parked extension in the STATION column and the extension that retrieved the park in the DIALLED column SMDR Enhanced for Caller ID The SMDR output is enhanced to include up to 16 or 24 characters of the Caller ID name information depending on the view option selected in Program 35 02 18 You can select to display the Caller ID number or name or the DID number If you want to display the Caller N...

Page 1130: ...l Example of SMDR Report Flexible Transfer Virtual Loopback Enhancement When calls are routed through the ISDN Virtual Loopback the SMDR information does not provide enough information to provide complete tracking of route of the call This has been enhanced with the addition of a tag to any part of the call that is routed through the virtual loopback to enable complete tracking of the call When a ...

Page 1131: ...hat is not a usual number or trunk port index the SMDR software gets the information that a virtual loopback channel is used Additionally on the Virtual Loopback s S points the station s phone number isn t used but the trunk port index of the associated T point again marked as virtual This way the SMDR software can directly use the mark as tag to link the calls together Virtual Loopback T Point Tr...

Page 1132: ...sed If an extension uses a Virtual Loop T point to dial out this port is tagged in the SMDR report accordingly as well the associated S point The same applies if internal SMDR is enabled and the S point is called Then the S point is printed as tagged associated T point Here is an example of an external call being routed through the T point of the Virtual Loop Virtual Loopback External Call Routed ...

Page 1133: ...itions Report Heading Definition Call Record Number SMDR record number consecutive CLASS Type of call see Class Definitions below TIME Time call placed or answered For Transferred calls shows time user picked up Transfer DATE Date the call was made Program 35 02 14 1 For Extension calls this area is blank LINE Trunk number used for call For Extension calls this area is blank DURATION The time the ...

Page 1134: ...alls ALB All lines in group are busy group number follows TIME field BRD Call blocked due to Toll Restriction PTRS Transferred call IVIN BRI PRI inbound trunk call ICM Extension call SMDR Report Format with Program 35 02 14 Set to 0 Character Position Field Definition Header Line 1 1 60 Spaces 61 70 MM DD YYYY 71 Space 72 75 PAGE ...

Page 1135: ...ace 7 10 TIME 11 14 Spaces 15 18 LIN 19 22 Spaces 23 30 DURATION 31 32 Spaces 33 39 STATION 40 44 Spaces 45 51 DIALLED 52 Space 53 59 No CLI 60 63 Spaces 64 70 ACCOUNT CR LF Carriage return and line feed LF Line feed SMDR Record 1 4 Call type e g POT for outgoing 5 Space 6 10 Time in 24 hour clock HH MM 11 Space 12 21 LINE 22 Space 23 30 Call Duration HH MM SS 31 Space 32 41 Station number or name...

Page 1136: ...th Program 35 02 14 Set to 1 Character Position Field Definition Header Line 1 1 60 Spaces 61 70 MM DD YYYY 71 Space 72 75 PAGE 76 Space 77 79 Report page number e g 001 CR LF Carriage return and line feed Header Line 2 1 5 CLASS 6 Space 7 10 TIME 11 Spaces 12 15 DATE 16 17 Spaces 18 21 LINE 22 Space 23 30 DURATION 31 32 Spaces 33 39 STATION 40 44 Spaces 45 51 DIALLED 52 Space 53 59 No CLI 60 63 S...

Page 1137: ...e return and line feed LF Line feed SMDR Record 1 4 Call type e g POT for outgoing 5 Space 6 10 Time in 24 hour clock HH MM 11 Space 12 16 DATE 17 Space 18 21 LINE 22 Space 23 30 Call Duration HH MM SS 31 Space 32 41 Station number or name 42 Space 43 62 Number dialed 20 digits maximum 63 Space 64 79 Account number or NO ANSWER ...

Page 1138: ...l calls The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavailable When the buffer fills SMDR will not collect any new calls until the buffer is cleared The SV9100 can buffer up to 4000 calls When SMDR reports are enabled using the same port as the Traffic Reporting feature example 147 the SMDR blocks the Traffic reports Unplug the cable and plug it back in to allow Traffic reports to print SMDR ...

Page 1139: ...creened transfers generate three records and the duration overlaps between those three extensions CCIS Centralized Billing will only buffer 320 calls The SMDR call records will be buffered when the system cannot output the SMDR information due to the lost connection When the connection is active the SMDR information will be immediately output and it will not be buffered When the system is powered ...

Page 1140: ...ce 0 External Device 14 IP DECT Directory Access 0 10 20 03 LAN Setup for External Equipment Keep Alive Time Define the keep alive time for communicating to external equipment 1 255 seconds 30 14 01 06 Basic Trunk Data Setup SMDR Printout Have the system print or Not print the trunk you are programming in the SMDR printout Refer to Programs 35 01 and 35 02 for SMDR printout options 0 No Print Out ...

Page 1141: ...de Data Determine if Accumulated Account Code Data is included in the SMDR report for each COS 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 13 36 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Call Duration Timer Display Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the extension 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 35 01 01 SMDR Options Output Port Type Specify the type of connection used for SMDR The baud rate for the COM port should ...

Page 1142: ... the PBX trunk access code 0 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 1 35 02 03 SMDR Output Options Trunk Number or Name Select whether the system should display the trunk name or number on SMDR reports If this option is set to 0 Program 35 02 14 must be set to 0 0 Name 1 Number 1 35 02 04 SMDR Output Options Summary Daily Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a daily summary at midnight every ...

Page 1143: ...he Caller ID should be displayed when the incoming DID number is transferred to an outgoing trunk 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 0 35 02 14 SMDR Output Options Date Determine whether or not the date should be displayed on SMDR reports This option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is set to be displayed in Program 35 02 03 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 0 35 02 15 SMDR Output Options CLI DID Number Swit...

Page 1144: ...on enabled in the ASCII setup an additional line break may appear above the Caller name line 0 Normal 1 Line Feed 0 35 02 21 SMDR Output Options S Point Terminal Number Set up SMDR Port 1 0 MSN Number 1 Extension Number 0 35 02 22 SMDR Output Options Security Auto Dialing Select whether the system should display the SAD Security Auto Dialing on SMDR report SMDR Port 1 8 0 No Output 1 Output 0 35 0...

Page 1145: ...1145 SMDR flowcharts are located on the following pages SMDR with a GCD CP10 Connection Ethernet ...

Page 1146: ...1146 SMDR Flowchart Continued ...

Page 1147: ...1147 SMDR Flowchart Continued ...

Page 1148: ...1148 SMDR Flowchart Continued Operation Once installed and programmed SMDR operation is automatic ...

Page 1149: ... name is displayed on the multiline terminal LCD when an intercom or K CCIS call is placed Conditions Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing Single line telephone extensions cannot program names Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with Display Required Component None Related Features Directory Dialing Name Storing ...

Page 1150: ...y default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 21 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Extension Name Turn Off or On an extension user ability to program its ...

Page 1151: ...ters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 Keys for Entering Names Continued Use this keypad digit When you want to 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters π Σ Ω Accepts an entry onlyrequired iftwo letterson the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accep...

Page 1152: ... dialed from an extension that does not have an extension swap password programmed error tone is heard If the Extension Swap service code is dialed from an extension whose Class of Service does not allow Extension Data Swap error tone is heard If the destination extension entered is not a valid extension error tone is heard The following user setting data is relocated with the extension All other ...

Page 1153: ...ion Data Swap Ext Data Swap xxx service code in accordance with Program 11 01 MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits No Setting 20 13 42 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Extension Data Swap Enabling Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Station Relocation 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 92 05 01 Extension Data Swap Password Password Fixed 4 Digits Fixed four digits No setting at default...

Page 1154: ...5 20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment Program 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Program 20 06 Class of Service for Extensions Program 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Program 21 04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Program 21 07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Program 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension Program 21 11 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignmen...

Page 1155: ...p Service Code not assigned at default Program 11 15 12 3 Dial the Extension Data Swap Password not assigned at default Program 92 05 01 4 Dial the extension to be swapped with or relocated to 5 When successfully completed confirmation tone is heard and the display shows completed 6 Press Speaker twice to exit ...

Page 1156: ... sites If connecting a Remote site with SV8100 hardware the hardware must first be removed to let Netlink establish a connection The reason for this is the Remote site must first pull the Licensing for Hardware Migration from the Primary site Once Netlink has established you can slot the SV8100 hardware The connection status can be verified by logging in the Primary system and checking Blade confi...

Page 1157: ...1 Program 90 01 or Program 90 09 Data in SRAM area is not transferred to the Secondary Systems during fail over therefore when fail over occurs DND and Caller ID History may be lost When a Secondary System with an ETIA or RTB assigned is added to a NetLink network the Primary Systems database does not replicate the data in Programs 10 55 or 90 61 Both the Primary Site and Secondary Sites can have ...

Page 1158: ...em 1 TDM Terminal P 1 S1 1 S1 1 P 2 P 1 S1 1 P 2 S1 1 0 0 P1 1 S2 1 S1 1 S2 1 Secondary System 2 TDM Terminal P 1 S2 1 S2 1 P 2 P 1 S2 1 P 2 S2 1 S1 1 S2 1 S1 1 S2 1 0 0 P Primary S1 Secondary System 1 S2 Secondary System 2 The number of conference blocks in a NetLink network is the same as a stand alone system Invalid data is displayed in the LCD of the terminal if Program 51 01 is enabled When i...

Page 1159: ...link network 8 digit extensions and mailboxes are not supported The SV9100 can recognize each system where the DT700 extension s are connected and provide an Automatic Route Selection ARS COS based on the System System ID when using NetLink When NetLink is enabled synchronous ringing Program 14 02 17 is automatically disabled Synchronous ringing is not supported in a NetLink environment All nodes ...

Page 1160: ...re only supported within the same countries areas For example the SV9100 can be connected via NetLink between the US and Canada however the SV9100 can not be connected via NetLink with systems in other countries e g Mexico or the U K Synchronous Ringing via NetLink is not supported ...

Page 1161: ... system The allocation of the trunk and Register ID of Program14 12 must be in the same system In order to use CPN in a secondary system Program 51 19 must be turned on for those extensions Once enabled CPN may be sent on a per station basis using Program 21 19 Once NetLink is established PCPro or WebPro must be used to change the system data related to the SIP trunks Any SIP trunks that are built...

Page 1162: ...None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s GCD CP10 Blade with GPZ IPLE SD B1 4GB card SV9100 NETLINK NODE License Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Guide to Feature Programming The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 10 12 03 GCD CP10 Network Setup Default Gateway Define th...

Page 1163: ...40 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 51 01 01 NetLink System Property Setting NetLink System ID This is the ID of each NetLink sys...

Page 1164: ...od 0 Immediate This default setting does not use the Nagle Algorithm When enabled data packets are immediately sent across the network with no buffering delay 1 Buffering Nagle Algorithm enabled Small data packets are not transmitted immediately across the network The smaller data packets will be buffered and then sent across as larger data packets decreasing the number of packets sent across the ...

Page 1165: ... 223 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 51 05 01 NetLink Timer Settings Keep Alive Sending Interval This is the Keep Alive sending time from the Secondary system to confirm communication with the Primary system 1 3600 seconds 5 51 05 02 NetLink Timer Settings Keep Alive Response Waiting Time This is the time the Secondary system waits for a response from the Primary system before cutting off communication 0 5 10...

Page 1166: ...me 0 51 07 01 NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting Forced Change Primary System Enabling Set this item whether the Forced Change Primary is available or not 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 51 07 02 NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting Package Reset Timing Option When Forced Change Primary System is done all packages reset This option can select the timing of package reset 0 Reset when...

Page 1167: ... If 0 is not specified the number and continuous maximum 50 number is used e g 5000 is specified 5001 5002 5049 are used 0 65535 0 51 09 05 NetLink Communication Port Settings Primary Detection Port Enter port number to seek the Top Priority Primary system If 0 is specified temporary port is selected dynamically 0 65535 0 51 09 06 NetLink Communication Port Settings Database Replication Communicat...

Page 1168: ... Information IP Address For reference only For reference only 000 000 000 000 51 12 04 Primary System Information MAC Address For reference only For reference only 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 51 12 05 Primary System Information Primary Priority Level For reference only For reference only 0 51 12 06 Primary System Information Main Software Version For reference only For reference only XX XX 51 13 01 NetLink...

Page 1169: ...zed at the time set in Item 02 below When set to 2 the systems are synchronized at regular time intervals set in Item 03 below 0 Disable 1 Setting Time Mode 2 Interval Mode 2 51 16 02 NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting System Data Replication Time Setting Set the time of day that both systems synchronize database when Item 01 is set to 1 0000 2359 0000 51 16 03 NetLink System Data Replic...

Page 1170: ... alone 0 2 10 0 Infinity 0 51 19 01 NetLink IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension NetLink CPN Transmission This program assigns transmission of Calling Party Number CPN from Program 21 19 for each secondary system The transmission applies for every extension 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the IP address for each DSP on the GPZ IPLE xxx xxx xxx xxx S...

Page 1171: ... domain network Below are the primary features of the card set Switches unlike hubs use microsegmentation to create collision domains one per connected segment This way only the Ethernet devices which are directly connected via a point to point link or directly connected hubs are contending for the medium By eliminating collisions full duplex point to point connections on the switch are possible W...

Page 1172: ...er class Stacking Network Configuration The GSWU Main board will maintain the network configuration and card initialization sequence The provision of IP address from the back plane will identify the Main board If during initialization the IP address is set to 0 by the CPU then the card is determined to be an Add on card The IP address for the GSWU will be assigned in program Program 10 55 on the S...

Page 1173: ...ort speed is set to 10Mbps this LED is OFF The number of supported GCD ETIA blades are to be determined by the power consumption chart Reference Hardware manual for more details When linking multiple GCD ETIA cards each card must be statically assigned an IP address and each blade must be linked Default Settings None System Availability Terminals None Required Components GCD ETIA Related Features ...

Page 1174: ...255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 10 55 05 Package Network Setup Default Gateway Define the default gateway for the GCD ETIA 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 ...

Page 1175: ...ice compression The SV9100 can provide legacy line trunk interfaces to support the existing Time Division Multiplexing TDM based infrastructure such as analog telephones digital telephones DT300 DT400 series analog networks and digital networks T1 E1 ISDN etc Encryption This feature is supported with main software V 2 5 or above and terminal firmware 92 2 1 0 or above SV9100 supports AES 128 bit e...

Page 1176: ...ult page can be defined for the DESI Less terminal to change to when it goes idle or when it has answered a call DESI Less screen page switching only applies to idle terminals If a terminal is not idle the screen will not switch if another call comes in until the phone goes idle The Electronic Headset Switch EHS is only supported on the ITL DTL 8LD ITL DTL 12 24 and ITL 320C terminals The EHS and ...

Page 1177: ...sy Lamp Field BLF and 1 button access to extensions trunks and system features Available in black and white DTL 12BT Bluetooth available in black DTL 12PA Power Save Adapter provides backup for analog trunk connection DT400 Series DT410 DTZ 2E Economical terminal providing access to basic telephony and messaging Digital Economy DTZ 6DE service Terminal TDM Fully functional keypad providing standar...

Page 1178: ...ional 60 button DSS Console provides 60 programmable keys and provides users a Busy Lamp Field BLF and 1 button access to extensions trunks and system features ITL 12PA Power Save Adapter provides backup for analog trunk connection DT730G Value ITL 12CG ITL 12DG Provides access to more sophisticated system features allowing room for growth DT 730G terminals come with a standard back lit LCD displa...

Page 1179: ... features allowing room for Value ITZ 12DG growth DT 830G terminals come with a standard back lit LCD display full duplex speakerphone capability module support for expansion and feature add on capability Available in black only Expands the capability by providing XML display to provide more productivity enhanced applications to the users 12CG equipped with color LCD display 12CG 12DG support Giga...

Page 1180: ... PSTN Adapter for analog N A N A DSS 60 Button DSS Console N A Connect to Digital Port on KTS Digital APR Analog Port adapter with Ringer N A DESI Less LK LCD Unit Except 8LD 1 Unit N A Backlit LCD Except 8LD 1 Unit N A IP DESI Less LK LCD Unit N A Built in Except ITL 12CG 3 ITL 12DG 3 N A N A Connectivity of Options DT400 DT800 Terminal Options IP Terminals Value ITZ 8LDG 3 ITZ 12D 3 Economy ITZ ...

Page 1181: ...t adapter with Ringer N A Terminal and Adapter Compatibility DT300 DT700 and Terminal and Adapter Compatibility DT400 DT800 show the compatibility between the terminals and adapters used in the system Terminal and Adapter Compatibility DT300 DT700 Adapter Unit Terminal ADA L APR L ILPA PSA L BCH L BHA L GBA L IPv6 L Digital Terminals DT300 DTL 2E 1 BK TEL DTL 6DE 1 BK TEL DTL 12E 1 BK TEL DTL 8LD ...

Page 1182: ...ole DCL 60 1 BK WH CONSOLE Option Not Available Optional Available 1 When the ILPA R is connected to a 12CG 12DG terminal maximum connection speed drops to 100Mbps 2 The 12CG 12DG terminals support Gigabit Ethernet GBA L Unit not required Terminal and Adapter Compatibility DT400 DT800 Adapter Unit Terminal ADA L APR L ILPA BHA Z BCA Z Digital Terminals DT400 DTZ 2E 3 BK TEL DTZ 6DE 3 BK TEL DTZ 12...

Page 1183: ...s 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 1 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 1 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 4 and 6 are ON ADA Connection for Sending Recorded Calls to the Telephone Dip switches 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 1 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 1 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 1 4 and 6 are ON To Send and Receive...

Page 1184: ...cord into the terminal Terminal and Line Key LCD Compatibility DT300 DT700 and Terminal and Line Key LCD Compatibility DT400 DT800 show the compatibility between the terminals and Line Key or LCD used in the system Terminal and Line Key LCD Compatibility DT300 DT700 Line Key LCD Terminal 8 LK L 8LKD LD L 8LKI LD L 12LK L LCD BL L DCL 60 Digital Terminals DT300 DTL 2E 1 BK TEL DTL 6DE 1 BK TEL DTL ...

Page 1185: ...K WH TEL ITL 32D 1 BK WH TEL ITL 320C 1 BK TEL Option Not Available Optional Available Terminal and Line Key LCD Compatibility DT400 DT800 Line Key LCD Terminal 8 LK Z 16LK Z DCL 60 Digital Terminals DT400 DTZ 2E 3 BK TEL DTZ 6DE 3 BK TEL DTZ 12D 3 BK WH TEL DTZ 24D 3 BK WH TEL DTZ 8LD 3 BK WH TEL IP Terminals DT800 ITZ 8LD 3 BK TEL ITZ 12D 3 BK WH TEL ITZ 24D 3 BK WH TEL ITZ 12CG 3 BK WH TEL ITZ ...

Page 1186: ...ity between the terminals and Ten Key kits used in the system Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility DT300 DT700 Ten Key Kit Terminal BS BS BS F L BS S L Braille L BS Retro l S Hotel BK KIT Digital Terminals DT300 DTL 2E 1 BK TEL DTL 6DE 1 BK TEL DTL 12E 1 BK TEL DTL 8LD BK WH TEL DTL 12D 1 BK WH TEL DTL 12BT 1 BK TEL DTL 12PA 1 BK TEL DTL 24D 1 BK WH TEL DTL 32D 1 BK WH TEL IP Terminals DT700 ITL...

Page 1187: ...Available Optional Available The BS Braille L BK KIT kit consists of stickers to be installed Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility DT400 DT800 Ten Key Kit Terminal Sticker BS BS F Z BS S Z BS ACD Z Braille Z KIT Retro F Z Digital Terminals DT400 DTZ 2E 3 BK TEL DTZ 6DE 3 BK TEL DTZ 12D 3 BK WH TEL DTZ 24D 3 BK WH TEL DTZ 8LD 3 BK WH TEL IP Terminals DT800 ITZ 8LD 3 BK TEL ITZ 12D 3 BK WH TEL ITZ...

Page 1188: ...must be turned on in the DT800 700 as well as the SV9100 for encryption to take place Encryption is supported between the DT800 700 terminal and the GPZ IPLE VoIPDB Encryption can be enabled on a per phone basis CCISoIP and SIP trunking are not supported Program 10 26 02 RTP forwarding is not supported with encryption Multicast paging room monitor etc is not encrypted If Program 90 45 01 is used t...

Page 1189: ... phones that are registered to a primary NetLink can fail over to a secondary system regardless of encryption settings Default Settings None System Availability Terminals None Required Component s None Related Features None ...

Page 1190: ...nable 1 15 25 02 DESI less Page Setup Incoming Call Automatic Screen Switching Enable Disable the ability of a DESI Less terminal to switch to the page that has an incoming call on one of the keys 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 15 25 03 DESI less Page Setup Idle Automatic Screen Switching Define or Disable the page to be automatically displayed when a DESI Less terminal becomes idle 0 Disable 1 Display page...

Page 1191: ...SRTP Mode Setup Set the encryption of the SRTP voice packets 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 90 45 01 Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone Temporary Password Change Request Change the temporary password 00 00 00 00 FF FF F FF Change Yes 1 00 00 00 00 Operation Refer to individual features ...

Page 1192: ...ot used The Cursor key on DT7xx DT8xx DT3xx DT4xx terminals can be used to control the scroll feature One record in SYSTEM CALL HISTORY function is registered relating to one external incoming call If a notified calling number agrees in search of Common ABB Program 13 04 area the name of ABB is registered into the SYSTEM CALL HISTORY record Telephone Book is not applied Internal Caller Logs are no...

Page 1193: ...T800 Series Y Bluetooth Handset Y DC550 Softphone Y Console only Curl Cordless Telephone Y Y Applied N Not Applied Trunk Application Terminal Type Applied Not Applied Remarks Analog Line Y 1 ISDN BRI Line Y 1 ISDN PRI Line Y 1 SIP Line Y 1 H 323 Line Y 1 CCIS Y 1 Y Applied N Not Applied 1 Trunk is registered to Caller Log Related Features None ...

Page 1194: ...Basic Data Setup Call Register Mode The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk calls only 0 or both Internal and Trunk calls 1 For the ML440 extensions this should be set to 1 0 Trunk Mode 1 Extension Trunk Mode 0 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by defa...

Page 1195: ...1195 System Caller Log Example 2 4 LED Operation On Red Other Using On Green Using Off Not Using ...

Page 1196: ...sperson Set up the Trunk to Trunk Conference Drop out of the call The office manager could terminate the conference anytime Tandem Trunking methods include Method A Tandem Trunking from Conference An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference by dialing a 2 digit service code 8 or a uniquely programmed Transfer key Method B Tandem Trunking with Transfer Key This method allow...

Page 1197: ...am 20 28 03 the warning tone is heard again After 30 seconds Tandem Trunking Program 24 02 10 or DISA Program 25 07 08 the call is disconnected Conditions Tandem Trunking requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or ground start trunks The maximum number of simultaneous trunk to trunk conferences allowed is determined by the Conference feature setup Refer to the Guide to Featur...

Page 1198: ...r 3 Press Transfer to complete the Trunk to Trunk transfer When the second call is to be transferred to another station Not Trunk to Trunk the user should press Hold at step 3 then dial the desired station and press Transfer to complete the transfer Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones Required Component s None Related Features ...

Page 1199: ...le 1 Enable 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Optional Assign a function key for Transfer code 06 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other ext...

Page 1200: ...o Trunk Transfer outgoing from trunk Tandem Trunking When this time expires a warning tone is heard If Program 24 02 10 is set the conversation disconnects after time expires This time is set again when the external digit time expires One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk or leased line 0 64800 seconds 1800 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect Trunk to Trunk This timer starts a...

Page 1201: ...of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 07 11 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Forced Trunk Disconnect analog trunk only Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect This allows the extension user to disconnec...

Page 1202: ... must be an analog trunk or leased line 0 64800 seconds 1800 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect Trunk to Trunk This timer starts after the Trunk to Trunk warning tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 0 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conversation can talk before the Long Conv...

Page 1203: ...connect This allows the extension user to disconnect an Unsupervised Conference in progress 0 Off 1 On COS 1 14 0 COS 15 1 20 11 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Automatic On Hook Transfer Turn Off or On the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is not possible 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to T...

Page 1204: ...de as required MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 833 11 10 07 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Canceling the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line If the default service code 734 for canceling Automatic Tandem Trunking feature is not acceptable change the code as required MLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 834 11 10 08 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Setting the Destination for ...

Page 1205: ...1 05 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls Select the Receive CODEC gain level used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference 1 57 15 5dB 12 5dB in 0 5dB intervals 16 8dB 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Transfer For each trunk enter 1 to enable loop supervision 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign...

Page 1206: ...ansfer Disconnect Trunk to Trunk This timer starts after the Trunk to Trunk warning tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 0 24 04 01 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Target Setup Assign the Speed Dialing number 0 9999 to be used as the destination for the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Trunks 1 400 0 9999 9999 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the time a DISA call...

Page 1207: ...ation Disconnect Code Input the code that can be dialed to disconnect the conversation after the Trunk to Trunk Release Warning tone is heard 0 9 No Setting 20 28 03 Trunkto TrunkConversation Conversation Continue Time Input the time the conversation extends when the Conversation Continue Code is dialed 0 64800 seconds 0 24 02 07 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning ...

Page 1208: ...ore disconnecting a DISA or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 10 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number 1 33 35 Edit the warning service tone in the system 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot Operation Method A Tandem Trunking from Conference To set up a Tandem Call 1 Place or answer first trunk call 2 Press Con...

Page 1209: ... use Forced Trunk Disconnect i e Press the line key 3 or the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in Program 11 10 26 must be used by an extension other than the originating extension Single Line Telephone To set up a Tandem Call 1 Place or answer first trunk call 2 Press hookflash and dial 1 3 Place or answer second trunk call 4 To set up the tandem call press hookflash and dial 753 5 Hang...

Page 1210: ... disconnect the Conference use Forced Trunk Disconnect i e Press the line key or 9 plus the trunk number 3 To cancel Automatic Tandem Trunking 1 Dial service code 834 or the service code set for Disable Automatic Transfer per Trunk 2 Dial the desired trunk number Trunk Number 001 400 3 Hang up To disconnect the Conference Forced Trunk Disconnect i e Press the line key or 9 plus the trunk number 3 ...

Page 1211: ...transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After the programmed time Program 24 02 07 a warning tone is heard and the user dials the Continue code Program 20 28 01 to extend the conversation 3 After the programmed time Program 20 28 03 the warning tone is heard again After the programmed time Program 24 02 10 the call is disconnected ...

Page 1212: ... support the Cordless DTL 8R 1 terminal The Override function for IP multiline terminals and Softphones is supported The Bluetooth Cordless Handset BCH is not a supported terminal when using 1st Party CTI 3rd Party CTI or with the Desktop Suite A maximum of 256 1st Party CTI over Ethernet connections is supported Any Desktop Application connection takes away from the 256 maximum connections Caller...

Page 1213: ...e lineGenerateDigits lineSetStatusMessages lineGenerateTone lineMonitorDigits When SOAI Simplified OAI used by DT Plusware and 3rd Party TAPI i e Desktop Applications Shared Services are used in the same system the following limitations apply to only the SOAI application Multiple Call Handling Operator Terminal Call Queuing etc is not supported for extensions controlled by SOAI SOAI controlled ext...

Page 1214: ...e IP Address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 192 168 0 10 10 12 02 GCD CP10 Network Setup Subnet Mask 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when all 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 Host Addresses are 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 If the network section is 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 25...

Page 1215: ...ates Availability of 1st Party CTI client connection 0 Not Available 1 Available No Setting Operation TAPI operation is automatic once programmed in the telephone system and enabled in the PC TAPI application unless a headset is used Using the Headset with Automatic Answer 1 With the multiline terminal in an idle state press the Help key 2 Press the Headset key Program 15 07 or SC 851 05 twice 3 P...

Page 1216: ...1216 To cancel Automatic Headset repeat these steps 4 Press the Headset key Program 15 07 or SC 851 05 to go off hook ...

Page 1217: ...answer the Override Conditions One Tone Override at a time can be received at a multiline terminal Tone Override can be accomplished only after receiving a BUSY tone Tone Override originate is allowed from a single line telephone until the PBR times out Virtual Extensions do not support Tone Override Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s No...

Page 1218: ...naling that occurs when a telephone user receives a second call while busy on a handset call To enable or disable off hook signaling for an extension Class of Service use Program 20 13 06 0 Muted Off Hook Ringing 1 No Off Hook Ringing 2 Not Used 3 Beep in Speaker SP 4 Beep in Handset HS 5 Speaker Handset Beep 5 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for off hook Signaling code 3...

Page 1219: ...k 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 05 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Intercom Off Hook Signaling Turn Off or On an extension ability to send off hook signals This setting functions with Programs 20 09 07 and 20 13 06 disabled 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension user to Manual...

Page 1220: ...sy Tone Refer to Table 2 39 Define Ring Busy Tone 32 Service Tone Setup Program 80 01 02 Operation To send Off Hook signals to an extension busy on a call Your extension may send Off Hook signals automatically 1 Dial Program11 16 04 OR Dial 809 Program 11 12 02 OR Press the Off Hook Signaling key Program 15 07 01 code 33 You hear Ring Busy Tone The called extension hears Call Alert Notification To...

Page 1221: ...this data to the PC for the total period Conditions The SMDR call buffer stores 4000 calls The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavailable When the buffer fills the oldest record is deleted to allow the new record to be saved If connected to the output device the reports print hourly If not connected and the data is not output at the end of the hour the traffic data is overwritten by n...

Page 1222: ...imum 65535 calls Related Features Station Message Detail Recording Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 10 20 12 LAN Setup for External Equipment TCP Port Define the TCP port address etc for communicating to external equipment 0 65535 90 20 01 Traffic Report Data Setup Call Traffic Output Determine whether or not the Call Traffic Output should be ...

Page 1223: ...to extension 105 Without Automatic On Hook Transfer the call would stay on Hold at extension 104 when the user hangs up To extend the call the user at extension 104 would have to press the Transfer key again before hanging up Each method has advantages Automatic On Hook Transfer makes transferring calls easier However users have to be more aware of how they handle their calls on Hold Without Autom...

Page 1224: ...One Digit Code Attendant Setup Transfer Key Can Place Call on Hold While on a call press Transfer to place the call on hold Conditions An existing call can be transferred into a call with Barge In enabled Unscreened Transfers from voice mail show pre answer Caller ID information With Transfer to Busy Extensions enabled Program 24 02 01 1 Call Forwarding with Both Ringing offers a unique option A t...

Page 1225: ...ansfer to complete the Trunk to Trunk transfer When the second call is to be transferred to another station Not Trunk to Trunk the user should press Hold at step 3 then dial the desired station and press Transfer to complete the transfer If station A calls Station B and station A puts station B on hold and then calls station C station C cannot transfer the call When transfer recall is disabled una...

Page 1226: ...ration Mode Set the operating mode of the extension Conf key The keys can be for Call Transfer Serial Calling or Flash When selecting 2 refer also to Program 81 01 14 0 Transfer 1 Serial Call 2 Flash 0 15 02 24 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Conference Key Mode Program an extension Conf key for Conference or Transfer When set for Transfer the user places a call on hold dials the extension to...

Page 1227: ... to use Transfer Without Holding 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 11 08 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Information Display Turn Off or On an extension ability for incoming Transfer preanswer display 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 11 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Automatic On Hook Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer 0 Of...

Page 1228: ...o use Barge In 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 18 07 Service Tone Timers Intrusion Tone Repeat Time After a call is interrupted such as Barge In Voice Mail Conversation Recording or Voice Over the system repeats the Intrusion tone after this time Normally you should enter 0 0 64800 seconds 0 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External The system waits for this time to expire...

Page 1229: ...ork with voice mail the transferred call must be an unscreened transfer 0 Hold Tone 1 Ring Back Tone 0 24 02 03 System Options for Transfer Delayed Call Forwarding Time If activated at an extension Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this time This also sets the time a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox 0 64800 seconds 10 ...

Page 1230: ...p Destination Number Define the digit used by a VRS caller which allows their call to be transferred to the external page Maximum of eight digits No Setting 31 05 01 Universal Night Answer Ring Over Page For each trunk which should ring the external page set the External Page zone 1 9 to allow ringing 0 No Ringing No 1 Ringing Yes 0 Operation Transferring Trunk Calls To Transfer a trunk call to a ...

Page 1231: ... or press the lit line key to return to the call In addition you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp On Single line telephone users can press hookflash to retrieve the call If a call was transferred and the user has hung up the handset only the unanswered call can be retrieved by dialing and the extension number to which it transferred 3 Announce your call and press Transfer Program 15 0...

Page 1232: ...e becomes a regular 4 party Conference call 4 Hang up Transferring a Call to a Trunk Ring Group 1 While on a call press Transfer 2 Dial the Transfer to Ring Group service code defined in Program 11 15 09 You hear confirmation tone 3 Hang up The call is transferred to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22 05 01 and all assigned extensions in the group Program 22 04 01 ring or it rings the Exte...

Page 1233: ...es and DDD lines program the trunk group to route to the WATS lines first Priority Type of Trunk 1 WATS 2 OCC 3 DDD Conditions Unless a user preselects a trunk Trunk Group programming selects the trunk Speed Dialing used for trunk calls If a user dials a number that is not programmed in ARS the system can route the call to a trunk group All DID trunks of the same type should be placed in the same ...

Page 1234: ...12 14 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trunk Group Access If the service code for Trunk Group Access 704 by default is not acceptable change it as necessary MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 804 14 02 11 Analog Trunk Data Setup Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone Enable Disable the system ability to skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected This pertains to calls using Speed Dial ARS ...

Page 1235: ...ss Maps to extensions Trunk Access Maps 1 400 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function keys for trunk group access code 02 group or Call Appearance CAP Keys code 08 CAP Key orbit 0001 9999 or 0000 for auto assign Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 02 02 System Options for Multiline Telephones Trunk Group...

Page 1236: ...t Number Redial or Save Number dialed It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls 0 64800 seconds 3 Operation To place a call over a trunk group 1 At the multiline telephone press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 804 3 Dial trunk group number 1 9 or 001 100 4 Dial number OR 1 Press the Trunk Group key Program 15 07 or SC 852 02 group 2 Dial the numbe...

Page 1237: ...es first There are 100 available Trunk Groups and 100 Routes Outbound First Choice Second Choice Third Choice Conditions DISA Program 25 10 and Tie Lines Program 34 03 have separate Trunk Group Routing programs The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming Program 14 06 when setting up Ringing Line Preference Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks within a spec...

Page 1238: ...g changes in Program 11 01 Dial maximum of four digits 9 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code 2nd Trunk Route Access Code Define additional trunk access codes When a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code the system routes their call to the Alternate Trunk Route Dial maximum of four digits No Setting 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Assign trunks to trunk groups Trunk Port 1 400 Priority 1 ...

Page 1239: ...1 02 01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Assign the trunk routes to extensions Trunk Group Routes 1 100 Day Night Mode 1 8 Route Table Number 0 100 0 No Setting 1 21 15 01 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code assigned in Program 11 09 02 Trunk Group Routing is set up in Program 14 06 Trunk Group R...

Page 1240: ...es 1 100 Day Night Mode 1 8 Route Table Number 0 100 0 No Setting 1 34 03 01 Trunk Group Routing for E M Tie Lines Assign the Trunk Group Route chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9 Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14 06 If the system has ARS dialing 9 accesses ARS Trunk Group Routes 0 100 0 No Setting 1 Operation To place a call using Trunk Group Routing 1 At the multiline terminal p...

Page 1241: ... Trunk Queuing the user does not have to manually retry the trunk later Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group When a trunk becomes free the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left Conditions With Automatic Route Selection ARS Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route A user can camp on or l...

Page 1242: ...8 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 20 01 08 System Options Trunk Queuing Callback Time Set the Trunk Queuing Callback Time Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for this time 0 64800 seconds 15 20 01 09 System Options Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time Set the Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels an extension C...

Page 1243: ...r Outgoing Calls Reset Dial After Failure of Trunk Access Enable Disable an extension user ability to continue to dial codes or extensions after receiving Trunk Busy This must be set to 0 for the Forced Trunk Disconnect feature to work 0 Enable 1 Disable 1 Operation To queue for a busy trunk 1 Try to access the busy trunk 2 Dial or 850 OR Press Trunk Queuing Camp On key Program 15 07 or SC 851 35 ...

Page 1244: ...Boxes and Voice Detect Boxes You can also assign a supported box type to inherit its schedule from the previous box the call came from or from the voice mail port the call came in on This flexibility allows for much more detailed scheduling of different groups within a system The new Expanded Schedules provide the following A maximum of 99 Custom Schedules A maximum of nine time intervals per sche...

Page 1245: ... leaving a message no audible tone is provided The multiline terminal user can then Choose Exit to let the call go through to their mailbox Choose ANSW to intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox Choose MON to monitor the message being left by the caller Voice Mail Overflow If Voice Mail automatically answers trunks Voice Mail Overflow can reroute those trunks to other extensions when al...

Page 1246: ...endant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user s name With Directory Dialing the caller does not have to remember the extension number of the person they wish to reach just their name Here is how Directory Dialing works 1 When the Automated Attendant answers it sends the call to the Main Greeting box The caller must dial a digit to access Directory Diali...

Page 1247: ... By managing calls on the PC instead of the telephone ViewCall Plus lets you communicate more easily with people inside and outside the office Three integrated windows are provided to control telephone calls log all telephone activity and manage data about each call With a click of the mouse you can take a call ask a caller to hold route the call to another extension or send the call to voice mail...

Page 1248: ...he text to speech engine to convert the text into audio for playback MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension MIME ensures that the voice messaging system can read the message header and body information Multipart MIME messages enable the email system to send enhanced versions of the message for messaging clients such as Lotus Notes or Microsoft Outlook In addition multipart MIME messages contain...

Page 1249: ...10 Hospitality languages Caller ID Return Call may require ARS programming to properly route outgoing calls Updating the system time also updates the UM8000 Mail time When setting up hunt group priorities in 16 02 01 the VM ports must be assigned as port 1 priority 1 port 2 priority 2 and so on Failure to do this causes the VM to answer but no audio is heard The Live Record feature is supported on...

Page 1250: ...ed During a Conversation Record session DTMF digits are not transmitted If the End softkey is used to stop the Conversation Record DTMF to the outside party is restored If you press the Conversation Record button to end the recording DTMF is not restored Stutter Dial Tone is supported to Single Line Telephones SLTs for Voice Mail Message Waiting When a Department Group is assigned as the VM Depart...

Page 1251: ...r Workgroup version The following versions of Microsoft Outlook work with VMM Outlook 2007 Vista 32 bit only Outlook 2010 Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Outlook 2013 32 and 64 bit The supported TeLANophy applications include ViewMail ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging VMM ViewCall Plus ViewMail for GroupWise VMG ViewMail for Lotus Notes VML ViewFax VF These TeLANophy applications work on the following oper...

Page 1252: ...s deleted from the system using Program 90 05 the programming for the slot in 10 55 is set back to default 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 172 16 1 100 10 55 03 Package Network Setup Main Add on Set to 0 to distribute an IP Address to the blade 0 Main 1 Add on 1 10 55 04 Package Network Setup Sub Net Mask Define the subnet mask for the GCD ETIA 128 0 0 0 ...

Page 1253: ...ess the key to call the voice mail only when they have new messages 0 Message Key 1 Voice Mail Key 0 15 02 28 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Color Determine whether an extension Message Waiting Lamp lights Green or Red when a message is received 0 Green 1 Red 1 15 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color Set up various message wait la...

Page 1254: ...e call Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 851 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 852 by default 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Set the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23 02 When setting up hunt group priorities the VM ports must be assigned as port 1 priority...

Page 1255: ...et up Call Forwarding Off Premise at their extension For voice mail set this option to off 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 01 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Alarm Turn Off or On the Warning Tone for Long Conversation not for single line telephones 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 05 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Intercom Off Hook Signaling Turn Off or On a...

Page 1256: ... Options Supplementary Service Block Camp On Turn Off or On an extension user ability to block callers from dialing to Camp On Set this option to 0 for voice mail 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No Answer Recall Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group set in Program 22 08 0 64800 seconds 0 2...

Page 1257: ...ment Group the DIL rings another Voice Mail port if its assigned port is busy For this selection to work set Program 22 02 01 to 4 DIL Day Night Modes 1 8 Extension Number maximum of eight digits Pilot Number No Setting Assign Trunks As Automated Attendant Trunks Method 2 Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign 0 to each trunk you want t...

Page 1258: ...ILs to Voice Mail ring after the DIL Call Waiting time expires Program 22 01 04 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Ring Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 0 24 02 03 System Options for Transfer Delayed Call Forwarding Time If activated at an extension Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this time This also sets the time a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded...

Page 1259: ...ng on what Telco needs 0 Off 1 On 1 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time Set the time between Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts 0 64800 seconds 30 45 01 18 Voice Mail Integration Options Trunk Number Mapping Assign the digits of trunk number mapping 2 3 2 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number Customize the systems service tones 0 33 0 No Tone 33 Defau...

Page 1260: ... 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 t...

Page 1261: ...dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 Type 1 5 2 2dBm 80 03 05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward Twist Level Define the forward twist level for DTMF Tone Receiver 0 9 1dB 10dB Type 1 5 5 6dBm 80 03 06 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Backward Twist Level Defin...

Page 1262: ...ine the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 4 0dB 20dB Type 1 DT 4 20dB Type 2 BT 4 20dB Type 3 RBT 4 20dB Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No 0 255 30 30 7680ms Type 1 DT Tone Time 0 not detect 132 3990ms Define the various levels and timers for the Call 1 255 60 7680ms Type 2 BT Progress Tone Detector Use this option to set No Tone Time The f...

Page 1263: ... Minimum Time Define the various levels and times for the Call Progress Tone Detector Use this option to set the minimum Off time 1 255 30 30 7680ms Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 12 300ms Type 3 RBT 83 2520ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF 0 255 Type 1 DT 1 Maximum Time 30 30 7680ms 60ms Define the various levels and times for the Call Type 2 BT 20 Progress Tone Detect...

Page 1264: ...eive the Internal Page via a Multicast Packet If the DT7XX terminal is in a different subnet than the GPZ IPLE the DT7XX will receive the Internal Page via a Unicast Packet When phones are set to receive Unicast packets the GPZ IPLE will send a separate RTP stream to each phone that is set to receive the page E g If there are five DT7XX IP phones in the page group and they are all set to Unicast P...

Page 1265: ...and may require the default address to be changed in the SV9100 GPZ IPLE DSP Resource Selection Three additional GPZ IPLE DSP resource assignments are available The new assignments are Common without Unicast Paging Multicast Paging and Unicast Paging The new assignments assist with keeping IP phones from using all available DSP resources when utilizing Unicast Paging When the DSP resource is set t...

Page 1266: ...t have a gateway programmed to accomplish the multicast transmission When an actual gateway device does not exist on the network a dummy gateway address on the same subnet must be defined When utilizing Multicast mode and a page group consists of all IP phones the page is sent via a multicast message from the initiating phone If a paging group has IP and TDM phones when an IP phone initiates the p...

Page 1267: ...work or if Multicast is used by other IP services 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 224 0 0 10 10 46 12 DT800 DT700 Server Information Setup Multicast Port Sets the starting port number used by Multicast 0 65535 30000 11 12 19 Service Code Setup for Service Access Internal Group Paging Service code setup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 801 15 05 38 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Paging Protoco...

Page 1268: ...4 0 64 0 No Setting 0 for IP Station 1 for TDM Station 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Paging Receiving Turn Off or On All Call Internal Paging for each extension If allowed extensions can make and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements If prevented extension can make only All Call Internal Paging announcements 0 Off 1 On 0 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Setting...

Page 1269: ...e no extensions in a page group the page is announced as an External Page only 2 Make announcement 3 Press Speaker to hang up Single Line Telephone SIP DECT Wireless 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 64 Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Make announcement 4 Hang up ...

Page 1270: ...past a busy group member to the first available extension A call rings on an unanswered extension until it is answered or the caller hangs up Not Answered A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a UCD Department Calling group The call continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up However if the next station in the cycle is busy when a new call comes in...

Page 1271: ...rings to a UCD Department groups the DIL may follow overflow programming Program 22 01 04 and Program 22 08 01 If an extension has Call Forwarding set the system does not hunt to the forwarded extension Default Settings Disabled ...

Page 1272: ...outing Uniform Call Distribution UCD Priority Call Routing Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Priority 1 Priority 1 Priority 1 Telephone on a call Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 3 ...

Page 1273: ...1273 Circular Routing Figure 2 75 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s VRS Port License 1001 CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 ...

Page 1274: ...artment Name Assign a name to the Extension Department Groups Maximum of 12 characters No Setting 16 01 02 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Calling Cycle Set the call routing for Department Calling Routing can be either circular cycles to all phones in group or priority cycles to highest priority extension first Set to 1 for UCD 0 Normal Routing Priority 1 Easy UCD Routing Circular 0 1...

Page 1275: ... Data Setup Enhanced Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Department Group 0 No queuing 1 Hunting When Busy 2 Hunting When Not Answered 3 Hunting When Busy or No Answer 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23 02 Department Groups 1 64 Prio...

Page 1276: ...Program 22 07 01 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching 0 22 07 01 DIL Assignment For each trunk assigned Service Type 4 in Program 22 02 above assign the DIL destination as the Department Group pilot number as assigned in Program 11 07 01 Department Groups 1 64 For this selection to work set Program 2...

Page 1277: ...roup While you are logged out UCD Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 750 and 1 OR Press Uniform Call Distribution Log In key Program 15 07 or SC 851 46 The key lights while you are logged out To log back in to your UCD Department Calling Group While you log back in Uniform Call Distribution routes calls to your extension 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 750 and 0 ...

Page 1278: ...are easily customized to meet the requirements of each networking configuration Users may place an intercom call or transfer a call to any extension at any location by dialing an extension number The system analyzes each extension number received and determines how to route the call to its final destination The feature which handles this route selection is called Flexible Routing F Routing F Routi...

Page 1279: ...1279 All Terminals Required Component s GCD 4ODTA OR GCD PRTA Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Flexible System Numbering K CCIS IP K CCIS T1 Multiple Trunk Types ...

Page 1280: ...signed in Program 11 01 01 This allows an employee to move to a new location port and retain the same extension number Maximum of eight digits 1 101 2 102 3 103 99 199 100 3101 960 3961 14 02 09 Analog Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone Detection Enable Disable busy tone detection for trunk ports 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 14 02 14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start Ground Start Define an analog trunk as Loop S...

Page 1281: ...ce at the destination does not send dial tone 0 Off 1 On 0 44 03 01 Dial Analysis Extension Table Dial Set the Dial digits 24 digits maximum 1 9 0 to be used for the Dial Extension Analysis Table When Program 44 02 02 is set to 3 this program sets the dial extension analysis table These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than eight digits To enter a wild card don t care digit pr...

Page 1282: ...itional digits to be dialed 0 1000 0 1000 0 44 05 04 ARS F Route Table Beep Tone For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Turn Off or On a beep tone if a lower priority trunk group is used 0 Off No Beep 1 On Beep s 0 44 05 05 ARS F Route Table Gain Table Number for Internal Calls For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the gain table number used fo...

Page 1283: ... Program 44 05 is activated The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS F Route the Tandem Gain Table assigned in Program 44 05 is activated The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for...

Page 1284: ...esday Pattern 1 10 4 Wednesday Pattern 1 10 5 Thursday Pattern 1 10 6 Friday Pattern 1 10 7 Saturday Pattern 1 10 Pattern 1 44 10 01 Holiday Schedule for ARS F Route Define a yearly schedule for ARS F Route This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays pattern numbers 1 10 The pattern number is defined in Program 44 08 01 Date 0101 1231 Schedule Pattern Number 0 10 0 No ...

Page 1285: ...S2UG E 9 5 Base Chassis 9 5 Expansion Chassis 1 CHS2UG US 19 Chassis 3 CHS2UG B US CHS2UG E 9 5 Base Chassis 9 5 Expansion Chassis 2 CHS2UG US 19 Chassis 2 CHS2UG B US CHS2UG E 9 5 Base Chassis 9 5 Expansion Chassis 3 CHS2UG US 19 Chassis 1 CHS2UG B US CHS2UG E 9 5 Base Chassis 9 5 Expansion Chassis 4 CHS2UG US 19 Chassis 0 CHS2UG B US CHS2UG E 9 5 Base Chassis 9 5 Expansion Chassis Conditions Two...

Page 1286: ...84 PRI 1 5M 48 96 192 192 192 IP Trunk SIP 400 DTMF Receivers 80 80 144 144 144 2 VoIP Channels 256 256 Voice Mail Channels on CPU 16 channels 16 V34 Modem 1 channel 1 1 For law countries 104 timeslots per chassis are assigned the G 711 PCM communications e g voice communications and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications e g HDLC over ISDN Thus the simultaneous data comm...

Page 1287: ... communications e g voice communications and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications e g HDLC over ISDN Thus the simultaneous data communications are limited up to seven per chassis 2 An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the GPZ BS10 is installed An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the GPZ BS10 is installed If using Caller ID to analog trunks a...

Page 1288: ...line terminal or Single Line Telephone adapter This blade is installed in slots 2 6 of a chassis with CPU and slots 1 6 of expansion chassis The maximum number depends on other station blades installed This blade shares the total number of extension ports in the system No more than 80 DLC ports are supported in a single chassis 5 23 Note 1 GCD 16DLCA These blades are 16 port Each circuit can suppo...

Page 1289: ...nterface blade supports four Single Line Telephones and or analog voice mail ports Each blade provides a built in ringer signal generator RSG and Message Waiting MW LED voltage to single line telephones This blade is installed in slots 2 6 of a chassis with CPU and slots 1 6 of expansion chassis The maximum number depends on other station blades installed This blade shares the total number of stat...

Page 1290: ...his blade is installed in slots 2 6 of a chassis with CPU and slots 1 6 of expansion chassis The maximum number depends on other trunk blades installed This blade shares the total number of CO PBX lines in the system 5 23 Note 1 Station Interface Units Description Maximum Capacities Basic Port Expanded Port Package Package Notes GPZ 4LCF This daughter board is a 4 port Single Line Interface The GP...

Page 1291: ...nd Start DTMF trunks This daughter board is installed on a GCD 4COTA or GCD LTA The maximum number depends on other trunk blades installed This daughter board shares the total number of CO PBX lines in the system 5 23 Note 1 GCD PRTA This T1 FT1 Trunk Interface or ISDN Primary Rate digital trunk terminates Fractional T1 trunks Up to 24 DS 0 channels This blade supports ANI DNIS trunks and CSU less...

Page 1292: ...e eight lead tip ring tip 1 ring 1 E M signaling tie lines determined in Program 10 03 System programming is also used to select the connection types with Type 1 or Type V The GCD 4ODTA consumes 4 ports ranging between ports 001 200 This blade is installed in slots 2 6 of a chassis with CPU and slots 1 6 of expansion chassis The maximum number depends on other trunk blades installed This blade sha...

Page 1293: ...Note 1 GCD PVAA The GCD PVAA is a 16 port blade for the Multimedia Conference Bridge or IVR applications 2 2 Note 1 Note 1 Refer to Board Power Factor Refer to the SV9100 General Description Manual or System Hardware Manual for more information The following Blade Calculator allows you to determine the maximum power consumption for each cabinet Board Power Factor Board Power Factor Total 7 Item Po...

Page 1294: ...CPU CCPU CCPU GCD ETIA 2 2 3 3 12 GCD PVAA 1 2 5 6 23 Default Settings None Terminal Power Factor 19 inch Metal Chassis with Fan 80 9 5 inch Plastic Chassis without Fan 64 Item Power Factor DTL 24D 1 TEL 0 8 DTL 8LD 1 TEL 0 8 BHA L UNIT 2 ADA L UNIT 2 APR L UNIT DT300 series 2 Dterm series i 3 BCH L BK UNIT 2 PSA L UNIT 1 2 8LK L UNIT 0 DCL 60 1 CONSOLE 2 ITL 320C 1 TEL 6 ITL 24D 1 TEL 4 ITL 12CG ...

Page 1295: ...guration data for each blade This program represents different data depending on the blade installed in the slot The assigned data varies depending on the blade installed in the slot 90 34 01 Firmware Information Pkg Name List the package type and firmware for the packages installed The data varies depending on the card in the slot 90 34 02 Firmware Information Firmware Version Number View the pac...

Page 1296: ...ons Multiline terminals must be idle and Off Hook and have entered the service code when programming any function Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Clock Calendar Display Code Restriction One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Speed Dial System Group Station Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ...

Page 1297: ...igning a Virtual Extension key of the extension the key is assigned on is not supported Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy Virtual Extension key You cannot have a CAR key and Virtual Extension on the same telephone Virtual Extensions do not support the following features Barge In Conference Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Reverse Voice Over Tone Override Voice Over When a valid sy...

Page 1298: ...up settings defined in Program 21 02 or play an error tone When using ARS Class of Service with Program 26 01 03 set to 1 Play Warning Tone any trunk except a CCIS trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is Call Forward Off Premise will not complete For a virtual to Call Forward Off Premise Program 26 01 03 must be set to Route to trunk group and the call will follow the trunk group setting...

Page 1299: ... Call Arrival CAR Keys Call Waiting Camp On Secondary Incoming Extension Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 11 04 01 Virtual Extension Numbering Assign Extension Number for the Virtual Extensions 1 512 Maximum of eight digits Virtual Extension Port No 1 99 Virtual Extension Number 201 299 VirtualExtension Port No 100 512 No Setting 14 02 17 Anal...

Page 1300: ...the key is a real extension number and the key is pressed the real extension cannot be used Virtual Extension Key Mode 0 DSS 1 OTG Outgoing 2 Ignore 2 15 02 30 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Toll Restriction Class Assign if the phone uses the Toll Restriction class of the VE 0 or the Real Extension when making outbound calls from the VE 0 Vir Ext Virtual Extension Class 1 Real Ext Real Exten...

Page 1301: ...splay the Virtual Extension Key name or the name of the extension where it resides 0 Secondary Extension Name 1 Actual Station Name 0 15 18 03 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Show CLI When set to a 0 the caller ID of a trunk call station call pointed to a virtual extension will not be displayed if the virtual extension is not set to ring When set to a 1 the caller ID of a trunk call pointed...

Page 1302: ...nes Virtual Extension Mode Set the mode of a virtual extension key that appears on a DSS console 0 No 1 Yes 0 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions CAR SIE Virtual Extension Delay Interval CAR Keys SIE Keys Virtual Extensions set for Delayed Ringing see Program 15 11 ring the extension after this time 0 64800 seconds 10 20 04 05 System Options for Virtual Extensions Ringtone Mode for Inco...

Page 1303: ...tern 1 4 Melody 1 Melody 5 Ring Tone Pattern 5 8 0 23 04 01 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions When an extension has a virtual extension on Function Key this program determines the priority 1 4 for a Ring Group for automatically answering ringing calls when the handset is lifted If 00 is selected for the Ring Group when the handset is lifted the user can answer a ringing call from any ...

Page 1304: ...Hold once for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 8 Press Hold for a second time for Delayed Ring or Skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speak...

Page 1305: ...ge in the called extension mailbox There is no need to call back later Transferring to Voice Mail By using Transfer to Voice Mail a multiline terminal extension user can Transfer a call to the user s or a co worker s mailbox After the Transfer goes through the caller can leave a message in the mailbox Voice Mail Queuing When accessing the voice mail the system provides a voice mail queue If all th...

Page 1306: ...ted intent to enter mail box 45 04 02 Direct Logon Up to four digits Default not assigned XXX Up to four digits XXX Up to four digits XXX Direct Log On Connect user to mail box for extension XXX 45 04 03 Transfer Message Up to four digits Default not assigned 2YYY 2XXXYYY Up to four digits YYY Or Up to four digits XXXYYY Up to four digits YYY Transfer Message User is transferring a call to VM Reco...

Page 1307: ...oup calls do not follow extension call forwarding to voice mail Only one Voice Mail system can be installed in an SV9100 system Analog or Digital but not both in same system This restriction is because only one Department Group can be assigned for Voice Mail If installing an Analog Voice Mail System any Analog station port Single line telephone port can be assigned to support the Analog Voice Mail...

Page 1308: ...hat use them 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 144 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 81 144 are available 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Dial Assign a Department Group pilot number for the Voice Mail The extensions are assigned to the group in Program 16 02 01 Maximum of eight digits No Setti...

Page 1309: ...f the large LED when a voice mail message is waiting at the extension 0 Green 1 Red 1 15 02 38 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Cycle Select the cycle method that the large LED flashes when the extension has a VM Message Waiting set to an extension 1 Cycle 1 2 Cycle 2 3 Cycle 3 4 Cycle 4 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 3 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setu...

Page 1310: ...t Group Basic Data Setup Department Name Assign a name to the Extension Department Groups Maximum of 12 characters No Setting 16 01 02 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Calling Cycle Set the call routing for Department Calling Routing can be either circular cycles to all phones in a group or priority cycles to the highest priority first 0 Normal Routing Priority 1 Easy UCD Routing Circu...

Page 1311: ...a call rings a Department Group extension before hunting occurs 0 64800 seconds 15 16 01 10 Department Group Basic Data Setup Enhanced Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Extension Department Group 0 No queuing 1 Hunting When Busy 2 Hunting When Not Answered 3 Hunting When Busy or No Answer 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Set up the Department Group called by the pilot...

Page 1312: ...h Ringing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward with Both Ringing 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 05 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding with Follow Me Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward with Follow Me 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 11 12 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Off Premise External Call Forwar...

Page 1313: ...er ability to leave MessageWaiting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 12 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Monitor Extension Being Monitored Turn Off or On an extension user ability to be monitored by other extensions 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Con...

Page 1314: ...ogram 22 02 01 to 4 DIL Day Night Modes 1 8 Extension Number maximum of eight digits Pilot Number No Setting 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination For Voice Mail Overflow enter the Ring Group that unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ring after the DIL Call Waiting time Program 22 01 04 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Ring Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 103 Centralized VM 1 24 02 02 Syste...

Page 1315: ... Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Reserved 26 Russian 1 45 01 01 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Department Group Number Assign which Extension Department Group number is assigned as the voice mail group An entry of 0 means no voice mail is installed Department Groups 0 64 0 No Voice Mail 0 45 01 02 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Master Name Enter the Voice Mail master name up to 12 char...

Page 1316: ...45 01 15 Voice Mail Integration Options Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection Assign whether Fixed codes or the codes used in Program 45 04 are used for analog voice mail protocol 0 Fixed 1 Program 0 45 01 16 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail FAX Digit Add Assignment Assign up to four digits in front of the station number sent to the SLT port when a call is forwarded Maximum of four digits ...

Page 1317: ...runk number and or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45 04 XX is left blank and 45 01 15 is set to Program 0 Off 1 On 0 45 05 02 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits Direct Log On Send trunk number and or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45 04 XX is left blank and 45 01 15 is set to Program 0 Off 1 On 0 45 ...

Page 1318: ...ithout Additional Digits Conversation Recording Send trunk number and or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45 04 XX is left blank and 45 01 15 is set to Program 0 Off 1 On 0 45 05 09 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits Clear Down String Send trunk number and or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45 04 XX is ...

Page 1319: ...vel 3 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dB...

Page 1320: ...ect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 Type 1 5 2 2dBm 80 03 05 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Forward Twist Level Define the various forward twist levels for the DTMF Tone Receiver 0 9 1dB 10dB Ty...

Page 1321: ...0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 1 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 2 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 Type 1 DT 15 25dBm Type 2 BT 15 25dBm Type 3 RBT 15 25dBm Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 03 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup S N Ratio Define the S N ratio for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 4 0dB 20dB Type 1 DT 4 20dB Type 2 BT 4 20dB Type 3 RBT 4 20dB Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No 0 255...

Page 1322: ...FF Minimum Time Define the off minimum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 1 255 30 30 7680ms Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 12 300ms Type 3 RBT 83 2520ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Maximum Time Define the off maximum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 255 30 30 7680ms Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 20 450ms Type 3 RBT 115 3480ms Type 4 Type 5 0 Operation C...

Page 1323: ... mail is called When there are new messages the Large LED on the telephone flashes red With this option set the MSG key can be used as a Voice Mail key for any function calling voice mail or transfer call a to voice mail Hold MSG Extension Number etc Recording your Call To record your active call in your mailbox Multiline Terminal 1 Press Voice Mail Record key Program 15 07 or SC 851 code 78 You h...

Page 1324: ...A the Large LED does not light on extension A for new message indication Instead the VM Message key flashes green VM message LED is a higher priority then any other status for the DSS BLF key The enabling or disabling of Voice Mail Indication on BLF enables the station with the message to show up on other telephones It does not enable disable stations from seeing the BLF indication Virtual Extensi...

Page 1325: ...on Code Service Code 852 by default 20 13 41 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS Turn Off or On the Voice Mail Message Indication for an extension on a DSS console 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode Set the system DSS consoles mode 0 Business Mode 1 Hotel Mode 2 Monitor Mode 3 Business Mode 0 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assi...

Page 1326: ... Define the LED patterns for agent busy functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 7 On 30 05 05 DSS Console Lamp Table Out of Schedule DSS Define the LED patterns for out of schedule DSS functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 0 Off 30 05 06 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Log Out DSS Define the LED patterns for agent log out DSS functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 5 IL 30 05 07 DSS Console Lamp Table Agent Log In D...

Page 1327: ... patterns for hotel status code 8 hotel DSS functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 4 IR 30 05 17 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 9 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 9 hotel DSS functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 3 RW 30 05 18 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 0 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 0 hotel DSS functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 0 Of...

Page 1328: ...t to appear on the key 6 Press Hold 7 Press Speaker To program a VM Message key on a telephone 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 851 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 77 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Speaker ...

Page 1329: ...er Flashing Red Listening to the interrupting party On Green Responding to the interrupting party Conditions While active Voice Over uses a Conference circuit on a GCD CP10 Refer to the Conference feature for Conference circuit programming Voice Over can interrupt a trunk call only if the trunk is set up for at least six seconds Do not use Voice Over to a user on speakerphone as the conversation m...

Page 1330: ...hold When a single line telephone is on a call and Voice Over is presented the single line telephone cannot talk back to the party that originated the Voice Over Voice Over to a single line telephone is not recommended because cross talk is inherent in the side tone of analog telephones Voice Over to a user on speakerphone is not recommended because the conversation may be heard by the outside par...

Page 1331: ...ice 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals This setting is to receive incoming call signaling information during call...

Page 1332: ...oice Over key The Voice Over key lights steady green and you can talk to the interrupting party You cannot respond by dialing the Voice Over Service Code 6 To return to your original call 1 Press the Voice Over key 2 Press the Voice Over key again Your Voice Over key flashes red when you are talking to your original call To switch between your original call and the interrupting party just keep pre...

Page 1333: ...emise extension caller can listen record and erase VRS Messages unless restricted in programming DISA and DID callers can listen and record VRS messages unless restricted in programming General Message A General Message is a recorded message available to all callers A General Message typically contains important company information that all employees should hear To hear the General Message an empl...

Page 1334: ...used If additional digits arrive before the timer expires these and possible further digits are used as the direct dial destination The timer Program 25 16 01 works only when destination is set in Program 25 06 02 If Program 25 06 01 is used other than 0 single digit attendant works If the timer Program 25 16 01 is set 0 this feature is deactivated If the timer value is longer than inter digit tim...

Page 1335: ...omes available to receive the department call Manual Mode This mode can be programmed by pressing the VRS Waiting Message function key from a multiline terminal to set this feature for each incoming ring group This mode can be used for normal incoming calls only The following programs are used to define the VRS Waiting Message feature and the trunk overflow 11 10 20 Service Code Setup for System A...

Page 1336: ...o Transfer the call the user places the call on Hold dials the unique VRS service code set up in system programming default 782 and hangs up Voice Prompting Messages The VRS feature provides the system with Voice Prompting Messages These Voice Prompting Messages tell the extension user the status or progress of their call For example if a user calls extension 300 when it is busy they hear Station ...

Page 1337: ...remise is rerouting your call ARS tries to reroute the user s call and the least costly route is busy User dials a Service Code that Class of Service prevents 1 9 You have a message An extension user has a Message Waiting to which they have not responded 1 10 You have a message An extension user has a Message Waiting to which they have not responded 1 11 Your calls have been forwarded An extension...

Page 1338: ...ing messages 1 25 To listen dial A user is trying to record a VRS message and the recording already exists 1 26 To erase dial 1 27 To re record dial 1 28 To save dial 1 29 To leave a message 1 30 Just a moment 1 31 Hello 1 32 Thank you 1 33 Good bye 2 1 Oh A user dials 6 for the extension number or 8 for the time 2 2 Dial 2 3 Star 2 4 Pound 2 5 Zero 2 6 One A user dials 6 for the extension number ...

Page 1339: ...en 2 21 Seventeen 2 22 Eighteen 2 23 Nineteen 2 24 Twenty 2 25 Thirty 2 26 Forty 2 27 Fifty 2 28 Sixty 2 29 Seventy 2 30 Eighty 2 31 Ninety 2 32 Hundred 2 33 Thousand 2 43 Message 2 44 Messages 2 64 January 2 65 February 2 66 March 2 67 April 2 68 May 2 69 June 2 70 July 2 71 August 2 72 September 2 73 October 2 74 November 2 75 December ...

Page 1340: ...o Answer with Greeting application When a receptionist answers a call the VRS can play a preamble message such as Welcome to ABC Company How can I help you When the caller replies the receptionist answers One moment please and quickly extends the call to the desired party This ensures that all incoming calls are answered quickly courteously and consistently Time Date and Station Number Check If th...

Page 1341: ...ss code must be put into the speed dial bin When Program 25 16 02 is set to 0 Off Do not detect DTMF after playing a VRS greeting the transfer destination set in Program 25 03 01 is followed Program 25 03 01 is set on a per trunk port base not Dial in number base A DISA Password can be detected regardless of Program 25 16 02 setting If an outside caller dials an invalid extension number when conne...

Page 1342: ... DNIS Define the service code to use when setting up ANI DNIS Routing to the VRS Automated Attendant Using the Transfer feature this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS default 782 MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 882 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys For the VRS Waiting Message feature assign the VRS Incoming Call Queuing Setup key code 52 ring group to manually enable the featur...

Page 1343: ...Page 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 13 23 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Display the Reason for Transfer Select whether or not an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension Call Forward Busy Call Forward No Answer DND 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 0 20 15 11 Ring Cycle Setup VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call Set the ring cycle callers hear when the VRS Waiti...

Page 1344: ... playing the first message This time is also used for VRS Waiting Message 0 64800 seconds 0 22 14 02 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed Message Number For each Ring Group select the message number to be played as the first message 0 101 This program is also used for VRS Waiting Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 22 14 03 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed Message Sending Coun...

Page 1345: ...Number For each Department Group select the message number to be played as the first message 0 101 This program is also used for VRS Waiting Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message 0 22 15 03 VRS Delayed Message for Department Group 1st Delayed Message Sending Count For each Department Group set the number of times the first message is played This program is also used for VRS Waiting Message ...

Page 1346: ...Select whether or not the DISA User ID is to be used 0 Off 1 On 1 25 02 01 DID DISA VRS Message For each Night Service mode enter 1 at the Talkie prompt if trunk should be automatically answered by VRS and the message number the caller should hear 1 101 0 No Message 1 VRS 01 100 VRS Message Number 2 ACI 01 04 ACI Group Number 3 Department Groups 01 64 Extension Group Number 0 25 03 01 VRS DISA Tra...

Page 1347: ...rammed to answer outside calls see Program 25 02 01 specify the digit the Automated Attendant caller dials 1 9 0 Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits 3 and 4 outside callers cannot dial system extensions 0 100 0 No Setting 101 Voice Mail Answers 104 Refer to 25 04 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group with No Answer Busy 105 Dial the other extension 106 Record VRS 0 25 06 02 VRS DISA One ...

Page 1348: ...e Base Setup Single Digit Timer Assign a timer per single digit table required to expire before the allocated single digit entry is applied 0 64800 0 No Setting 0 25 16 02 DID DISA Talkie Base Setup DTMF Detect 1 On setting detects DTMF signal during sending VRS message for DID DISA call 0 Off setting does not detect DTMF signal during sending VRS message for DID DISA call 0 Off 1 On 1 31 02 01 In...

Page 1349: ... 3 PGD 2 U10 3 Group 3 Speaker 4 PGD 2 U10 4 Group 4 Speaker 5 PGD 2 U10 5 Group 5 Speaker 6 PGD 2 U10 6 Group 6 Speaker 7 PGD 2 U10 7 Group 7 Speaker 8 PGD 2 U10 8 Group 8 Speaker 9 GCD CP10 1 Group 1 31 07 01 Combined Paging Assignments Assign an External Paging Group 0 8 to an Internal Paging Zone for Combined Paging When an extension user makes a Combined Page they simultaneously broadcast int...

Page 1350: ...ement Service Option VRS Fixed Message Enable Disable the system ability to play the fixed VRS messages such as You have a message 0 Not Used 1 Used 0 40 10 02 Voice Announcement Service Option General Message Number Enter the number of the VRS message you want to use for the General Message 01 100 The message you select should not be used as a VRS message 0 100 0 No General Message Service 0 40 1...

Page 1351: ... Fixed Message is set VRS message guidance is Service finished Disconnect the line please 0 101 0 No message 101 Fixed message 0 40 11 01 Preamble Message Assignment Assign the VRS Message number used as the Preamble Message for each trunk When the extension user answers the incoming call the assigned VRS message is sent to the outside caller 0 100 0 No Service 0 47 03 02 SV9100 InMail Group Mailb...

Page 1352: ...You hear the previously recorded message If you hear a beep instead no previous message is recorded 5 Press to hear the message again OR To hear another message dial 5 and then enter the message number 01 100 OR Hang up To erase a previously recorded VRS message 1 Press Speaker or lift the handset OR At a single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 716 3 Dial 3 Erase 4 Dial the number of the VRS...

Page 1353: ...e message number to hear it again or if you want to Record listen to or erase another message go back to step 4 General Message To listen to the General Message Multiline Terminal Only Your Message Waiting LED flashes when there is a new General Message A voice message periodically reminds you 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 4 General OR 1 Lift the handset and dial 711 You hear t...

Page 1354: ... to step 1 4 Hang up when you are done Time Date and Station Number Check To check the extension number of any multiline terminal 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 6 for extension number To check the system time and date from any multiline terminal extension 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 8 for time and date 900 Preamble To answer a 900 Preamble call 1 Answer the...

Page 1355: ...VRS InMail CF The proper format is Bit Rate 64kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 KHz Audio Format CCiTT u law User Pro Access There are two different User Pro logins available to make changes to audio files on the InMail VRS CF but only one allows changes to be made to VRS messages Tologin open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV9100 LAN port in the address line At...

Page 1356: ...ge was left in type of message the message number and the date and time to the second the message was left Default Incoming Ringing Tone shows how to interpret the message name to determine this information Default Incoming Ringing Tone File Name Format BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS wav maximum 32 characters B Mailbox number maximum eight digits or VRS for the VRS message T Message Type Greeting or VRS me...

Page 1357: ...UA or UB mode in User Pro Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when selecting the extension XXX on the file upload download screen of UA mode User Pro Mailbox XXX will be inaccessible when logging in the UB mode User Pro for extension XXX While uploading an audio file via User Pro the greeting is not accessible by telephone When downloading deleting an audio file via User Pro the file is not accessi...

Page 1358: ...e is received via regular operation on the system while a user is viewing the upload download screen the new message is not shown until the page is reloaded by clicking the icon At default Microsoft Windows will automatically open and play the downloaded WAV To make Open or Save selectable the following settings are required Windows XP 1 Select Control Panel then Folder Options 2 Click on the File...

Page 1359: ...igure the administrator accounts that are used when connecting to the KTS via PCPro WebPro If using PCPro these are the accounts that are used to connect If using WebPro these are the accounts that are used to login Maximum of eight digits 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level Set the system password user levels 0 Prohibited User 1 MF Manufacturer Level 2 IN Installer Level 3 SA System Ad...

Page 1360: ...cted for deletion has already been deleted Cannot upload the file since the original file is being used by another session Please try again later When the file to be replaced is being used when trying to upload the replacement Operation Changing VRS Messages using User Admin Mode UA Audio files up to 1MB may be uploaded to the SV9100 for VRS messages All 100 VRS messages can be uploaded or deleted...

Page 1361: ...is 002 and message 3 is 003 etc 5 To delete a message click on the red X to the right of the appropriate message 6 To Upload a message Under Message No enter the message number to be replaced Browse to find the location where the greeting file is stored Click on the upload icon to the right of the selected file name Depending on file size and LAN speed it may take a minute to upload the greeting T...

Page 1362: ...d The recorded Paging announcement could say John Smith you have a call waiting on your line The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts the second message John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call If John doesn t pick up the call the Page periodically repeats VRS Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for A...

Page 1363: ...able at default for internal paging access code 701 zone 1 Use access code 713 See feature Operation Set Program 40 10 01 for VRS guidance message System Availability Terminals None Required Component s VRS License 1001 Related Features Analog Communications Interface ACI Music on Hold ...

Page 1364: ...ined Paging Combined paging internal external access code Service code setup MLT SLT 0 9 Maximum of eight digits 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number Assign exten...

Page 1365: ...ng over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement 0 No Tone None 1 Splash Tone 2 Chime Tone 2 31 06 02 External Speaker Control Broadcast Splash Tone After Paging Paging End Time Enable Disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging announcement 0 No...

Page 1366: ...te A paging chime overrides the first four seconds of an announcement Allow a delay in announcement recording for chime time 5 Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement For example for Internal Zone 1 dial 701 1 or for Combined Paging Zone 1 dial 1 1 6 Dial the Park and Page type 2 All Calls 3 Outside Calls Only 7 Press Speaker to hang up or go on hook at the single line telephone...

Page 1367: ...ls Conditions The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled Multiline terminal users can press the Speaker key and dial Code 729 to further increase station ring volume Headset volume off hook ringing volume station ringing volume and speaker volume adjustments are determined by Program 15 02 27 The LCD of the SV9100 terminals provide a volume bar indication while ...

Page 1368: ...ximum it is reset to a level to meet FCC standards when the user hangs up 0 Back to Default Back 1 Stay at previous level Stay 1 Operation To adjust the volume of incoming ringing and splash tone 1 If the telephone is idle press Speaker and dial 829 If the telephone is ringing skip to Step 2 2 Press VOLUME or VOLUME To adjust the volume of ringing incoming Paging announcements Handsfree the handse...

Page 1369: ...onnected unless the continue code is entered by the user With the Long Conversation Cutoff feature incoming or outgoing central office calls can also be disconnected Warning Tone for DISA Callers For DISA callers with this feature enabled the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered If an ...

Page 1370: ...Intercom Long Conversation Cutoff Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets Guide to Feature Programming Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 14 01 17 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for Long Conversation Alarm Determine whether DISA callers should hear the Warning Tone for Long Conversations 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 14 01 25 Basic Trunk Data Setup Continued ...

Page 1371: ...1371 ...

Page 1372: ...80 20 28 01 Trunkto TrunkConversation Conversation Continue Code Input the code that can be dialed to continue the conversation after the Trunk to Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard 0 9 No Setting 20 28 02 Trunkto TrunkConversation Conversation Disconnect Code Input the code that can be dialed to disconnect the conversation after the Trunk to Trunk Release Warning Tone is heard 0 9 No Setting 20 ...

Page 1373: ...e Determine the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk to trunk Such as Tandem Trunking conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 10 Operation Warning Tone for Long Conversation is automatic if programmed Warning Tone for Long Conversation for DISA Callers 1 A DISA caller dials into the system and places a call 2 After the Warning To...

Page 1374: ... Wireless DECT SIP Features Feature Name SIP DECT Comments SIP DECT Account Code Forced Verified Unverified Yes Account Code Entry Yes Alarm No Alarm Reports No Alphanumeric Display Yes IP DECT Handsets have Alphanumeric Display and are backlit However the display is not updated with CPU messages Analog Communications Interface ACI No Ancillary Device Connection No Answer Hold No Answer Key No Att...

Page 1375: ...aller ID Yes Only on ISDN or SIP Trunks Analog Caller ID is not supported Central Office Calls Answering Yes Central Office Calls Placing Yes Class of Service Yes Clock Calendar Display No CO Message Waiting Indication No Code Restriction Yes Code Restriction Override Yes Code Restriction Dial Block Yes Computer Telephony Integration CTI Applications No Conference No Conference Voice Call Privacy ...

Page 1376: ...e relay Drop Key No Dterm Handset Cordless No Dterm IP Gateway System No E911 Compatibility Yes Facsimile CO Branch Connection No Flash Yes Flexible System Numbering Yes SIP DECT numbering controlled through IP DECT Manager application Flexible Timeouts Yes Forced Trunk Disconnect No Group Call Pickup Yes Group Listen No Handset Mute Yes Handsfree and Monitor Yes Handsfree is supported by handset ...

Page 1377: ...del Message Waiting Yes Only VM Message Waiting can be received Message Waiting Answer Yes Microphone Cutoff Yes Handset has mute function Multiple Trunk Types Yes Music on Hold Yes Name Storing No NEC Communications Analyst Yes NEC Interactive Voice Response No Night Service No Off Hook Signaling Yes Off Hook Signaling Override Yes One Touch Calling No Operator Yes OPX Off Premise Extension No Pa...

Page 1378: ...ingdown Extension Internal External Yes IP DECT handset can only be the ringdown destination It cannot initiate ringdown Room Monitor No Save Number Dialed No Handsets have own phone book and redial lists Secondary Incoming Extension No Secretary Call Buzzer No Secretary Call Pickup No Selectable Display Messaging No Selectable Ring Tones Yes Ring tones are selectable at the handset level specific...

Page 1379: ...runk Group Routing Yes Trunk Groups Yes Trunk Queuing Camp On No UM8000 Mail No Uniform Call Distribution UCD No Uniform Numbering Network Yes Universal Slots N A User Programming Ability Yes Limited user customization available Virtual Extensions No Voice Call Signal Switching Yes Can only send voice signal switch not receive Voice Mail Integration Analog Yes Voice Mail Message Indication on Line...

Page 1380: ...to pre dial or phone book numbers Adjustable Volume Ring volume can be adjusted using and on the handset Key Lock Press OK and to lock the dial pad Ten Different Ring Tones Ring tones can be selected in the tone setup menu and press OK Microphone Mute Press while the telephone is off hook to mute the microphone Caller ID Presentation Headset Connection R Key for Transfer and Special Services When ...

Page 1381: ...nly 4 None If calling from Voice Mail 1 Program 45 01 02 Voice Mail master Name 2 Program 45 01 09 Centralized Voice Mail Master name 3 Program 15 01 01 Calling station information Voicemail extension Conditions Program 15 05 17 is no longer used Program 32 04 01 Door Phone Name is not supported Hold recall will not display calling name Transfer recall will not display calling name Alarm is not su...

Page 1382: ...ple subscriptions DECT systems 8 DECT systems Sound Audio Adjustable ringer volume Microphone mute Loudspeaker mode hands free Silent ring support Adjustable earpiece loudspeaker volume Security Automatic encryption for secure calls Service Software upgrading via air interface Backup of local data storage via additional 64k Maintenance Easy subscription to another handset by memory card transferri...

Page 1383: ...ECT SIP telephones When replacing the batteries in a C124 G355 or G955 handset it is necessary to place the handset on the charger for 10 seconds in order to update the battery status indicator NAT or NAPT is only supported on the DT700 series phones NAT or NAPT is not supported on the ML440 the Wireless DECT SIP or Softphone ...

Page 1384: ...ne If the override code is dialed Program 11 12 03 SC 709 and overrides SC Program 11 12 03 then the IP DECT receives off hook signals manually Off hook signaling is supported from an extension voicemail and trunk call If a SIP DECT extension is talking to a voice mail port the system does not send an off hook signal Once the SIP DECT disconnects from voice mail SIP DECT can answer the 2nd call If...

Page 1385: ...1385 connections are not supported For troubleshooting purposes a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet data from the SV9100 IPLE Ethernet port ...

Page 1386: ... transfer to an IP DECT terminal IP DECT Caller ID Display Conditions Calling party name is not supported in this feature In case of a screened transfer when the transfer is made IP DECT shows the calling party number of the original caller Transferee after answering the call In case of an unscreened transfer when the transfer is made IP DECT shows the calling party number of the original caller T...

Page 1387: ... 15 default 4 sec to expire to determine if the terminal is Out of Range state or not Out of Range transfer works against the SIP terminal in an Out of Range state when Program 24 09 01 is set to a value between 2 and 5 2 No Answer 3 Immediate 4 Busy No Answer or 5 Busy In case of a value of 0 or 1 0 None or 1 Both Out of Range transfer does not work When the SIP terminal starts ringing and then m...

Page 1388: ...ot been evaluated with this feature Required Component s NEC DECT Access Point AP400 S C NEC SIP DECT Handset System Version R1 License 0411 System Port License 0300 VoIP Resource license 5103 IP Terminal License 5111 Related Features Caller ID Off Hook Signaling Transfer Wireless DECT SIP ...

Page 1389: ...248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 10 19 01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection Select type of VoIP ETU DSP Resource This program setting has no affect on the terminal trunk port assignment or usage 0 Common use for both IP extensions and trunks 1 IP Exte...

Page 1390: ...295 seconds 0 84 06 09 PVA Data Setting Delay LSR Threshold Define the Delay LSR threshold This data is sent to the GCD CP10 when the value exceeds the defined value 0 4294967295 seconds 0 VoIP ToS Setup The UNIVERGE SV9100 supports Quality of Service QoS Marking for the Session Initiation Protocol SIP Program Number Program Name Description Input Data Default 84 10 01 ToS Setup ToS Mode When Inpu...

Page 1391: ... 19 05 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer average Define G 711 Jitter Buffer average accepted value 0 160ms 40 84 19 06 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer max Define G 711 Jitter Buffer maximum accepted value 0 160ms 160 84 19 07 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 729 Audio Frames Define the G 729 audio Frame Size 1 6 1...

Page 1392: ...2 Audio Frames Define the number of Audio Frames for G 722 CODEC 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms 3 84 19 35 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer min Define the minimum setting for the G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 300ms 30 84 19 36 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer Average Define the average setting for the G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 300ms 60 84 19...

Page 1393: ...Extension Basic Information Setup Session Timer Value Define the periodic refresh time that allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the SIP session is still active 0 65535 seconds 180 84 20 03 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Minimum Session Timer Value Define the minimum allowed value for the SIP session timer 0 65535 seconds 180 84 20 04 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Cal...

Page 1394: ...w the registered IP Phones IP Address Informational Only 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 15 05 15 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup CODEC Type Assign the registered IP Phone Codec type of the MLT SIP Reference Program 84 11 Dterm IP Codec Basic Information 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 1 15 05 16 Authentication Password Assign the authentication password for SIP single line tel...

Page 1395: ...through If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a cal...

Page 1396: ...ce for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 11 06 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Unscreened Transfer Ring Inward Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Unscreened Transfer 0 Off 1 On COS 1 15 1 24 02 15 System Options for Tran...

Page 1397: ... Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy destinations Maximum of 24 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 05 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination Assign Intercom Call Forwarding for busy destinations Maximum of 24 dig...

Page 1398: ...th Ring All Call No Answer Assign Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for ring all call and no answer Maximum of 24 digits 0 9 P R Wait for Answer Supervision ISDN trunks only P Pause Analog Trunk Only R Hook flash Analog Trunk Only No Setting 24 09 04 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy destinations Maximum of 24 digits 0 9 P R Wait ...

Page 1399: ...ignal 5 Press the button on the IP DECT Hold the 1st call and answer the 2nd call 6 Talk with ext 101 7 Use on hook on the IP DECT to disconnect ext 101 8 Hold Recall occurs and seizes the 1st call On hold on the IP DECT 9 Talk with ext 100 To toggle between the 1st call and off hook signaling 2nd call Program 20 13 54 is set to Enable Program 20 13 06 is set to Automatically 1 From ext 100 call I...

Page 1400: ...1400 To answer off hook signaling 2nd call and 2nd caller disconnect the call NOTE ...

Page 1401: ...Caller ID 297XXXYYY Transferrer Multi line Ext 100 Transfer target IP DECT Ext 200 1 Place a call to ext 100 from outside party 297XXXYYY 2 Answer incoming call at ext 100 and press the Transfer button 3 Dial 200 to call an IP DECT 4 Announce the call and press the Transfer button or hang up ext 100 5 Calling party number 297XXXYYY is displayed on the IP DECT To make unscreened transfer to IP DECT...

Page 1402: ...1402 SV9100 Features and Specifications Manual NEC Enterprise Solutions ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for Univerge SV9100

Brand: Teac Pages: 2

Brand: Yealink Pages: 52

Brand: YA Pages: 2

Brand: Infinity Pages: 24

Brand: Xtrons Pages: 24

Syn-Apps VIP-801A-SA

Brand: Valcom Pages: 2

Brand: aija audio Pages: 4

Brand: Yaesu Pages: 39

Brand: TANDBERG Pages: 172

Phontech ICS 6200

Brand: Zenitel Pages: 193

Brand: Nibe Pages: 32

3 DISC SHELF SYSTEM ESTIMATE FWC71C37

Brand: Philips Pages: 2

3 CD CHANGER WITH DOLBY PRO LOGIC PROCESSOR FWP88C

Brand: Philips Pages: 2

Brand: Philips Pages: 2

3 CD CHANGER PRO LOGIC FWP73P37

Brand: Philips Pages: 2

Brand: Philips Pages: 3

Brand: Philips Pages: 12

Brand: Philips Pages: 12

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands